JP7555673B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko machines.

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, a special game is executed when the result of the win/lose judgment is a jackpot, and a large number of prize balls are won by making the game ball enter the big prize opening during the special game. In addition, after the special game ends, the machine transitions to a high base state, which is a time-saving state, and the high base state is continued until a predetermined number of win/lose lotteries have been performed, improving the ease of winning the special game. In addition, the playability of the high base state is improved by providing multiple periods of the high base state (the number of win/lose lotteries that the high base state can continue) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-296598 A

However, in pachinko gaming machines such as those described in Patent Document 1, there is a demand for further improvements in the playability of special games and high base states.

The present invention was developed in consideration of the above problems, and its purpose is to improve the playability of special games and high base states more than ever before.

In one embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine includes:
A starting winning hole into which a game ball can be entered;
A large prize opening that can be in an open state or a closed state;
A winning/losing determination means for executing a winning/losing determination when a game ball enters a starting hole;
A symbol display device that displays a special symbol indicating the result of the winning or losing judgment in a variable and stationary manner;
a special game execution means for executing a special game involving the opening of a big prize opening when the result of the win/loss determination is a win;
Equipped with
As a display of a pattern that shows the result of the winning/losing judgment in a dramatic manner, a first pattern change display and a stop display, and a second pattern change display and a stop display can be displayed,
The first symbol can be temporarily stopped during the display of the special symbol, while the second symbol is continuously displayed even during the temporary stop display of the first symbol.
The first symbol is configured to be displayed overlapping with a predetermined preview performance, while the second symbol is configured not to be displayed overlapping with the predetermined preview performance,
The first symbol is configured to have a different display position depending on whether the current presentation format is the first presentation format or the second presentation format, while the second symbol is configured to have the same display position whether the current presentation format is the first presentation format or the second presentation format,
The variable display of the second symbol is a variable display that switches between a plurality of types of switching modes in a predetermined order,
The multiple types of switching modes include a first mode which is a first switching mode in a predetermined sequence, a middle mode which is a switching mode in the middle of the predetermined sequence, and a last mode which is a last switching mode in the predetermined sequence,
The second symbol is switched to the initial state when the special symbol starts to change, then the second symbol is switched to the intermediate state, then the final state, and then the same initial state is switched to and displayed repeatedly, so that the switching display in a predetermined order can be repeatedly executed.
The system has a plurality of types of presentation formats and is configured to be able to output background music corresponding to the types of presentation formats,
At least in the second presentation format, the predetermined BGM can be continuously output without interruption from the end of the variable display of the special pattern to the start of the next variable display of the special pattern,
When the first symbol is displayed again after being temporarily stopped, the output of the predetermined BGM that has been continued is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or a different BGM from the predetermined BGM is output.
A performance display according to the type of performance format can be executed, and in a second performance format, a performance display according to the second performance format can be executed;
In the second presentation format, when a development presentation is executed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, a presentation display corresponding to the development presentation can be executed instead of a presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format during the execution of the development presentation,
In the second presentation format, when a development presentation is executed after the start of the variable display of a special pattern, and a predetermined presentation is executed after the development presentation is executed to end the development presentation, it is possible to end the presentation display corresponding to the development presentation during the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed, and to execute the presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format again, but even in a specified situation in which the presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format is executed again during the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed, the specified BGM is not output, and in a specific situation in which the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed ends and the variable display of the next special pattern begins, the specified BGM is output from the beginning,
A specific type of first pattern among a plurality of types of first patterns variably displayed in a specific pattern row among a plurality of pattern rows is configured not to change into a predetermined pattern, or to have a relatively low expectation of changing into a predetermined pattern compared to other patterns.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the above.
<Additional Notes>
Other aspects of the present invention will be listed below, but the present invention can be carried out without being limited thereto.
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first start winning hole into which a game ball can be inserted;
A second start winning hole into which the game ball can enter;
A large prize opening that can be in an open state or a closed state;
A variable member attached to the second start winning port and capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first special symbol display unit capable of displaying a first special symbol;
A second special symbol display unit capable of displaying a second special symbol;
A normal pattern display unit capable of displaying a normal pattern;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of a game;
A performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
a sub-game unit that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
A first random number can be obtained based on a ball entering the first starting winning hole,
When the first random number is acquired, the first random number is configured to be stored as a first reserve;
A winning/losing lottery is executed based on a first random number related to the first reservation, and a variation pattern of the first special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning/losing lottery.
The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit based on the determined variable pattern of the first special symbol, and then the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped manner;
A second random number can be obtained based on the ball entering the second start winning hole,
When the second random number is acquired, the second random number is configured to be stored as a second reserve;
A winning/losing lottery is executed based on the second random number related to the second reservation, and a variation pattern of the second special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning/losing lottery.
The second special symbol is configured to be capable of being stopped and displayed after the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit based on the determined variation pattern of the second special symbol,
After the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the first random number is a winning result and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the second random number is a winning result and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a special game that can make the big prize winning slot advantageous for the player can be executed,
The game is configured to be able to execute an auxiliary game that can set the variable member to a state advantageous to the player by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner after the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display unit,
As game states relating to the ease of ball entry into the second start winning hole, there are a low base state and a high base state in which the ease of ball entry into the second start winning hole is higher than that in the low base state, and the game state is configured to be able to transition to the high base state by satisfying a predetermined transition condition;
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that, when a second special pattern which is a winning result based on a second random number is being displayed in a changing manner and a predetermined number of second reserves exist, it is configured to be able to suggest or notify that a number of special games are scheduled to be played in excess of the predetermined number during the changing display or during the execution of the special game related to the winning result.

In addition, any combination of the components of the invention described above, mutual substitution of the components or expressions of the invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., and configurations related to the embodiments and modified examples described in the description for carrying out the invention are also valid aspects of the invention.

The gaming machine of the present invention can improve the playability of special games and high base states more than ever before.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. This is an oblique view of the front of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine with the frame member open. This is an oblique view from the rear of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine with the frame member open. This is an oblique view showing a game board attached to the pachinko gaming machine in question. This is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing the power-on process of the main control board of the pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. This is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine that is the subject of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a win/loss selection table for the assumed pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This figure shows a fluctuation pattern lottery table during a low base state of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern lottery table during a high base state of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referenced during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing the power-on process of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine that is the subject of the invention. This figure shows the interrupt processing of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine that is the subject of the present invention. This is a diagram showing the game presentation of the changing pattern display (while decorative patterns are displayed stopped) during normal play (low probability/low base) of the pachinko game machine that is the subject of the invention. This is a diagram showing the game presentation when the assumed pachinko gaming machine is performing a reach presentation that has a high expectation of resulting in a jackpot. This is a diagram showing the game presentation when a jackpot game is being played on the pachinko gaming machine that is the subject of the invention. This is a diagram showing the game presentation when the electric chute support function is operating during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the pachinko game machine in question. A diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (reserved charge presentation) for a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (breakthrough zone battle presentation) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (breakthrough zone battle victory presentation) for a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (V prize promotion presentation) during small jackpot play in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (a jackpot type notification presentation) during a special game start demo in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation during a special game (first jackpot) when transitioning to a specific specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation during a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the presentation during a special game (second jackpot) after a specific specific game (pseudo jackpot) is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation during a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment (first half of the battle mode). This figure shows an example of a presentation (reserved charge presentation (battle mode)) that is displayed when there are up to four reserved balls remaining after the final change in a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a presentation (battle mode final battle presentation) displayed when there are up to four reserved balls remaining after the final change in a specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of the arrangement of winning devices, etc. in the game area of a pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. A diagram showing the distribution ratio of big win (small win) patterns in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. A figure showing an example of the presentation of a long-term chance state in a pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. A figure showing an example of the normal electric device opening presentation in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-2 embodiment. A figure showing an example of the presentation during chance time in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-2nd embodiment. A figure showing another example of the presentation during the chance time of the pachinko game machine of the second-2nd embodiment. A figure showing an example of the presentation during super chance time in the pachinko game machine of the second-2nd embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the second-third embodiment. A diagram showing the distribution ratio of big win (small win) patterns in the pachinko gaming machine of the second and third embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen for setting the automatic operation function of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a screen after the automatic operation function of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is set. A figure showing an example of a screen for selecting the effect for which you want to set the automatic operation timing of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a screen for setting the automatic operation timing of a pachinko game machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of the arrangement of winning devices, etc. in the game area of a pachinko game machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen regarding the occurrence of the ``rescue function'' of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment (when there is a reserve related to the first special pattern at the time of the 699th spin). A figure showing an example of a presentation screen regarding the occurrence of the ``rescue function'' of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment (when there are no reserved symbols related to the first special pattern at the time of the 699th spin). A figure showing an example of a variation pattern regarding the special pattern lottery of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the winning/losing result, pattern, and variation pattern for the normal pattern lottery of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the arrangement of winning devices, etc. in the game area of a pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen regarding the occurrence of the ``rescue function'' of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment (when the change at the 500th spin is the change of the first special pattern). A figure showing an example of a presentation screen regarding the occurrence of the ``rescue function'' of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment (when the change at the 500th spin is the change of the second special pattern). A figure showing an example of the arrangement of winning devices, etc. in the game area of a pachinko game machine in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen during special play in a pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing another example of the presentation screen during special play of the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen after the special game of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment ends. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a special game involving the first special pattern is executed on the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a special game involving the second special pattern is executed in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing the pattern types for the first special pattern and the second special pattern of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A diagram showing the termination conditions of the high base state in a pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the presentation of a high base state (ST mode) in a pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the high base state (battle mode) presentation in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the high base state (super invincible battle mode) presentation in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the high base state (invincible battle mode) presentation in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko game machine of the 9-1st embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (battle victory) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-1st embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation (battle defeat) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-1st embodiment. A figure showing an example of presentation (final battle) in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-1st embodiment. A figure showing presentation example 1 in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-2 embodiment. A figure showing presentation example 2 in the pachinko gaming machine of the 9-2 embodiment. A diagram showing the inter-round time in a pachinko gaming machine of the tenth embodiment.

(Based Technology)
The pachinko machine on which the present invention is based (hereinafter referred to as the "based technology") will be described below with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of a pachinko machine related to the based technology, a pachinko machine is shown in Figures 1 and 3, and a game board provided in this pachinko machine is shown in Figure 4. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko machine will be described with reference to these figures. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 2 will be referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machines]
First, we will explain the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko machine P. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine P is configured with a rectangular outer shell, and is attached to the front of the opening of the outer frame P1, which is fixed in the gaming facility, by upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the left front edge of each other, allowing the front frame P2 to be opened and closed sideways and to be attached and detached.

The game board P5 and glass frame P3 are set removably on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 is rectangular and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge section 10, lower hinge section 20) so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be detached. The game board P5 is set removably on the front side of the front frame P2, and is configured so that the player can see the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3, which is held closed. In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated to the left or right by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking section P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, and the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked, depending on the direction of rotation. As a specific example, inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking unit P30 and turning it to the right unlocks the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2, and inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking unit P30 and turning it to the left unlocks the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3.

The lower part of the glass frame P3 is provided with upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls. The glass frame P3 is also provided with a performance lamp P350 that emits light according to the development of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. A presentation operation unit P380 for performing a specified presentation operation is attached to the center of the bottom of the glass frame P3. The presentation operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine shown as the base technology has a push-in input button P381 and a tilt-in operation lever P382. The button P381 can be operated by the player at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable role object P360) provided in the glass frame, and allows operation input when the operation means itself is displaced to a state in which it protrudes upward (input permitted state) (multiple operations are possible with one presentation operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the bottom right of the front frame P2 for adjusting the launching operation and launch strength of the game balls. The bottom of the front frame P2 is further provided with a launching device unit P240, which, although not shown in the figure, includes a ball feed mechanism P241 that sends out the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, a launching device P242 with a launching mechanism (a hitting hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that shoots the game balls sent out from the ball feed mechanism toward the play area P501, and a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operation of the ball feed mechanism P241 and the launching device P242.

As shown in Figure 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is constructed based on a substrate formed into a rectangular flat plate using transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and Figure 4 shows an oblique view of the game board unit P5. Figure 4 illustrates the state in which the performance device P560 (also called the "movable performance device," "performance movable body," "performance movable device," etc.) provided on the game board unit is in operation. The front of the game board P5 is provided with an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right, an arc-shaped inner rail P503 arranged from the lower center of the game board to the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502, and a rail ornament P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 at the upper right to the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape opening to the left, and a substantially circular game area P501 is partitioned and formed inside surrounded by the outer rail P502, the inner rail P503, and the rail ornament P504. This game area P501 has a left area P501L (left hitting area) which is the area to the left of the center role P540, and a right area P501R (right hitting area) which is the area to the right of the center role P540, based on the center role P540 described later arranged in the approximately center. Additionally, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball shot out by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, various winning devices (called "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a first start winning port P711 (first start port), a second start winning port P721 (second start port), a general winning port P731, a general winning port P741 (a general winning gate device), and a large winning port P751 (attacker) are arranged, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown). Note that there may be one large winning port, or there may be multiple large winning ports. In addition, in this specification, in terms of the configuration of the ball entry device, the game ball is detected by an internal detection switch as "entering" or "winning (especially winning balls)" in contrast to ball entry devices that are discharged after entering the ball entry device and ball entry devices that continue to flow down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type), and balls that flow down to the downstream game area such as gate type ball entry ports are sometimes described as "passing through." Also, the ball entry device may be referred to as the ball entry port, and the winning device as the winning port.

In addition, at the bottom right of the game area P501, the main control display devices P50, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, and the normal symbol display device P53, which are controlled to be turned on by the main control board described below, are arranged in a concentrated manner. At approximately the center of the game area P501, a center role device P540 is arranged, and the screen of the performance display device P80 is arranged so that it can be seen through the opening of this center role device P540. At the top of this center role device P540, etc., a performance role device P560 (movable role device) that performs a performance operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the bottom end of the game area P501, an out hole P790 is provided through which game balls that flow down without entering the winning holes of various ball entry devices can pass. Game balls that enter the winning ports of various winning devices or that flow into the outlet P790 flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through through holes (not shown) formed in the front and rear of the game board P5, are collected in a recovery flow path (used ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2, and are discharged from the game machine after passing through an out ball sensor P792 (shot ball count sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame to detect the total number of shot game balls.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a start winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning port P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of a game ball into the first start winning port P711 triggers the acquisition of a random number (also called a first random number, details of which will be described later) used in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning port P711 either immediately after the ball enters or after a holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a start winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start winning device P720 is provided with a second start winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a normal electric device P770 (also called a variable member) which is a movable body that switches to a state in which the ball can easily enter the second start winning port P721 when the game ball wins the normal symbol lottery described later. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning port P721 is an opportunity to obtain a random number (also called a second random number, details of which will be described later) used in the lottery for the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after the ball enters the second start winning port P721 or after the holding period has elapsed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning port P721. The second start winning device P721 changes between an open state where the game ball can or easily enter the second start winning port P721 and a closed state where the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the second start winning port P721 by the operation of the normal electric role P770 (also called auxiliary play). In other words, the second start winning device P720 is structured so that the game ball has difficulty entering the second start winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and when it is opened by a predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the normal pattern lottery) described below, the game ball becomes easy to enter. Note that various forms of the structure of the normal electric role P770 are known, and since there are cases where the structure does not change the ease of entry by opening the movable body P771, the "open state" and the "closed state" are sometimes written as "easy ball entry state (easy ball entry mode)" and "difficult ball entry state (difficult ball entry mode)", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko game machine P in this premise technology, the left general winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general winning device P730R is configured as part of the large winning device P750 described later. The entry of a game ball into the general winning port P731 triggers the payout of prize balls, just like other winning devices. Note that the number and location of the general winning ports P731 in the premise pachinko game machine are merely examples, and they may be configured to be arranged only in the right hitting area P501R.

The normal symbol operation gate device P740 (normal symbol operation port) is provided as a start ball entry port corresponding to normal symbol play. This normal symbol operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which the game ball can pass, and is configured so that the game ball that entered can flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball through the operation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not the second start winning device P720 is opened, that is, whether or not the normal electric role P770 is operated. As a modified example, it is also possible to configure the general winning port P731 described above to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and in this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, it is also possible to provide a function of generating prize balls as one winning device (normal symbol operation winning port).

The big prize device P750 is configured with a big prize opening P751 (special electric device P755) that opens and closes when the result of the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery is a big prize or a small prize, and may be called an "attacker (device)". The big prize device P750 changes between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the big prize opening P751 (for example, a state in which the special electric device P755 is activated), and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the big prize opening P751 (for example, a state in which the special electric device P755 is not activated). In a big prize game, multiple rounds of play (unit games) involving the opening and closing of the big prize opening P751 are played. In addition, even if the special electric role P755 is in an activated state, the movable body P756 constituting the large prize winning port P751 may be in a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter due to a series of activation patterns (also called "opening patterns"). In addition, the name of the special game may be subdivided according to the number of round games to be executed. For example, a special game in which 10 round games are executed is preferably called a 10 round jackpot, a 10R jackpot, a 10 round special game, a 10R special game, etc. ("R" is the initial letter "R" of "round"). Furthermore, the name of the special game may be subdivided according to the game state to which the game is transitioned after the special game is executed. For example, a special game in which 10 rounds of play are executed and the probability fluctuation function is activated after the special game ends is preferably called a 10-round variable jackpot, a 10R variable jackpot, a 10-round variable special game, a 10R variable special game, etc., and a special game in which 3 rounds of play are executed and the probability fluctuation function is not activated after the special game ends is preferably called a 3-round regular jackpot, a 3R regular jackpot, a 3-round regular special game, a 3R regular special game, etc.

Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big prize device P750 may be provided with a specific area P760 (called a "V zone" or "V area"; depending on the function, it may be called a "probability fluctuation function activation area" or "continuation area") through which the gaming ball can pass. Examples of functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating a probability fluctuation function (described below) after a big win game when the ball passes through a specific area during a big win game, (b) activating a role-continuous activation device (a flag for continuously activating a special electric role) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, and granting the right to play a big win game, and (c) making the execution of a subsequent round definite or not based on whether or not a specific area has been passed in a specific round during a big win game. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area", and the flow path may be divided by the action of the opening/closing member P761, so that the ball passes through the specific area P760 or a non-specific area other than the specific area. Also, during a big win game or a small win game, there may be periods during which the passage of the game ball through the specific area P761 is valid and periods during which it is invalid.

In the pachinko game machine P, the big prize device P750 is provided in the right area P501R (right-hand hit area) of the game area P501. Therefore, in a big prize game or a small prize game, when a game ball is shot toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big prize opening P751 by aiming at the right area P501R, i.e., hitting from the right.

Next, the basic structure of the rear side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. A rear set unit P4 with a window that communicates front and rear is attached to the rear side of the front frame to attach the game board unit P5 in the center. The rear set unit P4 is provided with a storage tank P401 that stores a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility, a gutter member P402 that allows the game balls from the storage tank P401 to flow down, a prize ball payout unit P410 that pays out the game balls guided by the gutter member, and a rear passage member P403 that allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342. In addition, a ball removal mechanism (a ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member P406 that forms a flow path that removes game balls from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever) is provided on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340.

On the back side of the game board P5, there are attached a main control board P40 (also called the main game section) that controls the overall game progress of the pachinko game machine P, a performance control board P41 (also called the sub game section) that controls the overall performance according to the game progress associated with the control of the main control board P40, and an image control board P42 (also called the image control section) that controls the image display according to the game development. In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present premise technology, the performance control board P41 and the image control board P42 are integrated with the performance display device P80 (also called the liquid crystal display device or performance display section) to form a performance display unit in an assembly state. In contrast, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are attached a payout control board P43 (also called the payout control section) that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply board P44 (not shown, also called the power supply section or power supply section) that receives power from the game facility and supplies power to various control boards and electric and electronic components. To prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case with a crimping structure and a sealing seal structure in an assembled state and are disposed in a predetermined position on the back of the game board P5 or the back of the back set unit P4. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko game machine are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), allowing the game to proceed on the pachinko game machine P and effects to be executed.

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows the functional blocks of the assumed pachinko gaming machine.

The pachinko machine is configured with functions shared among a power supply board P44 that generates power for use within the machine based on AC power supplied from outside the machine, a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic game operations and game progress, a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) that acts as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and a presentation control board P41 that controls presentation operations and processing. Note that the arrows in the figure are divided by function, with solid arrows indicating the relationship between transmission and reception at the top and dashed arrows indicating the relationship of electrical connections.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the power supply board P44, the power supply board P44 generates and supplies the power required for the operation of the main control board P40, the presentation control board P41, the payout control board P43, and the various gaming devices electrically connected to them, which will be described later. As will be described in more detail below, the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is the switch operation that triggers the processing of information related to the gaming machine settings, the power switch is protected by an opening and closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation.

The main control board P40 is connected to various detection switches related to the progress of games, such as the first start winning port P711 (special chart 1 start port switch P712), the second start winning port P721 (special chart 2 start port switch P722), the large winning port P751 (large winning port switch P752), the regular chart operation port P741 (regular chart operation port switch P742), and other detection switches such as the general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port) and the out port P790, as well as switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring for fraud, such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and outputs information related to the drive mode to game devices such as the special electric device drive means P70, which is composed of solenoids and is driven to open the large prize opening P751 when a big win or small win occurs, and the normal electric device drive means P71, which is driven to put the normal electric device P770 in a state where it is easy to win a ball when the normal pattern lottery is won.

Sensors and other devices connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board, and notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence or non-occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection, and receive information output from terminals called output ports, such as the special electric role drive means P70, the normal electric role drive means P71, and other information such as launch permission signals for the launch device P242, to control the respective devices and equipment.

The main control board P40 is also connected to the main control display device P50, which displays various information such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 (also called the first special symbol display unit and the second special symbol display unit) that display the first and second special symbols, the round indicator light P54 that indicates the type of big win or small win (number of rounds), and the status indicator light P55 that indicates the game status, as well as the performance display device P59 that displays the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal play, i.e., the ratio of the number of winning balls to the total number of shots). There are many other methods of recording the "base value," such as data that excludes winnings from the start winning slot P711, etc., but these will be explained separately when necessary in this invention, and details will be omitted in the explanation of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise of the invention.

The main control board P40 is also configured to be electrically connectable to devices external to the gaming machine via an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals between them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the other control boards within the gaming machine, the performance control board P41 and the payout control board P43.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control status of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40, and also controls the launch of game balls by the launch device unit P240 in response to the operation of the handle P204 by the player. The payout device P410 has, as an example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launch device (launch device unit) P240 is configured to move the game balls remaining in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to a launchable position by the ball feed unit P241, and then launch the game balls by hitting the game balls with a striking hammer. In addition, the payout control board P43 is equipped with a RAM clear switch P48 that is primarily used to initialize the gaming machine and clear errors that occur during play, and operation information for the RAM clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used to connect the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40.

The performance control board P41 is electrically connected to the performance display device P80, the driving source and position detection sensor (e.g., drive motor, initial position detection sensor, performance position detection sensor) of the performance movable prop P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), the performance operation unit P380 (e.g., the performance button P381, the performance lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the performance operation means P81), and the performance lamp P82 (also called "decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", or "frame lamp (P350)"), and transmits and receives various control signals between each of them. In addition, the connection between the performance control board P42 and the performance display device P80 may be made via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the performance display device P80 (e.g., a device that displays images such as a liquid crystal display device). In addition, in the pachinko game machine that is the premise of this embodiment, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41, but it may also be configured to control the speaker P83 by providing a separate audio control board equipped with an IC for audio control, etc.

Data transmission between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41 is performed in one direction, from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41. Since the one-way data transmission from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the performance control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the performance control board P41 cannot refer to information generated by the main control board P40 unless that information is transmitted. Note that in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of this embodiment, data is transmitted in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as with the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, data may be transmitted in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic gameplay]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as above will be explained for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire game balls compared to the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state", and among the normal game states, there are multiple game states that have different degrees of advantage for the player in acquiring the right to transition to the special game state, and among the multiple normal game states, a state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) is expressed as a "specific game state". The "special game state" refers to the so-called "big win game" and "small win game," in which the special electric device drive means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, causing the big prize opening P751 to open, making it easy to obtain game balls.

[Normal game state (low probability/low base state)]
First, the game method and game progress in the normal game state will be explained. The normal game state described here is an explanation of the "normal game state (low probability/low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally describes the game state in the situation where the player starts playing. The game method and game progress in the specific game state, and the meaning of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" will be described later.

In the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the method of playing is as follows: first, the player operates the handle P204 to launch the game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the assumed pachinko game machine P, in the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the player plays the game by operating the handle P204 so that the game ball is launched toward the left side area P501L (left hitting area) of the game area.

When a game ball is launched into the left area P501L of the game area by a player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501 and is displaced in the direction of flow by the game nails P510 (not shown) (also called "obstacle nails" or "nails") and the windmill P511, and enters (wins) the first start winning hole P711 located at the approximately lower center of the game area P501 of the game board, which is called the "navel," or the general winning hole P731L of the left general winning device, or does not enter either winning hole and enters the out hole P790 as a played game ball. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 outputs information (control command) to the payout control board P43 to play the number of winning balls set for each winning hole, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out the winning balls.

Here, a special 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning port P711, and when a player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L in the game area, which is a possible game state (game result), and the ball enters the first start winning port P711, game ball detection information of the special 1 start port switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the game ball detection information input from the special symbol 1 start port switch P712, it not only dispenses a predetermined number of game balls, but also obtains a random number value for performing a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. The random number value can be obtained by obtaining a random number value generated by a random number generation circuit on an electrical circuit based on the detection of a game ball (hard latch), or by executing a process to obtain a random number value from a previous random number generation circuit when the control device of the main control board P40 confirms the game ball detection information through software processing, or by obtaining a random number value updated by software (soft latch). Depending on the random number value to be obtained, these methods may be used, or they may be used in combination. Note that if a ball enters the general winning port, no random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and only prize balls are dispensed.

The lottery for controlling the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", which includes a "win/lose lottery", a "win pattern lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". A "win/lose lottery" is a process that uses an acquired random number value to determine whether the lottery result is a "jackpot" or a "lose" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "small win"). A "win pattern lottery" (sometimes simply called a "pattern lottery") is a process that determines the display pattern of the stop display pattern that indicates the win/lose lottery result on the special pattern display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50, and it is possible to determine one pattern from multiple stop display patterns for one lottery result (jackpot, small win), and it is possible to differ the execution mode of the special game in the "jackpot" and "small win" depending on the stop display pattern determined here. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process that determines the timing of displaying the stop display pattern indicating the result of the win/lose lottery on the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and determines the time (called the "variable display time" or "variable pattern") at which the variable display indicating that the special pattern lottery has been executed is displayed on the special pattern display device P51 (P52). Different random numbers are generally used for the "win/lose lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", and are called the "win/lose lottery random number", "pattern random number", and "variable pattern random number", respectively. The lottery for controlling the second special pattern, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball on the special pattern 2 start switch P722, is also a similar "special pattern lottery". The "special pattern lottery" will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball into the left area P501L of the game area, causing the game ball to enter the first start winning port P711, causing a lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern lottery), and a special pattern stop display pattern indicating a "big win" ("small win") is displayed on the special pattern display device, thereby playing a game with the aim of acquiring the right to play the special game.

As mentioned above, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery during the process in which the player receives the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko game machine P, if a new ball enters the start winning slot (first start winning slot P711, second start winning slot P721) during the period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the pachinko game machine P has a hold function that temporarily stores a random number value corresponding to the right to execute a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries. In the pachinko game machine P, the hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning slot P711 makes it possible to hold up to four special symbol lotteries. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko game machine P of the present premise technology, in addition to the hold function for the first special symbol, the hold function for the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol also makes it possible to hold the random number value used for up to four special symbol lotteries.

Thus, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left area P501L of the game area to execute a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern. Then, in the special pattern lottery, if the player wins a lottery result that results in a special game state such as a "big win" or "small win," and the special pattern display device displays that the player has gained the right to transition to the special game state, the game state of the pachinko game machine P transitions to the special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and game progress in the special game state will be explained. In the special game state, there are a "big win (game)" and a "small win (game)", but in both cases, the special electric role P755 is operated, that is, a drive signal is output from the main control board P40 to the special electric role drive means P70, and the big prize winning port P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference between them is that the "big win" is based on the operation of the role continuous operation device that operates the special electric role P755 several times in succession, while the "small win" ends with one operation of the special electric role. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role (jackpot) based on the operation of the role continuous operation device, the special electric role P755 can be operated in a more advantageous manner for the player, specifically, the total opening time of the big prize winning port P751 in the operation state of the role continuous operation device (jackpot) is allowed to be up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big prize winning port P751 in the small prize is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following explanation of the game method and game progress in the special game state, an explanation will be given using a jackpot as an example.

The progress of the special game in the pachinko game machine P of the premise technology is composed of, in chronological order, a presentation period called the "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called the "big win start demo" or "linked role operation start demo", and in the case of a small win, it is called the "small win start demo") for notifying the player that various special games have been won, a period called a "round (game)" (also called a "unit game") in which the special electric role device P755 operates once, and a period called the "special game end demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called the "big win end demo" or "linked role operation end demo", and in the case of a small win, it is called the "small win end demo") for notifying the player of the game result (number of game balls won, etc.) during the special game and the type of normal game state (including specific game state) to which the player will transition.

Next, the method of playing during each of the above-mentioned special games will be explained. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the premise technology, the large prize winning port P751 is located in the right area P501R (right-hitting area) of the game area, and since it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the large prize winning port P751 even if the game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the normal game state (low probability/low base state), a right-hitting notification effect is executed using the effect display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and effect lamp P82 to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right area P501R (right-hitting area) of the game area before the round game begins in the special game, when the large prize winning port P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. In response to the right-hit notification, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204 to adjust the strength of the game ball's launch, and changes the launch position so that the game ball flows down into the right-side area P501R (right-hit area) of the game area (performing a right hit).

When the "round (game)" period begins, the pachinko game machine P of the premise technology puts the big prize opening P751 in an easy or difficult ball entry state in response to a drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric device drive means P70, and produces effects such as a celebration of winning a big prize (small prize) according to the execution period of the special game, or an effect suggesting whether the normal game state to which the player transitions after the special game ends will be a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player. The player shoots game balls into the right area P501R (right-hand hitting area) of the game area in order to get a large number of game balls by having the game balls enter the big prize opening P751.

A single "round (game)" period ends when the opening pattern of the large prize opening (operation mode of the special electric device) determined based on the type of big win (small win) is completed (the opening time has elapsed) or when a predetermined "prescribed number" of game balls (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) enter the slot. Then, depending on the type of special game state being executed (type of big win, small win), when all rounds of play to be executed have ended, the state transitions to a "special game end demo" state.

Next, when the "special game end demo" period begins, the pachinko game machine P of the premise technology performs an effect to announce the number of game balls acquired during the current special game state period, and the cumulative number of game balls acquired during multiple special game states that occurred consecutively with the specific game period described below (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability/low base state)), and also executes an effect to announce the type of normal game state to transition to after the special game state, and an effect related to the play method in the game state to transition to (such as the right-hit announcement effect described above). The player operates the handle in preparation for play according to the type of normal game state to transition to, based on the effect being executed.

In most of the pachinko gaming machines P that are the premise of this system, with a few exceptions, when a jackpot game is executed as a special gaming state, the normal gaming state transitions to a state called a "specific gaming state" in which the player is more likely to obtain the right to transition to the special gaming state, and the gameplay allows the player to enjoy a so-called "cascade" in which the specific gaming state and the special gaming state are repeated in succession.

[Specific game state]
Next, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in Fig. 6, there are three specific game states. The elements that distinguish these types are the "probability state" and the "base state", and the specific game state is formed by combining these.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is based on the operating state of the "probability change function" (also called "probability change"), which is a function that changes the probability of the lottery result being a "jackpot" in the special symbol lottery. When the probability change function is operating, the probability of the special symbol lottery result being a "jackpot" is higher than when it is not operating. This is expressed as a "high probability (state)" (sometimes expressed as a "probability change state" or "probability change state"). When the probability change function is not operating, this is expressed as a "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of a jackpot is higher for one special symbol lottery.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", i.e., "the (expected value of) the proportion of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and generally, a state in which the operation of the normal electric device P770 is easier (more advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is called a "high base (state)" (also called an "electric chute support (electric support) state"). Note that, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chute support function" is not in operation, if the recommended game ball firing position is switched to increase the "proportion of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", it may be expressed as a "high base (state)". The "high base (state)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it is easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, and the player can aim to acquire the special game state while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

The "electric chute support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric role P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), and is mainly composed of a combination of three functions (at least one of which is included). The three functions that make up the "electric chute support function" are "normal symbol probability change", "normal symbol time reduction", and "(normal electric role) opening extension". "Normal symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that the normal electric role will be activated in the "normal symbol lottery". "Normal symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the time from when the normal symbol lottery is executed to when the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 (also referred to as the normal symbol display unit) in the main control display device P50. "Extended opening of normal electric device" refers to changing the operation of the normal electric device P770 in a manner that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the winning hole for the normal electric device P770, depending on the type of winning that is selected in the normal pattern lottery. One example of this is extending the total time that the normal electric device is in a state that makes it easier for a ball to enter.

The "normal symbol lottery" differs from the special symbol lottery described above in that the above is a lottery regarding the operation of the special electric device P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery regarding the operation of the normal electric device P770, and the lottery is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the normal symbol operation gate device P740. However, they are almost the same in that the win/loss, symbol, and variation pattern are determined by lottery and they have a reservation function. When specifically expressing the lottery for win/loss, symbol, and variation pattern in the normal symbol lottery, they are expressed with "normal symbol" (or "normal symbol") at the beginning, such as "normal symbol win/loss lottery", "normal symbol pattern lottery", and "normal symbol variation pattern lottery".

The "probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game states", but another element that constitutes a specific game state is the "time-saving state" (also called the "variable time-saving state" or the state in which the "variable time-saving function" is activated). Generally, the "time-saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variable pattern) of a special symbol is shortened and the number of times special symbol lotteries are performed per unit time increases, which is an advantageous state for the player in that more special symbol lotteries can be performed per unit time. The "time-saving state" (variable time-saving state) is often controlled simultaneously with the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chute support state", and it rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific gaming state 1: low probability/high base state]
Returning to the explanation of the "specific gaming state", first, the progress of the game and the playing method in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 include (a) winning a jackpot game in each state, and (b) a predetermined number of games having passed (*only (8)). Although not shown, there are also cases where the game state transitions from the specific game state 1 to the specific game state 1 again via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special game state are met, the transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (2), (7), and (11) include (c) winning a jackpot game of a type that will cause a transition to the respective game state in the specific game state 1, and (d) a predetermined number of games having passed (*only (2)). Note that the "number of games" refers to the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed" as an example.

When the game moves to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), the pachinko game machine P is in a state where both the "electric chute support function" and the "variable time reduction function" described above are activated. In the layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P, the normal symbol operation gate device P740 and the second start winning port P721 related to the normal electric role are arranged in the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game area, and the player can easily receive the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by performing a "right hit" that shoots the game ball into the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P is also controlled in the "time reduction state" described above in specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is reached, the first step is for the player to shoot the game ball into the right area P501R (right-hand hitting area) of the game area and have it enter (pass) through the normal symbol operation gate device P740, and when the ball enters (passes) through the normal symbol operation gate device P740, a normal symbol lottery is held on the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) has a high probability (about 1/1) of winning due to the operation of the normal symbol probability function, so when one game ball enters (passes) through the normal symbol operation gate device P740, one operation of the normal electric device P770 occurs. When the normal electric device P770 is activated, the second start winning hole P721, which is the trigger for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern in the pachinko game machine P, becomes in a ball-ease state, and the player launches a game ball toward the second start winning hole P721 as the second step. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is executed, and a lottery for the right to play a special game (big win, small win) is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special symbol lottery has been received) has elapsed depending on the game state transition condition that caused the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.) or when a new jackpot game is won (note that there are cases where the state transitions to this state again after a jackpot game). In the case of winning a small jackpot game, the specific game state is often not ended, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may be designed to end when a small jackpot game is won (or when multiple small jackpot games are won, or when a specific type of small jackpot game is won). When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of plays, it transitions to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 2: high probability/high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) winning a jackpot in each state. Although not shown, there are also cases where the game state transitions from the specific game state 2 back to the specific game state 2 via a jackpot. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special game state are met, the game state transitions as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (4), (8), and (10) include (b) winning a jackpot game of a type that will cause a transition to the respective game state in the specific game state 2, and (c) the passage of a predetermined number of games.

When the pachinko game machine P transitions to specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state), it differs from specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) in that the "probability fluctuation function" is activated to enter a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in specific game state 2 are the same as in specific game state 1, but the difference is that the player can win a jackpot earlier due to the higher probability of winning the special pattern lottery.

Specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special pattern lottery has been received) has elapsed depending on the game state transition condition that caused the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.) or when a new jackpot game is won (note that there are cases where the state transitions to this state again after a jackpot game). Specific game state 2 generally does not end if a small jackpot game is won. If specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends due to the number of plays, it transitions to the normal game state (low probability/low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), or specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 3: high probability/low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 include (a) winning a jackpot game in each state, and (b) the passage of a predetermined number of games (*only (10)). Although not shown, there are also cases where the game state transitions from the specific game state 3 to the specific game state 3 again via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, the transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. 6. The game state transition conditions for (6), (9), and (12) include (c) winning a jackpot game of a type that will cause a transition to the respective game state in the specific game state 3, and (d) the passage of a predetermined number of games (*only (6)).

When the game moves to specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state), the pachinko game machine P assumes that the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and the "high probability (state)" is entered, and unlike specific game state 1 and specific game state 2, the "electric chute support function" and the "variation time reduction function" are not activated. In the layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P assumes that the normal symbol operation gate device P740 and the second start winning port P721 related to the normal electric device are arranged in the right area P501 (right hit area) of the game area, but even if the player performs a "right hit" in which the game ball is fired into the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game area in specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state), the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage to performing a right hit.

Therefore, the player will play by "hitting from the left" by firing the game ball into the left area P501L (left hitting area) of the play area, and the game method and progress will be the same as in the normal play state (low probability / low base state), except that since the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is high due to the high probability state, the player will be able to win a jackpot game early.

Specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special pattern lottery has been received) has elapsed depending on the game state transition condition that caused the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.) or when a new jackpot play is won (note that there are cases where the state transitions to this state again after a jackpot play). Specific game state 3 generally does not end if a small jackpot play is won. If specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of plays, it transitions to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

Specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) differs from the board layout configuration of Figure 6 described as the underlying pachinko game machine P in that a third start winning port that does not have a normal electric device P770 is placed in the right area P501R (right-hitting area) and a "time-saving state" is activated, allowing many special symbol selections to be made in a short period of time. Depending on the layout configuration of the winning device on the game board and the control of the time-saving state, this may be a game state in which "right-hitting" is recommended.

As explained above, in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses through multiple game states, but it is not necessary for the machine to have all of the game states mentioned above. Therefore, among the game machine specifications that are composed of combinations of multiple game states, examples of game machine specifications (sometimes called "specs") that can be adopted in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P are given below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), examples of types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery include "(Until next time) probability variation", "ST (number of times limit probability variation)", "V probability variation (also called "ball certainty" or "attack round system")", and "latent probability variation". The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in this probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is an 'XX machine (e.g. ST machine)'". In addition, in gaming machines that do not have a probability variation function, there is also a gaming machine specification called "small win V", in which the special device continuous operation device is activated (i.e. transition to a big win game) after passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning port P751 during a small win game.

[(Until next time) guaranteed chance]
First, we will explain "probable change (until next time)". "Probable change until next time" generally indicates the gaming machine specifications for "a pachinko gaming machine in which specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big win game is acquired" as the most advantageous gaming state among the multiple specific gaming states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. In other words, the gaming machine with "probable change until next time" is configured so that the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big win game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of pattern changes, etc.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be cases where the machine is controlled to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state). Also, in "pachinko machines in which specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) continues until the right to play the next jackpot is acquired", the term "probability change until the next time" may be used to mean that the probability fluctuation function continues until the next jackpot, but since the base state is a "low base state" and play similar to the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is required regarding the electric chute support function, it is expressed as "latent probability change" because the probability change continues until the next time when the electric chute support function is not activated.

[ST (number of times cut off)]
Next, we will explain "ST (number of times cut probability change)". "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally indicates the gaming machine specifications for "a pachinko gaming machine in which a specific gaming state 2 (high probability / high base state) is continued until a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are performed (a predetermined number of symbol variations are executed) or until the right to a big win game is acquired".

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be cases where the game state is controlled to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state). As with the above-mentioned "high probability until next time", it is also possible to configure the game state to have a state called "latent high probability (latent ST)" in which the game state is controlled to specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol drawings are performed or the right to play a jackpot is acquired.

In addition, even if the game is in "ST (limited number of times)", if the game state is controlled by ST for a period until the special pattern lottery has been drawn 10,000 times, or if the game machine specifications are such that the probability of a jackpot being won is high and the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed, it may be expressed as "limited time until next time".

As mentioned above, "Kakuhen until next time" and "ST (Kakuhen with cut-number probability)" are distinguished as "Kakuhen states" in terms of gaming machine specifications in that the end times of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery are different. On the other hand, as in the case of "V Kakuhen (Kakuten ball, Attack round system)" explained below, there are also cases where the gaming machine specifications ("specs") are expressed by requiring special conditions regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in a specific gaming state, i.e., the start of the execution of the probability fluctuation function.

[V chance]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "V probability change" will be explained. "V probability change" refers to a gaming machine specification of a pachinko gaming machine that performs control to transition to a specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) with the operation of a probability fluctuation function after a jackpot game when a game ball passes through a "specific area P750" (sometimes called a "V zone" or "V area") provided in a large winning port P751 under a predetermined condition (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round) during a jackpot game before the game state transitions to a specific gaming state. The "specific area" used in "V probability change" may also be referred to as a "probability fluctuation function activation area."

As mentioned above, "V-Kyakuhen" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the game result during the jackpot game (whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area P760), and depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the previously explained "Kyakuhen until next time" or with the same control as "ST", an expression indicating a gaming machine specification different from "V-Kyakuhen (V-Loop)" or "V-ST" is used.

In addition, in pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if a V does not win during a jackpot game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the game is controlled to the normal game state or specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). In this way, whether or not the game state after a jackpot game in which the probability fluctuation function operates can be switched depending on whether or not a V wins, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chute support function can also be changed. As an example, in a "V probability change (V-loop)" machine, if a V wins, the probability fluctuation function and electric chute support function continue until the next jackpot is won, and if a V does not win, the probability fluctuation function does not operate and the electric chute support function is limited to 100 special pattern lotteries.

[Small Hit V]
Next, we will explain the gaming machine specification (spec) called "Small Win V", which is a gaming machine specification that can provide the player with an advantageous gaming state in terms of winning a jackpot without having a probability fluctuation function.

"Small Win V" is a gaming machine specification that activates the continuous operation device of the device following the small win game, i.e., starts the big win game, when the "specific area P760" (sometimes called the "V zone" or "V area") located inside the big win port P751 is passed during the small win game (while the special electric device is operating) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win. In other words, it is a gaming machine specification that allows you to win the big win game without winning the big win result as a result of the special pattern lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small Win V" is a "Type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous device operation device and special electric device as a result of a special pattern lottery, and when the continuous device operation device is not in operation and the special electric device is in operation (when the large prize opening P751 is open), the game activates the continuous device operation device when passing through a specific area P760. It is sometimes referred to as a "Type 1 Small Win V", but since it has gameplay similar to the so-called "Type 2 Pachinko" game machine specifications in conventional pachinko game machines, it is sometimes referred to as a "Type 1/Type 2 Mixed Machine".

In general, pachinko machines that use the "small hit V" as the gaming machine specification do not have a probability variation function (probability fluctuation function), and the degree of advantage changes depending on whether or not the electric chute support function is present. In other words, by configuring the winning slot for the normal electric device P770, which is more likely to win when the electric chute support function is activated, as a starting winning slot that triggers a change in a special pattern that is more likely to win a small hit (for example, a 1/2 chance of winning a small hit), it becomes easier to win a small hit when the electric chute support function is activated, and it becomes possible to aim for a jackpot by winning the V during a small hit game. In this way, rather than increasing the random number range that results in a jackpot as with the probability variation function, the gameplay increases the possibility of winning a jackpot through small hits.

[Other machine specifications]
The gaming machine specifications described above are representative, and several other characteristic gaming machine specifications are known, so we will briefly explain these below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a function that limits the operation of the probability fluctuation function or the electric chute support function when a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chute support function operates occurs repeatedly with the execution of a jackpot game (a so-called "consecutive game" state) and a predetermined number of repetitions (consecutive game count) is reached, even if a jackpot game that would normally activate the probability fluctuation function or the electric chute support function is executed. The limiter function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "variable probability limiter," and the function that limits the "electric chute support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)." A gaming machine equipped with a limiter function is called a "limiter machine."

(Fall)
"Fall" refers to the gaming machine specifications that execute a "fall lottery" to decide whether or not to end the probability variation function each time a special pattern lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special pattern lottery is in operation. When the probability variation function and the electric chute support function are in operation together, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chute support function may end along with the end of the probability variation function, or only the probability variation function may end and the operation of the electric chute support function may continue.

The gaming machine specifications described above can be combined in multiple ways. For example, if "ST" and "Fall" are combined, when the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) is reached, the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) will end (transition to another gaming state) if any of the following conditions is met: (1) the fall-down lottery is won, (2) a predetermined number of special pattern lotteries have been held, or (3) the right to play a jackpot game has been acquired.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board P40 that manages the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of this embodiment. Note that the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of this embodiment, is a pachinko gaming machine that employs "ST (number-cutting guaranteed change)" as the gaming machine specification (spec) mentioned above. Note that in the explanation of this embodiment, the notation "P-s XXX" indicating the processing step in the figure will be expressed as "Step XXX" in the main text.

[Power-on process of the main control board (main control board main loop process)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the power-on process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is the calculation device provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial settings are used to appropriately set the settings required for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial settings are complete, it then executes input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), and performs processing related to the game stop state setting processing (step 1008) based on the contents of these processes.

To explain in more detail, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a process for generating information for determining whether or not a flag indicating whether or not a "setting change process" is in a state in which a "setting value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly the probability of operation of the consecutive operation device of the role, i.e., the probability of a jackpot) can be changed, and whether or not a flag indicating whether or not a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the "setting value" is in a state in which the game stop state setting process that is performed after the said process is performed, is established (turned on or not). In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, data including data indicating the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame), the detection status of whether the RAM clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

The next power-off information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006) is a process to confirm whether the pachinko gaming machine P properly shut off the power the last time the power was turned off, and whether the control data related to the game state at the time the power-off occurred was properly saved and stored in the memory area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, a flag is set (turned on) as an error, and game play is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described below.

The "game stop state setting process" (step 1008) is a process that sets a flag to prevent the player from actually being able to play after the power-on process has ended and the process has transitioned to the main loop process to start playing, and is a process that sets a flag to transition to one of the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", or "irrecoverable error state" states that do not allow game progress, based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power outage information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006). The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in Figure 8, and an explanation will be given based on the description in Figure 8.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1 byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), a specific bit of the 1 byte data is "1", so the process of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is determined that some of the operations required to execute the setting change process are not satisfied, and the operation information of the setting key switch is calculated to be OFF data from the 1 byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Although not shown, in either the case where the result is YES or NO in step 1102, the bit indicating that the frame is open is also calculated to be OFF data from the 1 byte data.

In the next step 1104, it is determined whether the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the situation that is determined as "there is a setting change operation" requires three states: (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is on (it is being rotated), and (3) the RAM clear switch P48 is on. As mentioned above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 in the 1-byte data is set to off, and this step determines whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and any one of the data may be "0"). If it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, i.e., if YES is determined in step 1104, data indicating "setting change in progress" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process ends (steps 1106, 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the next step 1108. Note that if the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (if a recovery operation is performed from an unrecoverable error state), data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set as the initial setting value in the area for storing the setting value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, a determination is made as to whether a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error refers to an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (changing) processing when a situation occurs in which game play cannot proceed, such as a checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. The determination in step 1108 is made based on the results of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power-off processing, and determines whether or not a game stop state should be set. If it is determined that an error state should be set (YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting processing is terminated (steps 1110, step 1118), and if it is determined that no error has occurred, the processing proceeds to the following step 1112.

In the next step 1112, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, the state when proceeding to this step is as follows:
(a) When an operation to transition to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, when the following conditions are met for determining that "a setting change operation has been performed": (1) the frame open switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the RAM clear switch P48 is on.
(a) When a RAM clear operation is performed to clear data, in other words, when the condition (2) that the setting key switch P49 is on is not satisfied and the condition (3) that the RAM clear switch P48 is on is satisfied,
(c) When the power is turned on without any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "RAM clear operation", etc. being performed,
In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is either (a) bit data indicating the on/off state of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", (b) bit data indicating the on/off state of the operation detection state of the RAM clear switch P48 is "1 (on data)", or (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits are "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch P48 has been operated. If the RAM clear operation has been performed (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine performs a process of clearing the game stop state flag in order to clear the RAM and transition to a playable state (step 1114). On the other hand, in a situation other than when the RAM clear operation has been performed, the current 1 byte data is set as is, and at this time, if an operation to transition to the "setting confirmation state" has been performed (if NO is determined in step 1112), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1 byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation in progress" (step 1118). Also, if there is no RAM clear operation or transition to the setting confirmation state, the 1 byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating no game stop as the game stop state flag, and is set as no game stop information.

If a value indicating some kind of stopped state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), the value indicating the stopped state is referenced in the interrupt process (step 2000) which is the main control of game progress and is executed after transition to the main loop (steps 1028 to 1036), which is the game-allowed state in the power-on process (step 1000), and the game progress described as "basic game progress" cannot be allowed; these controls will be described in the explanation of the interrupt process below.

Returning to the explanation of the power-on process in Figure 7, the subsequent process will now be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not a RAM clear operation has been performed (step 1010). A RAM clear operation is when the RAM clear switch P48 is operated when the power to the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Note that this process is executed whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that a RAM clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the RAM memory area of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing of steps 1014 to 1020, a processing is performed in which a performance control command (performance command) is set from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41 when the power is turned on to make the performance control board P41 recognize the state of the gaming machine. More specifically, in step 1014, a processing is performed in which the performance control command that was not sent the last time the power was turned off (when a power outage occurred) is cleared from the storage area. Then, in step 1016, information regarding the current game state of the main control board P40 that has been restored after the power is turned on is generated as a performance control command, and if it is determined in step 1018 that the game is not in a stopped state, in step 1020, the generated performance control command indicating the restored game state is set in an area that stores the transmission data of the performance control command.

When the process related to setting the performance control command at power-on is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) is output from the output port to the special electric device drive means P70 and the normal electric device drive means P71 to return the large prize slot P751 (special electric device P755) and the normal electric device P770 to the state before the power failure. (Step 1022)

When the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on process is completed, a process is performed to set the interval at which the interrupt processing time occurs for the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 1024). In the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise, the interval at which the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described below is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the system moves to a cyclical process called the main loop, in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclical process in the main loop is repeatedly executed until a power outage occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, the main loop processing of the main control board first prohibits the occurrence of interrupt processing in step 1026, and restricts the execution of interrupt processing until the main loop processing is completed (until interrupts are permitted in step 1036).

When interrupts are prohibited, the next step 1028 clears (initializes) an area called a watchdog timer that stores timing information to monitor for CPU runaway of the main control board P40 (such as a situation in which processing loops and stops progressing).

In step 1030, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (for example, whether a power outage signal sent from the power supply board P44 based on a drop in voltage has been input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40), and if a power outage has occurred, a power outage process (step 1032) is executed in which the current game state is stored, power outage information and checksum information are stored, and processing by the CPU of the main control board P40 is stopped. If a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process is performed to update the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery and the random number values used in the normal symbol lottery. Note that some of these random number values are updated in the interrupt process described below, and this process is intended to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant due to the random numbers only being updated in the interrupt process. Note that if there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant by adopting a method of updating the random number values in accordance with these processes, so it is not essential to provide the random number update process within the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process to allow interrupts. Immediately after, processing returns to the first process in the main loop, step 1026, which disables interrupts. However, if an input indicating the interrupt execution period (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred) is received by the CPU of the main control board P40 when the process in step 1036, which allows interrupts, is performed, the interrupt process described below will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to Figure 9. In the pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by the interrupt processing (step 2000), and the sub-module programs that are provided in a changeable manner according to the game machine specifications (specs) are read out and controlled in a general-purpose fixed order. The processing related to these sub-modules will be described briefly below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above (step 2002).

(Input port confirmation process)
The input port confirmation process is a process for generating information that can identify whether or not there is input information necessary for making a decision in the subsequent processes by confirming information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 2004).

The information input to the input port includes input signals related to manual operation, such as input signals indicating the operation status of the RAM clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, input signals indicating the operation status (touched or not) of the handle P204, input signals indicating the game results based on the detection of game balls, such as the special chart 1 start switch P712 and the big prize switch P752, and input signals indicating the detection status of sensors installed to monitor for fraud, such as the magnetic sensor P73, door opening sensor P131, and vibration detection sensor P72.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times at 10 μs (microseconds), and any data that is the same (same bits) in all reads is stored in the RAM of the main control board P40 as the input data for the current interrupt (called "level data"). Note that for any part of the data that was read three times but was not the same in all reads, the data determined in the previous interrupt process (interrupt process 4 ms ago) is used as the level data; in other words, if the data cannot be read correctly in the current interrupt, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

When the input data (level data) for the current interrupt is determined, a comparison is made with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data identifying the bit at which the input data changed from off to on), and the data identifying the switch that changed to on input in the current interrupt is stored.

(Random number update process)
The random number update process is a process for updating so-called software random numbers, which are random numbers updated by software, among various random numbers such as the win/lose random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, and the win/lose random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery (step 2006). In the pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are updated by a random number generation circuit at an update period on the circuit and by a software period, and are configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when they are obtained by combining them.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random numbers are updated. The update method is as follows:
(A) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) the random number, and if the random number exceeds the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set.
(a) A method that subtracts (or adds) an arbitrary prime number from a random number, and adds (or subtracts) the value of the random number range +1 (or the random number range -1) if the result is outside the random number range.
(c) A random number is incremented (or decremented) repeatedly from a random number set as an initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, a separately updated "initial value random number" is set as the new initial value and the same updating is repeated (also called an initial value update type random number).
The update method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as it can maintain the randomness of the random numbers.

(Settings control process)
The setting control process is carried out when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting change in progress" or "setting confirmation in progress" (step 2008).

The setting control process first determines whether the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated, which is stored as a game stop flag during the power-on process, is on or not. If it is not on, i.e., if the setting key was not operated on when the pachinko machine was powered on, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated while the game stop flag is on, the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the current interrupt process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above) is referenced to determine whether to end the "setting change" or "setting confirmation" state. If the setting key switch P49 is off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game becomes playable. After that, depending on whether the state is returning from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state", a presentation control command is set in the presentation control board to return (or start) the presentation.

In addition, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "setting change in progress", the operation status of the RAM clear switch P48 (the switch operated to change the setting value), which plays the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing, is checked during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. When the game stop flag is "setting change in progress", if rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in the current interrupt, the data is changed so that the "setting value" becomes the next setting value in the predetermined change order. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having setting value data in which the setting is switched in sequence from 1 to 6, the setting value is increased by "1" in this setting control process each time rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (RAM clear switch P48) is generated (if the setting value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, by providing processing for the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see Figure 9), the operation of the setting key switch and setting change switch is monitored periodically during interrupt processing, and display data can be output to the display device using the LED output processing described below. This makes it possible to omit setting a program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see Figure 7) when no separate interrupt processing has been set. Note that the power-on processing may also be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and confirmation, control the display device, and update the setting values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
The game stop monitoring process is a process in which the CPU of the main control board reads the game stop flag data generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and checks whether the game is stopped or not (step 2010).

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 and any bit is "1", it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which game stop is required), and it is determined that game is stopped, and some of the processes during the interrupt process (from "timer subtraction process (step 2014)" to "special electric device control process (step 2028)" in Figure 9) are omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, examples of states that require gameplay to be stopped, i.e., states in which the player is unable to play, include "settings being changed," "settings being checked," and "an unrecoverable error occurring."

(Timer decrement process)
The timer subtraction process is a process for updating timer data used to manage time related to the progress of a game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time that is set when the variable display of special symbols begins, timer data update processing triggered by game progress such as the operation time of the special electric device P755 during a jackpot game (the opening time of the large prize opening P751), timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball jams, processing for timing the switching time for switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52, and processing for timing the period during which information is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) from the external information output terminal P77, etc.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is stored in consecutive memory areas in the memory area (RAM memory area) of the main control board P40, separated by type of timer data, such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer."

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the memory area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. The timer update process decrements (-1) the timer data stored in the memory area. Note that if the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it remains "0" even after processing (for example, if the value becomes negative, it is set to "0", or if it is "0", it is not decremented, etc.).

In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, the period of one interrupt is 4 ms, so if the data is from a 1-byte timer, only managed objects that finish updating a maximum of 255 times (approximately 1 second) can be controlled. However, if there is no (or there is little) game information that is managed within 1 second, it is possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not have a 1-byte timer update process. Also, if it is necessary to manage time values that cannot be managed even with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage longer periods, such as a "3-byte timer."

(Validity period setting process)
The valid period setting process is a process for setting a valid period for a winning port that can be changed to an easy or difficult state (mainly the winning ports related to the large winning port P751 and the normal electric device P770) during the period when the winning port is in the easy state and during the valid extension period, and for other periods (when the winning port is in the difficult state and outside the valid extension period) an invalid period (step 2016).

In the assumed pachinko game machine, the process involves setting the validity period based on the winning of the large winning port P751, which is a large winning device, and the winning of the second start winning port P721, which is a second start winning device P720 equipped with a normal electric device P770.

The valid extension period is a fixed control period that is appropriately set according to the structure of the electric device, so that a game ball that enters the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric device P770 just before the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric device P770 transitions to a difficult-to-enter state is treated as a valid winning ball, even after the control period for executing opening control on the electric devices such as the large winning opening P750 (special electric device P755) and the normal electric device P770 has elapsed.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine specifications, if there is a specific area P760 (V area), a valid extension period for the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area P760 may also be set, and in such cases, the valid period of the specific area is also set in this process.

(Winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process is a process that judges whether or not a winning is valid based on the winning of game balls in various winning holes (large winning hole P751, starting hole P711, P721, general winning hole P731) in the pachinko game machine, and generates information that triggers the process of generating the right to a special pattern lottery for prize balls and balls entering the starting hole (generation of a reservation). (Step 2018)

The process involves (a) detecting whether or not a prize has been won for each winning slot in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), (b) determining whether or not a prize has been won during the valid period in the case of a winning slot with a valid period, and if a valid prize has been won for each winning slot, (c) setting a performance control command indicating the winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41, and (d) updating a counter value (called a "winning counter") for storing the number of times an action has occurred based on a winning for each winning slot (in other words, updating a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed actions among the actions based on the detection of the various winning slots).

The winning monitoring process not only checks for winnings at various winning ports, but also checks for the out ball detection switch P792, which is provided for counting out balls, the operation port switch P742, which triggers the normal pattern lottery, and, depending on the gaming machine specifications, the entry and passage of gaming balls into and through the specific area P760 (V area). In addition to the generation of prize balls and the occurrence of triggers for the special pattern lottery, this process also checks for the detection of gaming balls necessary for the operation of the gaming machine (for example, the process of sending information to the performance control board P41 that the operation port switch P742 or the passage through the specific area P760).

(Operation port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process performs processing related to the occurrence of a reservation related to the normal pattern lottery (also called a normal pattern reservation) when rising data of the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol operation switch P742 is detected, the number of reserved numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reserved numbers does not reach the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reserved number, so the data in the memory area storing the reserved number is incremented (+1) to increase the reserved number information by one, and then the normal symbol win/lose random number, normal symbol symbol random number, and normal symbol variation pattern random number are obtained from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding software random number is obtained and stored as a reserved number.

(Normal symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs processing related to the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variable display, and the operation of the normal electric role P770 (step 2022). These processes move to different submodule processes depending on the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol or normal electric role, called the normal symbol status, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: normal symbol waiting", "1: normal symbol variable", "2: normal symbol stop display", "3: normal electric role operation", "4: normal electric role end demo", and processes according to each state are performed.

<<Normal pattern variation start monitoring control process>>
The normal pattern change start monitoring and control process is a sub-module process that is called by the normal pattern control process when the normal pattern status is "0: normal pattern waiting".

In the normal pattern change start monitoring and control process, first, it is confirmed whether the reserved number for the normal pattern lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal pattern has not been generated, so the normal pattern control process is exited. On the other hand, if the reserved number for the normal pattern lottery is not "0", it is determined that the right to change the normal pattern has been generated, and the normal pattern change start conditions are met, so the process related to the start of the normal pattern change is executed.

When it is determined that the normal pattern should start changing, the reserved number information is decremented by 1 from the area that stores reserved number information related to the normal pattern lottery, and then the normal pattern win/loss random number, normal pattern random number, and normal pattern change pattern random number are called out, and the normal pattern win/loss lottery, normal pattern lottery, and normal pattern change pattern lottery are performed, respectively, and the lottery results are stored in the memory area of the main control board, the random number information used this time is cleared, and the reserved number information memory area is shifted so that it is processed in the order stored, and the normal pattern status is updated to "1: normal pattern changing". Regarding the normal pattern lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the aforementioned "base state" (normal pattern probability change function, normal pattern change time reduction function), and a high base state tends to result in a win more likely to occur and a normal pattern change display time is more likely to be determined.

"Normal pattern change processing"
The normal pattern changing process is a sub-module process that is called from the normal pattern control process when the normal pattern status is "1: normal pattern changing".

The normal pattern change process causes the normal pattern display device P53 to execute the normal pattern change display until the normal pattern change display time corresponding to the normal pattern change pattern determined during the normal pattern change start monitoring and control process has elapsed, that is, until the timer (normal pattern change display timer) that manages the normal pattern change display becomes 0 during the timer update process.

More specifically, if the normal pattern change display timer is not 0, the normal pattern display switching counter, whose maximum value is "5", is updated each time this process is executed, and when the normal pattern display switching counter reaches "5", information regarding the next light emission pattern is stored in the memory area that stores data for specifying the light emission pattern of the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device P53. The normal pattern display switching counter is reset to its initial value of "0" when it reaches its maximum value of "5". In other words, the light emission pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of five interrupts (4 ms x 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms).

When the normal pattern variable display time ends, i.e., when the normal pattern variable display timer is at "0", in this process, data for specifying the LED lighting pattern indicating the stopped display mode is stored in a memory area that stores the LED lighting pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 so that the display pattern of the stopped display pattern of the normal pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device P53 in the main control display device P50. Then, the normal pattern fixed time (the time to display the stopped display pattern) is stored in the normal pattern stop display timer, and the normal pattern status is updated to "2: normal pattern stopped and displayed".

"Processing during normal symbol stop display"
The normal symbol stop display processing is a sub-module processing called by the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal pattern stop display process, at the end of the normal pattern change process, the value of the normal pattern stop display timer, which has the pattern fixation time set, is checked to see if it is "0", and when it becomes "0", processing is performed to set up to move on to the next game operation.

When the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is a "win", the operation pattern of the normal electric device P770 is called according to the operation state of the winning symbol and the base state (extension function of the normal electric device), and the operation pattern is set, the winning counter related to the normal electric device P770 is cleared, and the normal symbol status is updated to "3: normal electric device in operation".

On the other hand, when the normal pattern stop display timer reaches "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is a "miss", the normal pattern status is updated to "0: waiting for normal pattern".

"Processing during normal operation of electric devices"
The normal electric role operation processing is a sub-module processing called by the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric role operation".

In the normal electric role operation process, the opening operation (change to an easy-to-score mode) and closing operation (change to a difficult-to-score mode) of the normal electric role are controlled based on the operation pattern of the normal electric role P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, and the establishment of the normal electric role operation end condition is monitored. The operation of the normal electric role P770 ends when (a) a specified number of normal electric role wins set as the normal electric role end condition occur, or (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends (when the normal electric role opening operation period ends).

When the normal electric role end condition is met, the timer area that stores the effective extension period of the normal electric role is set to a time that measures a fixed extension period that is preset in accordance with the structure of the normal electric role P770. Then, the time value related to the normal electric role end demo is set in the normal electric role end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: normal electric role end demo in progress."

"Normal electric device operation end demo processing"
The normal electric role operation end demo processing is a sub-module processing called by the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric role end demo in progress".

The normal electric role operation end demo process waits until the normal electric role operation end demo timer set in the normal electric role operation process reaches "0", and when the normal electric role operation end demo timer reaches "0", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting".

(Start port monitoring process)
The start port monitoring process performs processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the special pattern lottery (a hold related to the first special pattern lottery is also called the first hold or the first special pattern hold, and a hold related to the second special pattern lottery is also called the second hold or the second special pattern hold) when rising data of the special pattern 1 start port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 start port switch P722 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). (step 2024)

More specifically, when the special pattern 1 start port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of reserved numbers related to the special pattern lottery is checked, and if the number of reserved numbers does not reach the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reserved number, so the data in the memory area storing the reserved number is incremented (+1) to increase the reserved number information by one, and then the win/lose random number, pattern random number, and variation pattern random number are obtained from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding software random number is obtained and stored as a reserved number.

The underlying pachinko game machine P has two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes called special symbol 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes called special symbol 2), so for each start hole provided on the game board P5, the reserved number of the corresponding special symbol and the start hole switch data are called up, and the reserved number is added for each start hole and a random number is obtained.

In addition, if the start port to be processed is configured as a start port (electric chute) for a normal electric device, the valid period setting process described above will determine whether or not the start port winning for the normal electric device P770 occurred within the valid period, and if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned process will be performed.

When storing the win/lose random number, pattern random number, and change pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance to generate information that allows prediction of the change content when the change based on the various reserved random numbers is executed, using a preview judgment value table, and notifies the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (referred to as "pre-judgment command," "pre-judgment information," and "pre-reading judgment command"). The pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/lose random number, pattern random number, and change pattern random number, and when they are sent to the performance control board P41, they are used in the lottery for executing the "pre-reading performance" described below.

(Special symbol control process)
The special pattern control process (step 2026) executes one of the following processes based on status information for managing special patterns, called special pattern status (also called "special pattern status"), and status information for managing the operating state of special electric devices, called special electric device status (also called "special electric game status"): management of the start of special pattern change (special pattern change start monitoring and control process), special pattern change in progress process, and special pattern stop pattern display in progress process.

The special symbol status has the states "0: waiting for special symbol to change", "1: special symbol changing", "2: missing symbol stopped and displayed", "3: big win symbol stopped and displayed", and "4: small win symbol stopped and displayed". The special electric device status has the states "0: waiting for win", "1: special electric device operating", "2: big prize opening closed", "3: big win end demo", "4: small win special power operating", "5: small win closed", and "6: small win end demo". Note that depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where there is no small win, in which case there will be no status data related to small wins. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are multiple special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order). In the predetermined order, the second special symbol is given priority in the process, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol starts to change first (the second special symbol changes first), a gaming machine specification that is called "second special symbol (special symbol 2) priority consumption control", and in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P that is the premise, an example of this type of processing will be explained.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When control of the second special symbol begins, first, the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information on the special electric device status are referenced. If the special electric device status is data indicating that a big win or small win is in progress (when the special electric device status is other than "0: waiting for win"), if the first special symbol is changing and the special pattern status of the first special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special pattern change", the process is completed without performing any processing.

When the situation is such that control of the second special symbol is to be executed, a process is executed to update the timer value for control related to the second special symbol. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the memory area that stores the timer, and if the decrement results in a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, a submodule process described below is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to special symbol 2. Note that although there is a timer subtraction process during interrupt processing, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the timer data for control related to the special symbol is managed in the special symbol control process.

Special symbol variation start monitoring and control process
The special symbol variation start monitoring and control process is a sub-module process to which the special symbol status is shifted when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, it is checked whether there is a reserved special symbol being processed as a target, and if there is no reserved, the process is terminated, and if there is a reserved special symbol, the next process is executed. The next process is a special symbol lottery that is executed when the change starts. The special symbol lottery first reads and inspects the data stored as the setting value to determine whether the setting value information is appropriate. If the setting value is appropriate, the appropriate lottery table is selected by referring to the data in the area that stores each flag indicating the game state, etc., and a win/lose lottery, a pattern lottery, and a change pattern lottery are executed, and after the lottery results are stored in the memory area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: special symbol changing". In addition, the contents determined by the special symbol lottery are sent to the performance control board P41 as performance control commands (win/lose command, pattern command, change pattern command) and are used as information for the determination process (lottery process) of the contents of the change performance executed in accordance with the display of the special symbol change. Details regarding the special symbol lottery will be described later.

Special pattern change processing
The special symbol changing process is a sub-module process to which the process is transitioned when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol changing".

In the special pattern change process, a timer that manages the special pattern change display time is monitored until the special pattern change time determined by the change pattern lottery has elapsed, and a special pattern display switching timer (maximum value "24") that is updated at every interruption performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the special pattern display device (second special pattern display device P52 (first special pattern display device P51 when controlled by special pattern 1)) to show the special pattern change display every 25 interruptions until the remaining change time becomes "0".

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbol becomes "0", the following are performed: information is set to output an external signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed once to an external device (such as a data counter or hall computer) connected to the pachinko game machine P; a pattern fixation time is set for fixing the stopped display pattern of the special symbol; and lighting pattern data is set to display on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) the stopped display pattern that indicates the stopped display pattern determined as a result of the win/lose lottery and pattern lottery. Then, depending on the result of the win/lose lottery, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: Miss pattern stopped and displayed", "3: Big win pattern stopped and displayed", or "4: Small win pattern stopped and displayed".

<<Processing during the special pattern stop display>>
The special symbol losing symbol stop display process is a process to be entered when the special symbol status is "2: losing symbol stop display".

In the special symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fix time set in the special symbol change processing has reached "0", and if so, it updates the special symbol status of the special symbol being processed to "0: waiting for special symbol change", updates the number of remaining plays for the game state related to the special symbol lottery (probability change function, electric chute support function, change time reduction function), and checks whether the termination condition has been met. When the game state transition condition has been met, it controls the transition of the game state (flag off, etc.).

《Special pattern jackpot pattern stop display processing》
The special symbol jackpot symbol stopped display processing is a process to be entered when the special symbol status is "3: jackpot symbol stopped display."

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol change process has reached "0", and if it has reached "0", the special symbol status of the special symbol being processed is updated to "0: waiting for special symbol change" and the special electric device status is updated to "2: large prize opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state related to the special symbol lottery (probability change function, electric chute support function, change time reduction function), a process is executed to clear the remaining number information storage area and operation flag storage area for each. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information in the various memory areas that was used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the control content data for the special electric device P755 during the jackpot game is set.

The special jackpot symbol stop display process also executes a process to send a performance control command to the performance control board P41 to execute a jackpot game performance (jackpot start demo performance). In conjunction with these processes, lighting pattern data is also set to light up the right-hit indicator light P56 (an LED that lights up when the game is in a playing state where a right-hit game is recommended, in which the game ball is launched toward the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50.

《Processing during the special small winning pattern stop display》
The processing during the stop display of the special small win pattern is the processing to be entered when the special pattern status is "4: Small win pattern stopped and displayed."

The special small win pattern stop display process, like the special big win pattern stop display process, sets the data related to the operation of the special electric device P755 and sets the setting related to the lighting of the right-hit indicator light P56 when the pattern fixing time ends. In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of this premise technology, when a small win game is executed (small win pattern stop display), unlike when the big win pattern stops, there is no process to end the game state related to the special pattern lottery (high probability state or high base state), and like the process of the special miss pattern stop display process, the game state is controlled based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is met for each game state. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric device status is updated to "5: small win closed". Note that, depending on the game machine specifications, as a modified example, it is also possible to design it as a specification that has a process to forcibly end the game state (high probability state or high base state) when a small win game is executed, like when a big win pattern stops.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the processing of the second special symbol is followed by the processing of the first special symbol. The processing of the first special symbol is basically the same as the processing of the second special symbol, except that the information referenced differs from that of the second special symbol (for example, whether or not a change can be started is determined by referring to the special pattern status of the second special symbol rather than the special pattern status of the first special symbol), so a detailed explanation is omitted.

{Ball entry order control, parallel control}
In addition, the above-mentioned special symbol control process has been described based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority consumption control", but in the case of adopting a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine assumed here, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by a different process. The representative ones will be briefly described below.

"Ball entry order consumption control" is a gaming machine specification in which reserved information corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which it was generated. While one symbol is changing, the other symbol's change is not displayed, and this specification is often adopted when the occurrence of both reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is expected in a certain gaming state.

"Parallel control (parallel consumption)" is a type of gaming machine specification that can simultaneously display the first and second special symbols, unlike the previously mentioned "second special symbol priority consumption control" and "ball entry order consumption". Since two symbols can be consumed at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol selections per unit time. When the special electric device P755 is activated with the display of one special symbol (when a big win or small win is executed), the other symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss, or the remaining time of the display is temporarily stopped. As an example, it is possible to adopt a specification that when one special symbol is a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss, or when one special symbol is a big win or small win, the display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped.

(Special electric device control processing)
The special electric accessory control process is a process that executes submodule processes related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 according to the data contents (values) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes called the special electric game status) and manages the operation of the special electric accessory (step 2028). In other words, when executing a big win game or a small win game, it is a process that controls each state in the big win game and small win game state and controls the opening and closing of the big prize opening P751.

As mentioned above, the special electric device status has the following states: "0: Waiting for a win", "1: Special electric device in operation", "2: Big prize entry hole closed", "3: Big prize end demo in progress", "4: Small prize special electric current in operation", "5: Small prize closed", "6: Small prize end demo in progress".

When the special electric device status is "0: waiting for win", the player has not yet acquired the right to play a big win or small win, so the special electric device control process ends without performing any processing.

If the special electric device status is anything other than "0: waiting for a win", one of the processes described below will be executed depending on the status.

Special electric device operation processing
The special electric device operation process is executed when the special electric device status is "1: special electric device operation" or "4: small hit special electric device operation". This process is executed when a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in the special game (a state in which the large winning port P751 can be controlled to open).

In the special electric role operation process, first, a process is performed to determine whether the end condition of the round game (unit game) has been met. The end condition of the round game is determined to be when either (a) a specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric role has been won, or (b) the opening time (opening pattern) set as the operation pattern of the executed special electric role has ended. If these conditions are not met, the special electric role control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing any further processing. Note that among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric role P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the large winning port P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, while the timer used to determine (b) becomes "0" multiple times during one round game, it is confirmed whether there is the next operation data during one round game, and if it is determined that the condition (c) "there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game" is met, it is determined that the above (b) has been met.

On the other hand, if either of the above (a) or (b) conditions for ending the round of play is met, the next process is to store the time when the large prize opening is closed in the timer for managing the closing time of the special electric device, and to increment the status of the special electric device to "2: Large prize opening closed". Then, command data is set to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command to notify that the round of play has ended, and the process ends.

<<Processing during closing of the large prize entrance>>
The large prize opening closing process is a process executed when the special electric device status is "2: large prize opening closing" or "5: small prize closing". This process is a process in a state controlled during the "round between" rounds in a special game, as well as a process in a state controlled during the "big prize start demo (period)" or "small prize start demo (period)" before the start of the first round at the start of a big prize game or small prize game, or a process controlled during a waiting period until the winning end demo process described later is executed after the end of the final round of round games.

The special prize opening closure process first determines whether the special prize opening closure time set in the special electric device operation process has elapsed, and if the closure time management timer is not "0", meaning the closure time has not elapsed, the special electric device control process for this interrupt is terminated.

When the time for closing the big prize opening has elapsed, it is determined whether the operation (round play) of the special electric device P755 that finished operating first was the final round play of the current winning game (big win game, small win game), and different processing is performed at the end of the final round play and at the end of a round play other than the final round (or at the start of the winning demo). The determination of whether it was the final round play is based on whether the cumulative data of the number of times the special electric device P755 was operated during the current winning game exceeds the maximum number of times the special electric device P755 was operated in the current winning game, and at the start of the winning demo, the cumulative data of the number of times the special electric device P755 was operated is "0".

When the large prize opening closure process determines that the final round of play has ended, it reads out and sets the execution pattern of the winning end demo (mainly the winning end demo time data) according to the type of win (the type of special pattern that started the large prize or small prize). Then, the special electric device status is incremented to "3: Big prize end demo in progress" or "6: Small prize end demo in progress", and a performance command for executing the winning end demo performance is set in the performance control board P41. Furthermore, the time value data set as the effective extension period to set the effective extension period of the large prize opening P751 is stored in the timer that manages the effective extension period of the large prize opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the process during closing of the big prize opening determines that a round other than the final round of play has ended (or that a winning demo is in progress), then it sends, as a performance control command to the performance control board P41, information that enables identification of which round the next round of play will be (N-round start demo command *N is an integer) and information (right hit command) to indicate the recommended firing position during winning play (in the assumed pachinko game machine, this is the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game board).

Then, the special electric device status is decremented and updated to "1: special electric device in operation" or "4: special small win electric current in operation", and the data in the data area for counting the number of winning balls into the large prize winning hole P751 during a round of play is initialized. Then, the time value relating to the first opening of the large prize winning hole P751 during a round of play (or the closing immediately after the start of a round of play) is set as the operation pattern data for the large prize winning hole P751 (special electric device P755) during a round of play, and the data in the memory area relating to the cumulative number of times the special electric device P755 has been operated is incremented.

(Winning ball control process)
The prize ball control process is a process for awarding a game ball to a player as a prize ball when the game ball enters a prize hole arranged on the game board P5. The process is configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<Payment data reception monitoring process>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process for checking the presence or absence of a control command related to the execution of the payout of prize balls transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The first register is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether the transmitted information was transmitted normally. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on the control contents related to the payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data of the data register is stored in the storage area as payout control information.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning port, which stores the winning count data for each winning port stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018), is checked to see if there are any winnings that have not been paid out. This check process checks each winning port in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning port is not "0", a process is performed to send a control command to the payout control board P43 to execute the payout of game balls according to the number of winning balls for the corresponding winning port. With this process, even if the winning counter data for multiple winning ports is not "0", the payout control command sent to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, a check is made to see if the payout control board P43 has received the information on the payout number normally, and this process determines whether the command is received normally or if there is some abnormality that causes a communication error. Until the payout command control process determines the command reception status (determines whether reception was completed normally or there is an error), the transmission of the next payout control command in the payout command request process is temporarily suspended by flag data that is set on/off in the payout command request process and the payout command control process, respectively.

(Abnormality detection process)
The abnormality detection process is a process for checking whether an abnormality has occurred based on information from a sensor provided in the pachinko gaming machine P for detecting fraud (step 2032).

More specifically, this process determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004) regarding the input from sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, magnetic sensor P73, radio wave detection sensor P74, and frame opening sensor P131. In addition to the various sensors, other items to be detected include the removal of harnesses for electrical connections and short circuits in the wiring.

If abnormal data is present for any of the judgment information, the corresponding error flag is turned on and stored, and then a command to notify the error information is set as a performance control command to the performance control board P41.

(Sensor detection determination process)
The sensor detection determination process is a process in which a period during which the sensor or switch detection was performed continuously is determined based on the detection data (level data) of the sensor or switch generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and a flag for performing the process is set (step 2034).

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and it is determined whether the conditions for starting execution of various processes are met, and if the conditions are met, the process corresponding to the switch being monitored is executed. When the on data of the monitored switch is no longer present, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning port detection switch installed in the winning port detects that the switch is continuously on, it will determine that a ball jam has occurred and control the system to an error state, and will set command information to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command to notify the performance control board P41 of the error, and will generate and request output of signal data to notify an external device (such as a hall computer) of the occurrence of an error.

The switches that are detected in this process include touch sensor switches on the handle P204 and switches for detecting fraud, as well as sensors that require the input of on data for a certain period of time to determine whether the switch is due to human operation or electrical noise.

(Game Status Display Processing)
The game status display process is a process for generating lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although it is called a display process, the display contents on the main control display device P50 are not output by this process but by the LED output process described later (step 2036).

In the pachinko game machine P, as an example, lighting data (lighting patterns) for an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) that indicates an error state, a special symbol reserve indicator light (special symbol 1 reserve indicator light P61, special symbol 2 reserve indicator light P62) that displays the reserved number related to the special symbol lottery, and a regular symbol reserve indicator light P63 that displays the reserved number related to the regular symbol lottery are generated and stored as data to be output by the LED output process.

In the game status display process, if a blinking display is required for an LED indicator light that is controlled to be lit, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern is switched by comparing the counter value with a threshold value. For example, in the pachinko game machine P, the reserved number of special symbol lotteries can be reserved up to four, but since the special symbol reserved indicator light is composed of two LED indicator lights (special symbol 1 reserved indicator light P61 and special symbol 2 reserved indicator light P62 each have two LEDs), when there are three or more reserved numbers, at least one LED is designed to blink rather than be continuously lit.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process for setting up to send signals related to game operations to the electric role objects, which are operating devices on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, etc. (Step 2038).

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric role or the special electric role is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric role control process, signal data for opening (or closing) each electric role is output to the normal electric role drive means P71 and the special electric role drive means P72 (solenoids in the assumed pachinko game machine) by processing during the output port output process.

In addition, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of game balls based on the player's handle operation is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Performance control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process for outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and in the pachinko game machine P, the performance control command is transmitted to the performance control board P41 only in the performance control command transmission process (step 2040). Note that the setting of the performance control command to be transmitted is set in a predetermined memory area as an untransmitted performance control command during other processes.

The assumed pachinko game machine P uses a memory area called a ring buffer, which cyclically references a memory destination, as an area for storing unsent performance control commands. The memory area called the ring buffer is designed to write and read performance control commands using information called a "write pointer" and a "read pointer" that are updated by each process of writing (setting) a performance control command and reading (sending) a performance control command, to calculate the address of the memory area to write the command to and the address of the memory area to read the command from in the next process.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, the performance control command is made up of two pieces of data: MODE data, which indicates the type of command, and EVENT data, which indicates the content of the command.

Let's return to the explanation of the specific processing content of the performance control command transmission process. In the performance control command transmission process, it first checks whether the information in the write pointer and read pointer mentioned above matches, and if they match, it is determined that there are no performance control commands to send and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data in the write pointer and read pointer do not match, it is determined that there are performance control commands to send and it moves on to the next process.

If it is determined that there is a performance control command to send, the MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address in the memory area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and each is temporarily stored in a register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After clearing the performance control command in the ring buffer from which it was read, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value to be used in the next process.

The MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sent in sequence to the performance control board P41 as performance control commands. First, the MODE data is set in the performance command output port, which is an output port for sending performance control commands to the performance control board P41, and a strobe signal is output to cause the performance control board P41 to perform a reading operation. The main control board P40 then outputs the EVENT data, but after a waiting period of 26 μs is inserted to ensure a sufficient period until the performance control board P41 receives the MODE data, the EVENT data is set in the output port and a strobe signal is output, just as when the MODE data was sent. When the performance control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command sent from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
The external information output process is a process of outputting information on the game status and information on security such as error occurrence as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to external devices (data counters and hall computers) connected to the prerequisite pachinko gaming machine P (step 2042). The signals output from the external information output terminal 77 are output based on data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and include those that transmit a pulse signal that is an ON potential for a certain period when a trigger for signal output occurs, and those that continue to output an ON potential until the condition for terminating the signal output is met.

In the external information output process, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific game state as the signal related to the game state, the assumed pachinko game machine P refers to information corresponding to the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chute support function (base state), as well as information indicating that a special game is in progress (jackpot or small jackpot), and updates the external output data so that the corresponding data is sent when it is controlled to each game state. Note that, not limited to the examples given here, depending on the specifications of the game machine, an output signal may be generated based on information indicating the presence or absence of a fluctuation time reduction function or information indicating that a specific type of jackpot has occurred.

In addition, as output signals output by the external information output process, not only signals related to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, there is a signal (also called a "pattern fixing signal") that is sent every time the variable display of a special pattern is executed and stopped, and a signal that is set in the external output data and sent to an external device every time a game ball is detected entering various winning holes such as the start hole switch (special pattern 1 start hole switch P712, special pattern 2 start hole switch 722) and the large winning hole switch P752, or every time the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering various winning holes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is sent as a pulse signal with a 128 ms on potential. However, if multiple game results occur consecutively, after the output of one pulse signal is finished, a certain period of off potential output is sandwiched, and then the pulse signal is output again.

In addition, in the external signal output process, the data in the memory area that stores the error flag as a result of the abnormality detection process (step 2032) described above is calculated and compared with comparison data for checking whether an error requiring a security notification has occurred. If it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to the multiple LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light and display the progress and status of the game (step 2044).

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol reserved indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second special symbol reserved indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol reserved indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), as well as the round indicator light P54, the status indicator light P55, and the right hit indicator light (a total of 8 LEDs), for a total of 32 LED display parts.

The status indicator light P55 is a collective indicator light related to multiple game states, and in more detail refers to indicator lights such as the special symbol probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the probability variation function is activated or not, the regular symbol probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the regular symbol probability variation function is activated or not (whether the electric chute support function is activated or not), and the error indicator light that indicates an error state.

The LED output process is configured to set one byte of lighting data for the display section of the main control display device to the output port for each interrupt process, lighting up the main control display device P50. Based on the value of a digit counter that is updated for each interrupt process, the LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit for the current interrupt are selected, lighting pattern data according to the game situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is controlled by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data to 32 LEDs in sequence using at least four interrupt processes.

In addition to the LED display that should be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, the LED output process also controls the lighting of the LED display, which is controlled to light only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state.

In the pachinko game machine P, when a flag indicating a certain game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted, and all LEDs constituting the main control display device are turned off during setting changes, setting confirmation, and when an unrecoverable error occurs. As a variant, when the game stop flag is set, a light display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state, and for example, all LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 may be configured to be turned on during the period when the setting is being changed.

(Out-of-area control processing)
The out-of-area control process is composed of a test signal output process (processing for outputting signals used in testing the pachinko machine) that outputs signals used in testing the pachinko machine, and a process for controlling the display of the performance display device (step 2046). The meaning of "out-of-area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a memory area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program memory area defined in the rules for the pachinko machine.

The test signal output process involves setting information relating to the game results and game status in the output port for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to external test equipment. The performance display process involves checking the game status, counting the number of out balls, calculating the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls, updating this as display data, and displaying the output on the performance display device P59.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 10 to Fig. 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win/lose lottery", a "win symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Winner/Lottery)
The "win/lose lottery" is a lottery that determines whether the special electric device P755 will be activated based on the result of the special pattern lottery that is executed, or more simply, a lottery that determines whether the lottery result for the special pattern is a "big win," a "small win," or a "lose." Note that, depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some that do not have a "small win" as a lottery result for the win/lose lottery. Also, when configured to have a first special pattern and a second special pattern, it may be configured to have a "small win" as a lottery result for the win/lose lottery for one special pattern, and not have a "small win" as a lottery result for the win/lose lottery for the other special pattern.

The winning/losing lottery is conducted using a random number value called a "winning/losing random number" that is obtained and stored when a game ball enters a start port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the winning/losing random number can have a range of 65,536 possible random numbers (random number range) from "0" to "65,535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When the winning/losing lottery is conducted, the result of the winning/losing lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number value with a lottery table (called a "winning/losing lottery table") used for the winning/losing lottery according to the game status and setting values.

Figure 10 shows several examples of lottery tables used for the winning/losing lottery. Figure 10 (A) shows a winning/losing lottery table for a set value of "1" and a low probability state, and Figure 10 (B) shows a winning/losing lottery table for a set value of "1" and a high probability state. Figure 10 (C) and (D) show winning/losing lottery tables for a set value of "6" and a low probability state and a high probability state, respectively.

For example, in a situation where a win/loss lottery is performed using the win/loss lottery table in Figure 10 (A), let us assume that the win/loss random number in this special pattern lottery is a random number corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the random number value is "1500," and we will explain the flow of the win/loss lottery.

First, it is determined whether the result of the initial win/loss lottery falls within the random number range for a jackpot (from "0" to "327"). Specifically, the process subtracts the random number range for the jackpot being determined, "328", from the random number value for this win/loss random number, "1500". At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value, so it is determined that this win/loss random number does not fall within the random number range for a jackpot.

In the next process, the random number value "1172" after the previous calculation of the jackpot determination is compared with the loss random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the subsequent win/loss lottery result in the win/loss lottery table. More specifically, the loss random number range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary win/loss random number data "1172". At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the "loss" result is stored as the win/loss lottery result.

If, for example, a special pattern lottery is held in a high probability state for the current win/loss random number "1500", the lottery will be performed using the win/loss lottery table shown in Figure 10 (B) to determine whether or not the number falls within the random number range for the first jackpot (from "0" to "1639"). In this case, the result of the comparison (subtraction) between the win/loss random number and the random number range will be a negative value, so the win/loss lottery result will be determined to be a "jackpot".

In this way, the underlying pachinko game machine P employs a method of determining the lottery results by sequentially comparing the data acquired as random numbers with the random number range corresponding to the lottery results in the lottery table, and a similar lottery method is also employed for the winning symbol lottery and the variation pattern lottery described below. Note that the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether the acquired random number matches the random number that will result in a jackpot may also be employed, and a different lottery method may be employed for each lottery content.

(Lottery for winning design)
The "winning pattern lottery" is a process which, based on the result of the special pattern lottery described above, determines the stop display pattern of the special pattern as a lottery result required for switching the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric device P755 and the lottery table (see Figures 12 to 14) for the variable pattern lottery described below.

Figure 11 shows the big win symbol selection table (see Figure 11(A)) used in the winning symbol selection when the winning/losing lottery result is a "big win", the small win symbol selection table (see Figure 11(B)) used in the winning symbol selection when the winning/losing lottery result is a "small win", and the losing symbol selection table (see Figure 11(C)) used in the winning symbol selection when the winning/losing lottery result is a "losing".

The "Pattern Random Number" used to select the winning pattern has a random value range of "1000" (from "0" to "999"), and when expressed as 2-byte data, the upper byte is expressed as "0" to "3" and the lower byte is expressed as "0" to "255".

To explain the winning symbol selection with a specific example, for example, if the result of the winning/losing selection is a big win, and the symbol random number is "400" (higher byte is "1", lower byte is "144"), the selection table for the higher byte "1" shown in FIG. 11(A) is used, and the lower byte "5R (5 rounds) probability 2" corresponding to "128" to "191" is obtained as the selection result, and the "5R probability 2" symbol is displayed as a stopped display symbol on the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol selection, the second special symbol display device P52).

When the "5R Probability 2" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device P51, a jackpot game corresponding to the "5R Probability 2" symbol is executed. At this time, the content of each round of the 5 rounds of jackpot game (such as the opening pattern and opening time of the large prize winning port P751) may be made different based on the stopped display symbol when "5R Probability 2" is displayed as a stopped display symbol on the first special symbol display device and when "5R Probability 1" is displayed as a stopped display symbol, and it is also possible to control the control content in the specific game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game to be different. The allocation of control in these jackpot games and specific game states is determined appropriately for each pachinko game machine P in order to realize gameplay according to the specifications (specs), and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the invention, the drawings shown in FIG. 11(A) are used to display the symbols grouped according to the type of jackpot. However, for example, in the previous example, after the type of jackpot is determined as the result of the drawing, "5R High Chance 2", another drawing is carried out to determine the stop display symbols that will cause the corresponding type of jackpot. The drawing of the winning symbols may be carried out in two stages, by determining the type of jackpot and then the stop display symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(A), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P is configured so that when the jackpot pattern is determined in the winning pattern lottery in the special pattern lottery for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the types of winning patterns that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R special 5" or "10R special 8" in the jackpot for the second special pattern is increased, making it easier to win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds than in the winning pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and making it easier to win a jackpot that transitions to a high probability/high base state as a specific gaming state.

Figure 11 (B) shows an example of a small win symbol selection table. The small win symbol selection table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol selection when the result of the special symbol selection is a "small win," and the selection method is the same as that of the big win symbol selection table described above.

In the small win pattern selection table shown in FIG. 11(B), the majority of the winning patterns are "small win 1," and in some cases where the selection result for the second special pattern is "small win," "small win 2" can be determined. Note that there may be only one type of small win pattern, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As in the pachinko game machine P, an example of the purpose of providing multiple small winning symbols is to simply change the opening state of the large winning port P751 during a small winning game to vary the number of game balls that can be won, or, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small winning V as a game machine specification (spec), to differentiate the small winning symbols in order to distinguish between small winning games in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area and small winning games in which it is difficult to win a V, or to distinguish the type of specific game to which the game is transferred after the execution of a large winning game after winning a V. In addition, the "small winning game in which it is easy to win a V" and the "small winning game in which it is difficult to win a V" are realized by allocating the flow path by the action of the opening and closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage to the "specific area". Specifically, (1) during a small win game, the large prize winning port P751 is opened multiple times (for example, 10 times for 0.1 seconds), and immediately after the start of the first opening of the large prize winning port P751 during a small win game (for example, 0.1 seconds after the start of the first opening of the large prize winning port P751), the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that guides the large prize winning port P751 toward the specific area, and immediately after the end of the final opening of the large prize winning port P751 during a small win game (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of the 10th opening of the large prize winning port P751), A small win game where the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that does not guide to the specific area side immediately after the opening of the current large prize opening (any of the 1st to 10th openings) is forcibly ended and closed due to the balls entering the large prize opening P751 during a small win game (0.1 seconds after the opening of any of the 1st to 10th openings of the large prize opening P751 is ended and closed), is a "small win game where it is easy to win a V prize". In other words, if the player continues to shoot game balls toward the large prize opening P751, the probability that all 10 balls, which are the predetermined number of balls, will enter the large prize opening P751 is approximately 100%, and the probability that at least one of the 10 balls will pass through the specific area is approximately 100%. This is a "small win game where it is easy to win a V prize". On the other hand, (2) a small win game in which the large prize opening P751 is opened once (for example, once for 0.2 seconds) during a small win game, and a long time has passed since the start of the first opening of the large prize opening P751 during a small win game (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the first opening of the large prize opening P751), the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that guides the ball toward the specific area, and 0.1 seconds after the switch, the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) switches to a flow path that does not guide the ball toward the specific area, is a "small win game in which it is difficult to win a V prize." In other words, a small win game in which the probability that all 10 balls, which is the predetermined number, will not enter the large win port P751 even if the player continues to shoot game balls toward the large win port P751, and the probability that none of the game balls will pass through the specific area even if some game balls enter the large win port P751, is approximately 100%, is a "small win game in which it is difficult to win a V prize."

Figure 11 (C) shows an example of a losing symbol selection table. The losing symbol selection table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol selection when the result of the special symbol selection is a "losing" result. The selection method is the same as that of the big winning symbol selection table described above for the first special symbol, but is a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the losing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, the lottery process is performed only when the losing symbol lottery table shows the first special symbol, and either "Lose 1" or "Lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "Miss 2" symbol is a losing symbol that has a winning probability of approximately 6.4% when the first special symbol is a losing symbol, and when "Miss 2" is a winning symbol, the variation pattern lottery is configured to make it easier to determine the variation pattern (variation time) by referring to a special lottery table (not shown) that is likely to result in a reach. For this reason, "Miss 2" is sometimes referred to as a "reach miss symbol".

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P does not have a losing symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is configured to determine the losing symbol 1 regardless of the symbol random number, omitting the process of comparing the symbol random number with the table, and storing the losing symbol 1. Note that it may also be configured to use a lottery table that always results in a winning symbol 1 to determine the losing symbol.

(Variation pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process for determining the variable display time until the stop display pattern, which is the lottery result of the special pattern, is stopped by lottery. In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the game, the variable display time of the special pattern is determined by using a variable pattern table described later in the special pattern lottery as the necessary performance time for the performance display device P80 to perform a performance notification regarding whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is.

Figure 12 shows a "low base mid-variation pattern lottery table" mainly for the normal game state (low probability/low base mid-range) and the low base state (non-electric chute support state), i.e., the state in which it is recommended to launch the game ball into the left area P501L of the game board in the assumed pachinko game machine P.

In FIG. 12, "ID" represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and "variation pattern" represents a representative example of the variation presentation mode displayed on the presentation display device P80 when the ID is selected. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special pattern in the result of the target variation pattern lottery (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special pattern is displayed to when it stops displaying.

In FIG. 12, "Hold 1 Change" to "Hold 4 Change" indicate the reserved number in a situation where the conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are met. When the result of the lottery is "miss" and there are N reserved balls of the target special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the lottery for the variation pattern is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold N Change". In other words, the lottery for the variation pattern of the first special symbol in a low base state is configured to use different variation pattern tables depending on the reserved number. Note that if a game ball enters the starting winning hole when there are no reserved balls, it is temporarily stored as a reserved ball for processing, and the lottery for the variation pattern is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 Change".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern selection corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the reserved number, and is configured to use a common selection table regardless of the reserved number. Although not shown, if the result of the symbol selection is determined to be "Miss 2 (reach miss symbol)", the variation pattern selection is configured to use variation pattern table 1 (variation pattern table for miss 2) that is independent of the reserved number, even for the variation pattern selection of the first special symbol.

In FIG. 12, "10R sure", "5R sure", "10R normal", and "5R normal" indicate the variation pattern table used to draw the variation pattern when a jackpot occurs in a low base state, and indicate that when the result of the lottery is "jackpot", the appropriate variation pattern table is selected depending on which pattern the result of the pattern lottery is. In FIG. 12, since the second special pattern is not the main focus of play in a low base state, the jackpot variation pattern table is expressed as being determined independently of the jackpot pattern, but the jackpot with the second special pattern may also have multiple patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in a low base state will be described using FIG. 12. As a specific example, a lottery for the first special symbol will be described, in which the variation pattern random number is "30000", the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is three (the number of reserved balls becomes two after the start of the variation), and the result of the winning/losing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "Loss 1".

First, since the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table for "reserved 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process is similar to the lottery process for the win/lose lottery described above, and a comparison operation (subtraction) is performed between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the fluctuation pattern ID of each lottery result to determine whether the random number belongs to the same range. By performing this process, the result of repeated comparison operations between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number range at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, and after a 7-second fluctuation display is performed as a special pattern fluctuation display, losing pattern 1 is displayed on the first special pattern display device P51.

Next, the variation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. 13. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state is the opposite of the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. 12, and is configured to have a variation pattern table for misses that depends on the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol, and a table for each jackpot symbol for jackpots. Note that in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, many variation patterns are configured to be determined in common, but this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and it is also possible to configure the variation patterns determined in the low base state and the high base state to have very little overlap, or no overlap at all.

In addition, a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is that it is configured so that a 2-second fluctuation (fluctuation pattern ID "12"), which is the shortest fluctuation time for the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, can be determined as the lottery result for the "Hold 3 Fluctuation" and "Hold 4 Fluctuation" of the second special pattern when a miss occurs.

Furthermore, as a feature of the variation pattern in the high base state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to always determine a 10-second variation with variation pattern ID "4". The reason for configuring the first special symbol as a 10-second variation is that in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in Figure 11, the player's profit in the event of a jackpot is large (the expected value of winning balls is high due to the large number of execution rounds, and there are many jackpot symbols that transition to a probability variation state as a specific game state), and the purpose is to enable the player to win a more advantageous jackpot by prioritizing and implementing a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol. In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the jackpot game, the adoption of the second special symbol priority consumption control avoids the first special symbol from being displayed in a variable manner, and makes it easier to maintain the reservation established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state) which is an advantageous state, and also aims to avoid the need for a large amount of game balls to generate the reservation of the first special symbol in the low base state compared to the amount of game balls used to generate the reservation of the second special symbol in the high base state.

Figure 14 shows a special table for a limited period, and represents a special fluctuation pattern table that is referenced during a specific period. Figure 14 collectively shows special fluctuation pattern tables for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows that the pachinko gaming machine P is provided with a "reserved consecutive wins table" (targeting IDs "51" and "71") that is referenced during the period from the first change to the fourth change after a jackpot (the period known as a "reserved consecutive wins" (reserved consecutive wins) in which a jackpot is reached with four reserved wins that exist at the time of a jackpot), a high frequency reach table (targeting IDs "52", "53", "54", and "72") that is referenced during the nth to mth change after a jackpot and that is likely to select a reach change of 55 seconds, and a "result change table" (targeting IDs "55" and "73") that is referenced during the final change display in the high base state and that mainly executes the "result performance" described below.

In this way, special fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced for limited periods of time are called "special fluctuation pattern tables" or "limited frequency (pattern tables)."

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of this invention, the limited frequency pattern table reference period is configured to be able to be referenced during a set period following a big win game (the operation of the special electric role, in other words, the operation of the role continuous operation device). It is also possible to vary these reference periods depending on the type of big win (big win pattern), and it is also possible to configure the reference period to be different during a specific period following the operation of the special electric role based on a small win game. What special variation pattern table is referenced under what circumstances can be set appropriately for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the examples given, and details will be explained separately if necessary.

Next, we will explain the control of the presentation control board P41, which controls the presentation operation of the underlying pachinko gaming machine P. Note that the operational control of the presentation control board P41 is subject to fewer constraints in the type testing of the gaming machine and has a higher degree of design freedom compared to the control of the main control board P40, so it is not limited to only the processing described below, and the timing of the processing can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on process for the performance control board ~ main loop process]
When the power supply of the pachinko game machine P is turned on, the CPU of the performance control board P41 executes a power-on process (step 4000). Here, the power-on process of the performance control board P41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the performance control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P, an initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is a calculation device provided on the performance control board P41, is performed (step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately set the settings required for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details will be omitted. However, since there is a time difference between the completion of the power-on process of the main control board P40 (FIG. 7) and the power-on process of the performance control board (FIG. 15) for the performance that was being executed when the previous power outage occurred, if the performance before the power outage is restored after the power is restored, there is a risk of a discrepancy occurring with the operation of the main control board P40. Therefore, in the initial process when the power outage is restored to the performance control board P41, the performance information, etc. is often initialized so that the performance that was being executed before the power outage is not executed (called a "performance control board reset" or "sub-reset").

(Main loop of the performance control board)
In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the process proceeds to main loop processing after initial setting processing. In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the performance image in the image control board P42 connected to the performance display device P80 (image display device) is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS) so that 30 images are drawn per second, so that the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

The main loop processing of the performance control board P41 first performs a watchdog timer clear process to detect CPU runaway (step 4004).

Next, a process of updating the performance control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various performance control random numbers to be used when an opportunity arises to execute a performance lottery are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The assumed pachinko gaming machine P is designed to monitor the input port even during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 described below, but since the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is performed at a 16 ms cycle, it is limited to monitoring inputs such as switches that are necessary for the system to be monitored, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for performance control of the performance movable role P560 is omitted. As a variant, sensors that are objects to be monitored for performance purposes may be checked in the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing.

The input port monitoring process is similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, in that it generates and stores level data from the input data of various sensors, and stores rising (falling) data.

Then, the performance control board P41 performs a performance device control process (step 4010) and executes control over performance operations other than the performance display device P80 (image display). The performance devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and performance movable props P560, and performance operation commands according to the performance content determined to be executed by processing such as the performance control process (step 4012) described below are sent to each of these performance devices to execute the performance operations.

The output of performance operation commands to the various performance devices in the performance device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the performance image displayed on the performance display device P80 (image display device). Therefore, when a signal is sent at regular intervals from the image control board P42, which controls the performance display device P80, to the performance control board P41, or a signal attempting forced synchronization is received (received during the input port monitoring process described above), the performance display device P80 synchronizes with the performance switching timing and outputs performance operation commands to the various performance devices.

In addition, with regard to the operation control of the performance movable part P560, which is one of the performance devices, shorter cycle control is required for the drive means of the performance movable part P560. Therefore, for the operation pattern of the performance movable part P560 that is executed by the performance operation command set in this process, sensor monitoring and operation switching are performed even during the interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 (see Figure 16), which will be described later.

Next, the performance control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the performance control board P41 will be described. The performance control process is a process that determines the performance content to be executed by various performance devices by drawing or selecting a lottery based on flags that are established based on the results of analyzing the performance control command received from the main control board P40 in the performance control command analysis process described below, information on the received performance control command itself (such as the lottery result ID for the special pattern lottery), input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (Figure 16), and other flags that are established during other processes.

The presentation control process selects the presentation decision process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding submodule process for presentation decision. Examples of presentation contents determined here include a process that determines the change presentation corresponding to one special pattern change based on commands related to the execution result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose command, pattern command, change pattern command) (process that determines the contents of the notice or reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.), a look-ahead lottery process that determines whether to execute a look-ahead presentation (also called "pre-determination presentation") for a newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-determination information sent when a hold occurs, and a special game presentation content determination process that determines the presentation content during a special game based on information sent as a presentation control command when a special game (big win or small win) is executed.

In addition, the presentation control process not only processes the presentation control commands sent from the main control board P40, but also determines the error display content when an error is detected on the presentation control board P41 (including the process of determining the error display content based on the error information sent from the main control board), adjusts the volume output from the speaker P83 based on input operations by the player using the presentation operation means P81, such as the presentation button P381 and the cross key P383, adjusts the light intensity to change the light emission brightness of the lamp P82, and customizes the presentation content and the presentation content determination tendency.

Note that the process of determining the various presentation contents performed by the sub-module processing called by the presentation control processing often uses specifications unique to each gaming machine, so we will omit the explanation here. Instead, when executing processing with characteristics in the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention, we will explain the details in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the explanation of the main loop processing of the performance control board, we will now explain the performance control command analysis process (step 4014) as the final process of the main loop processing.

The performance control command analysis process stores information corresponding to the performance control command used to determine the performance content in the performance control process described above, and sets flags, based on the information stored as the performance control command sent from the main control board P40. This process must determine the processing content according to the command sent from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the performance control commands, MODE data and EVENT data, and processing according to the performance control command is carried out.

Note that, since one performance control command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be sent for each interrupt process of the main control board P40 (every 4 ms), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P repeatedly analyzes the performance control command as long as it can be processed until the period of the main loop process of the performance control board P41 (16 ms) has elapsed (step 4016).

[Performance control board interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the performance control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing in the performance control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing in the main control board, and has multiple interrupt processing that is started at different execution triggers (see Fig. 16 (A) and (B)). Priorities are set for these multiple interrupt processing, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher priority interrupt processing is controlled to be executed even during execution of the interrupt processing. In this explanation, the performance control timer interrupt processing (Fig. 16 (A)) and the performance control command reception interrupt (Fig. 16 (B)) will be explained as representatives.

(Performance control timer interrupt processing)
The performance control timer interrupt process (Figure 16 (A)) is an interrupt process executed at 1 ms intervals in the CPU of the performance control board P41.

The port input/output process (step 5002) executes a process of generating and storing level data and rising data from inputs from sensors provided for detecting the position of the performance movable prop P560 and other sensors (input sensors of the performance operation means P81) via the input port of the performance control board P41, and a process of outputting a drive signal from the output port to the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the performance movable prop P560 according to the operation pattern set in the performance device control process. In addition, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process that subtracts and adds to the timer that measures the timing of switching the performance action. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison calculation is performed with a comparison value to determine whether a switching condition for the performance action has occurred, and the performance control process (step 4012) stores the information and flags necessary for determining the performance content in a memory area.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) uses the sensor detection data generated by the port input/output process to determine whether sensor detection information related to switching of performance operations has occurred, such as whether the performance operation switching conditions of the performance movable prop P560 have been met, and performs processing to switch the operation pattern table or to set a condition flag to determine the performance content in the performance control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process that determines whether or not the effect switching conditions are met based on input from the effect operation means P81, such as the effect button P381, lever P382, and cross key P383. The effect button monitoring process determines whether or not the effect operation means P81 has been operated and the type of operation from the level data and rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from off last time to on this time) that indicate the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002).

For example, when rising data is generated as input information for the presentation operation means P81, it is assumed that there has been a player operation on the presentation operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding presentation is stored. Note that, since judging the input based only on the rising data may result in a false detection due to electrical noise, which may result in switching of presentation operation, it may be possible to judge that there has been a player operation on the presentation operation means P81 (sometimes referred to as a "single push (single pull) operation" or "one-hit operation") when multiple consecutive inputs of level data (on data) have occurred after the occurrence of rising data.

In addition, if the level data of the ON input is detected 500 times in succession, i.e., if it is determined that the performance operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "long press (long drag)" operation and is treated as a special operation. Note that when determining whether or not a "long press (long drag)" operation has occurred and whether it should continue, falling edge data (data indicating that the level data has changed from ON last time to OFF this time) may be detected as electrical noise, but in this case, as with the measures to prevent erroneous detection described above, the end of the "long press (long drag)" operation input may be determined based on the detection of multiple inputs of level data (OFF data) after the detection of falling edge data.

In the pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, it is possible to repeatedly execute a process that regards a "single press (single pull)" input operation of the effect operation means P81 as having been performed once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing a "long press" operation on the effect button P381, and this repeated execution of a process that regards a "single press" operation as having been performed in response to a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation is called an "auto-rapid press" operation. Note that the "auto-rapid press" operation is not limited to the operation contents exemplified above, and it is also possible to adopt a method in which multiple effect operation means P81 are operated simultaneously, or a method in which an "auto-rapid press" operation is regarded as having been performed based on the input of the effect button P381 by turning on and off a dip switch or the like that is provided as a switch separate from the effect button.

In addition, depending on the execution status of the performance, there are periods during which input to the performance operation means P81 is treated as a valid operation ("valid operation period") and periods during which it is treated as an invalid operation ("invalid operation period").

The multitasking process (step 5010) is a process in which the processing content executed during the currently occurring performance control timer interrupt process is changed depending on the value of the task counter (updated between values "0" and "15"), which is updated each time the performance control timer interrupt process is executed. The task counter is configured to cycle in a 16 ms cycle, and the processing at each counter value is executed approximately in sync with one cycle of the main loop process. One example of processing in each task is to determine whether the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed based on a signal sent from the image control board P42 (input information generated by port input/output processing), and to monitor the operating status of the image control board P42.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) is a process of transmitting an image control command (sometimes called a "sub-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 in order to cause the CPU of the image control board P42 to execute an image display according to the performance content determined in the performance control process P41. Note that the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured as the same board, but for convenience in this specification they are referred to as the image control board P42.

In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the performance control board P41 is configured to send image control commands to the image control board P42, which are composed of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying the pattern of the display content.

In addition, the assumed pachinko game machine P is configured to transmit image control commands by means of a performance control timer interrupt process, but it is also possible to configure the transmission and reception of commands between the performance control board P41 and the image control board P42 to be performed by providing a separate interrupt process.

(Performance control command reception interrupt)
The performance control command receiving interrupt (Figure 16 (B)) is an interrupt process that occurs when a strobe signal is output during the performance control command sending process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (Figure 9) of the main control board P40 and the strobe signal is received by the performance control board P41.

When the performance control board P41 starts a performance control command reception interrupt, it reads the performance control command (MODE data or EVENT data) sent from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (steps 5502 and 5504).

When the temporary buffer data update is complete, it is determined whether reception of one performance control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) is complete (step 5506). Note that the performance control command sent from the main control board P40 is one byte of data, with specific bits set to "1" or "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process is performed to store the contents of the currently received performance control command in the lower byte of storage area. At this time, if a specific bit portion of the lower byte of the current temporary buffer data storage area before the update indicates MODE data, the stored data of the temporary buffer data is shifted and stored in the upper byte of storage area, and then the currently received EVENT data is stored in the lower byte of storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in determining whether reception of the performance control command has been completed in step 5506, a determination is made as to whether a specific bit in the lowest byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data. If it is determined that it is EVENT data, reception of one performance control command is deemed complete (step 5506 YES) and the process proceeds to the next step. If it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the performance control command reception interrupt is exited and other processing is performed while waiting until a strobe signal based on the transmission of EVENT data is received from the main control board P40.

If it is determined in step 5506 that reception of the performance control command has been completed, it is determined whether the sent performance control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether matching data exists in the list data of performance control commands that can be sent from the main control board P40. If it is determined to be a normal command, it is stored in a memory area for storing received performance control commands to be analyzed in the performance control command analysis process during the performance control timer interrupt process, and the temporary buffer data is discarded in the case of abnormal data.

[Basic image display examples]
Next, the basic effects of the pachinko game machine P will be explained with reference to Fig. 17 to Fig. 20. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing the pattern change display (when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed) during normal play (low probability/low base), and Fig. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is being performed. Fig. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being performed, and Fig. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chute support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base).

(Example of the display during normal play)
Decorative Design
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the pattern variation display (during the stop display of the decorative pattern) during normal play (low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player in the approximate center area of the screen. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "decorative patterns"), and are display objects for the purpose of presentation that are displayed in response to the results of the special pattern lottery, and are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern. Note that although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. In addition, when each number is configured to be displayed with a decorative image, the display mode of the decorative image and each number may be made different depending on the game state. By configuring in this way, the player can easily determine the current game state.

Except when a special effect is being performed, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed once for each special pattern display (one special pattern lottery). Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is displayed once, the decorative pattern is displayed quickly (sometimes transparent or hidden), and a "preview" using animation or effect images is used to heighten the anticipation of winning the right to play a jackpot.

When the decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 starts to change, it is scrolled vertically (from top to bottom), and then the stopped display patterns determined by the performance control board P41 are displayed in the order of the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) for each pattern row. In general, when the three decorative patterns P801 are displayed in the same pattern (same number), it is a performance that notifies you that you have won. In addition, a state in which one pattern is changing while other patterns are displayed, for example, a state in which the left and right patterns are displayed in the same pattern (provisionally stopped display) before the middle pattern P801b, which is the pattern that stops last (also called the "final stopping pattern"), stops, is called a "reach" ("reach state" or "reach mode").

The changing display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a manner that scrolls vertically (from top to bottom), but the manner of the changing display is not limited to vertically, and it may also be a manner in which scrolling is performed in the left-right direction or in the front-back (diagonal) direction using the depth, or a manner in which a rotation action is performed on the spot without scrolling and a switching display is performed in sequence.

In addition, the decorative pattern P801 may stop multiple times during one variable display of the special pattern. At this time, when the decorative pattern P801 stops multiple times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display that is displayed at the same time as the special pattern stop display pattern is stopped and displayed on the special pattern display device, and a stop display at any other time is called a "provisional stop (display)." Note that a stop display that is displayed at the same time as the special pattern stop display may be referred to as a "real stop."

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, in order to distinguish it from the final stopped display of the pattern (full stop), the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed, but is temporarily stopped to the extent that it cannot be considered fixed, moves in directions such as up and down or left and right, or swings around one rotation axis. This state is sometimes referred to as a "swing fluctuation" in addition to a temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may change again. Generally, a re-change from a state in which a pattern other than the jackpot pattern is temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-change (pseudo consecutive)" effect, and a re-change in which the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed may be changed after the jackpot pattern has stopped is called a "promotion (change)" effect. Note that when a promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is less favorable than the stopped jackpot pattern, or not to change to a losing pattern.

When the decorative pattern P801 stops, there is a type of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display, but is displayed only when certain effects are performed; this is called the "special decoration pattern (P804)" (special pattern). Each special decoration pattern has a meaning, and examples include those that suggest that a specific jackpot will be executed, that the aforementioned pseudo-variable effect will be executed, and that a specific reach effect (announcement effect that is displayed when a reach state is reached) will be executed. When using a special pattern, the special pattern may be temporarily stopped as the last decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b), or the special pattern may be temporarily stopped as one decorative pattern that substitutes for all of the left pattern P801a, middle pattern P801b, and right pattern P801c.

"Simplified installation diagram (mini installation diagram)"
In the upper right corner of the screen, three numbers are displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801. This pattern is also called the "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and is displayed as a display showing the lottery result of the special pattern in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, just like the "decorative pattern" described above.

Unlike the "decorative pattern," the simplified design P802 (mini design) always stops once for each special pattern lottery, in conjunction with the special pattern that shows the result of the special lottery being displayed on the special pattern display devices P51 and P52, even when a special effect is being performed in which the decorative pattern P801 does not stop.

The display of the simplified ornamental pattern P802 may be configured to form the same reach state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the reach state, or a simplified display method may be adopted in which a certain display switching is performed until the display of the special pattern is stopped, regardless of the decorative pattern P801, in order to achieve the minimum objective of notifying the result of the special pattern lottery.

《Pending display area》
A reserved display area P810 is provided in the lower area of Fig. 17. In the reserved display area P810, reserved objects P811 corresponding to reserved (random number values) corresponding to unexercised rights to the special symbol lottery acquired by the player are displayed. In the example of Fig. 17, three rights to the special symbol lottery are reserved.

In the example of Figure 17, the earlier the special pattern lottery is executed for a hold (i.e., the earlier the hold occurs), the closer it is to being displayed in a position toward the approximate center of the bottom of the screen, and the display position of the hold object located at the rightmost side of the hold display area P810 is called "Hold 1 (display area)," and moving toward the left side of the screen, they are called "Hold 2 (display area)," "Hold 3 (display area)," and "Hold 4 (display area)."

In addition, near the right side of the pending display area P810, an object that is approximately the same as the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 is displayed one level higher and larger than the pending object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special pattern variable display from the pending display area, and is referred to as the "variable object display area (P812)". In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as the "variable object (P813)", but may also be referred to as the "pending display", with the initial "variable" added to differentiate it from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not need to be configured exactly the same as the pending object P811, and when a pending display moves to the variable object display area P812 as the fluctuation begins, the shape may change or it may disappear (become hidden). The variable object P813 may also be configured so that its display mode can change in the same way as the pending display in pending change pre-reading described below (for example, the shape or color of the object changes at a timing midway through the variable display).

"Simple hold display"
Two numbers are displayed vertically in the center of the left side of the screen. These two numbers indicate the current reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the number "3" displayed at the top, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the number "4" displayed at the bottom.

(Preview performance)
《Pending Change Look Ahead》
17, the reserved object P811 in the Hold 3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the display areas of Hold 2 and Hold 1. The assumed pachinko game machine P is configured so that the display manner of the reserved object P811 in Hold 3 is more likely to result in a jackpot than the display manner of the reserved object P811 in Hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display manner of the reserved object P811 for a specific reserved ball is called "reserved change (pre-reading)."

In addition, the display mode of the reserved object P811 may be changed in stages, not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, by configuring it to have multiple types of change modes, each of which may have a different probability (expectation) of becoming a jackpot.

In addition to "hold change (pre-reading)," effects that suggest a high probability that the hold that is the target of the effect will be a jackpot before the display of the change corresponding to the hold that is the target of the effect begins, when a random number value stored as a hold is determined to be the target of the effect, are called "pre-reading effects" (sometimes called "pre-determination effects").

When a "pre-reading effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold that is the target of the effect may be referred to as a "pre-reading target hold," "trigger hold," "culprit hold," etc., and the changing display of the special pattern based on the pre-reading target hold is referred to as a "pre-reading target change," "trigger change," "culprit change," etc.

Here, we will give some representative examples of "prediction effects" that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P.

《Chance Prediction》
"Chance eye pre-reading" is a performance in which the decorative pattern P801 stop display pattern according to a predetermined rule is displayed (or temporarily displayed) in the display of the decorative pattern P801 until the start of the change of the pre-reading target change. Examples of the rules for the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 that are predetermined as chance eyes include (a) a case where a mismatched pattern is displayed by a combination of only patterns with the same color of the number part of the decorative pattern, (b) a case where the decorative pattern stop patterns such as "1", "2", "3" or "5", "4", "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as a sequence of stop patterns (forward sequence, reverse sequence), and (c) a special number such as "7" or a pattern different from the number such as "first" is displayed as a stop display pattern of the center pattern.

"Prediction of moving parts for performance"
The "pre-reading of a movable role" is a presentation in which the movable role P560 or the frame movable role P360 (such as the lever P382 of the pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3) is made to operate in a lively manner according to a presentation operation pattern from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation display of the pre-read target fluctuation begins, or spanning over to the pre-read target fluctuation.

Zone transition prediction
"Zone transition pre-reading" is a pre-reading effect that suggests a high possibility of a jackpot by transitioning to a special performance mode (called a "zone") in the display of the special pattern before the pre-reading target variation begins, and executing a pre-notification lottery to execute a pre-notification effect corresponding to the special performance mode until the display of the variation that becomes the pre-reading target variation. For example, it will be "display normal background → display pre-reading background → jackpot" or "display normal background → display pre-reading background → losing pattern stops and returns to normal background."

(Example of display when reach effect is executed)
Next, Fig. 18 is a diagram showing a situation where a reach effect is being performed, which has a high expectation of a big win. As described above, the "reach effect" refers to an effect in which the decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and it is announced that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner.

In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the game, in many cases, a jackpot is notified by the three decorative patterns P801 coming to the same stopped display mode via a reach effect.

In the example of Figure 18, the left decorative pattern P801a and the right decorative pattern P801c are displayed as "5", and the patterns in the changing middle pattern row are "4", "5", and "6", and the "4" pattern vibrates violently, indicating that if it switches to "5", a jackpot will be awarded.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of the "5" which is the left and right decorative symbols is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 in the stopped display of FIG. 17, and the decorative symbol P801b of the middle symbol row during the variable display is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 in the stopped display, and is highlighted. The small decorative symbols corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be called "escape symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In addition to the example shown in the figure, in the reach effect, whether or not a jackpot will be won may be notified depending on the ending of the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed as the evacuation symbol P803 in a smaller size (or are not displayed) to increase the visibility of the effect to which the player is to be drawn.

In addition, gaming machines are also known that do not display three decorative symbols P801, and there are also multi-line reaches that simultaneously form multiple lines of reach patterns, but detailed explanations of these will be omitted.

As an exception to reach effects, there is a reach effect called a "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are displayed synchronously and change in the same manner. Although the situation differs from the standard for reach effects, which is "a situation in which all decorative symbols except for one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and if one more symbol stops in the same manner, a jackpot will be announced," a full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

In addition, in FIG. 18, a "performance setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the performance setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 is an area that displays the setting status and change status of the volume setting function that adjusts the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, the light intensity adjustment function that adjusts the light emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and the effect mode change function that changes the type of preview effect that occurs, called the performance mode, and changes the frequency of the preview effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not displayed all the time, but is displayed temporarily when the player performs operations related to the various effect settings mentioned above (volume adjustment function, light intensity adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 left or right. In the situation of FIG. 18, if the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (blackened area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to "4."

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P is configured so that when adjusting the light intensity, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down directions, and an example of the presentation mode change function is to switch the presentation mode in a predetermined order in response to the operation of the presentation button. Note that the operations related to these presentation settings may adopt different operating modes in relation to the execution of presentations during play, and methods of changing settings other than those exemplified may be adopted as appropriate.

In addition, it is possible to set periods during which the player's effect setting operations are enabled and disabled with regard to the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, and when a particularly important effect is being executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of the display during a big win)
Next, based on FIG. 19, the display mode of the presentation when a jackpot game is being played on the pachinko gaming machine P will be described.

"Display showing the type of jackpot"
The decorative pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is displayed on the lower left and upper right of the screen in Fig. 19. The lower left of the screen displays a single decorative pattern P801 (also called a "jackpot decoration pattern (P805)") in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being changed, as in the case of the execution of the reach performance described above, and the upper right of the screen continues to display the simple decoration pattern P802 that was displayed when the change display of the special pattern ended.

In the pachinko game machine P, the type of decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred) suggests to the player the type of jackpot that will be executed, the expected number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot ends (normal game state) in a dramatic way. Therefore, by displaying the decorative pattern (jackpot decoration pattern P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the jackpot in this way, it is possible to suggest the type of jackpot and the number of game balls that can be acquired even during jackpot play.

In addition, as an indication of the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 resembling a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND 6" (called "round display (P820)"), with the word "MAX" written in the center of the icon P821. In the icon P821 in the figure, the character string "MAX" indicates a jackpot, and indicates that the maximum number of rounds of jackpot play that the prerequisite pachinko gaming machine P has will be played. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or "cascade (display) icon", and the display increases cumulatively each time a specific game state and a jackpot game are repeatedly played, and is an indication that notifies the player so that the player can understand how many times and what type of jackpot they have won in the so-called "cascade" state.

Although not shown, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P executes an effect to inform the player of the type of jackpot by displaying "XX Bonus!" (indicating a maximum round jackpot) or "△△ Chance" (indicating a jackpot that is not the maximum round) in the "jackpot start demo effect" effect display executed during the jackpot start demo period.

In addition, even if it is suggested that a jackpot has occurred, such as a "△△ Chance" with a small number of executed rounds, it is possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" during the jackpot round, such as an "Extra Bonus! + 〇 Rounds" to inform the player that the executed jackpot round is actually a jackpot of the maximum number of rounds.

The "jackpot promotion effect" may also be used to suggest that a jackpot game is being played that will transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot that was previously announced. For example, the effect display may switch from an effect for a jackpot game (called a "non-variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function will not be activated after the jackpot game, to an effect for a jackpot game (called a "variable jackpot" or "specific jackpot") in which the probability fluctuation function will be activated after the jackpot game.

"Display showing the progress of the jackpot game"
Next, a description will be given of the display of effects showing the progress of a jackpot game when a jackpot game is played. In FIG. 19, the effects showing the display of effects of a jackpot include a "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_O" in the upper left of the screen, a "number of acquired balls display (P822)" executed by displaying the character string "TOTAL_O_Opt" in the lower right of the screen, and a "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the approximate center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during a jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called a "round display" is displayed.

<Round Display>
The "round display (P820)" is a display that indicates the number of rounds of the round game (unit game) being played during a jackpot game. The number to the right of "ROUND" is updated when a round game starts. The example in FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round of round game is being played.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of rounds actually performed during the big win game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" mentioned above, the small win game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game performed after the V win may be treated as the second round. In another example, if the opening pattern of the big win port P751 in the round game ends with a transition to a short-term ball-scoring state, the value of the "round display" may not be updated, and the round that was actually performed may be treated as an "actual round" only when the opening pattern of the big win port becomes a long-term ball-scoring state.

《Number of balls acquired》
The "Number of balls acquired display (P822)" includes a "Number of balls acquired by jackpot display (P823 *not shown)" which displays the number of game balls acquired cumulatively in one jackpot game currently being played, and a "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (824)" which displays the number of game balls acquired cumulatively in multiple jackpots across specific games. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (P824)", which is a 5-digit number of acquired balls display, is displayed. The "Number of balls acquired by jackpot display (P823)" and the "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (P824)" may be displayed in parallel at the same time.

In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the "number of acquired balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the large prize winning port P751 during a jackpot game. However, the accumulated target for the prize ball payout of the number of acquired balls display P822 may also be the cumulative addition of payouts based on balls entering the general prize winning port P731 and the second start prize winning port P721 located in the right area P501R of the game board P5.

In addition, as another variation, the display period of the "Number of acquired balls display (P822)" may be displayed not only during a jackpot game, but also during the execution of a specific game, and the addition period of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in the "Number of acquired balls display (P822)" may be extended not only during a jackpot game, but also during specific games and small jackpot games.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, in addition to the "number of balls acquired display (P822)", only in special situations, such as when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out reaches a milestone number, such as "2500 balls", "5000 balls", or "10000 balls", can a "divided number of balls acquired display" be executed to highlight and notify the player in addition to the "number of balls acquired display" (for example, "GET 10000!!" is displayed).

《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" is a display showing how many balls can be entered in one round of play until the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large prize winning hole P751 is reached, or how many game balls have entered the large prize winning hole P751 in the current round of play. The former is displayed as a circular object displayed with shading in Fig. 19, and the latter is displayed as a two-row object display as a white circular object located approximately in the center of the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, in the sixth round of play, five balls have already been placed in the big prize slot (shown by the open circular object), and the count display P825 shows that five more balls can be placed (shown by the shaded circular object). The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round begins.

During a round of jackpot play, depending on the flow of game balls, a winning combination may occur in which the number of game balls that satisfy the conditions for closing the big prize opening P751 is equal to or greater than the conditions for closing the big prize opening P751. This type of winning combination of game balls that exceeds the conditions for closing the opening is called an "over winning combination."

Although not shown, when an "over win" occurs, a special effect may be performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light may be emitted from the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect may be emitted from the speaker P83 to notify the player. In addition, with regard to the aforementioned number of balls won display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of an "over win" may be included in the calculation, or may not be included in the calculation.

Other effects displayed during big win games
Next, other display effects that are being executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed approximately in the center of the left side of the screen are the simple hold display P814 mentioned above.

The "Sound_2" display displayed to the right of the decorative pattern (jackpot decoration P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "selected song display (P854)" which shows the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. The pachinko game machine P is designed to allow the player to select the song to be played at will by operating the performance button P381 or cross key P383 during the first or second round during a jackpot game. Regarding the selected song display P854, if the song can be changed, an image stating "You can change it with the (up) or (down) key" is displayed near the selected song display P854 as shown in FIG. 20.

The selection of effects during this type of jackpot play is not limited to song selection, but also allows for changes to the round effects and selection of effects (effect modes) during specific play after the jackpot play (collectively referred to as "effect customization display (P853)"), but a detailed explanation of these is omitted here.

Finally, the "Right hit" and right-side arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified diagram P802 in the upper right corner of the screen are image displays related to the "hit selection notification (P830)" (also called the "recommended launch position notification"). In the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise, during a jackpot game, the game state is such that it is recommended to launch the game ball into the right-side area P501R of the game area, so the "Right hit notification (P832)" (display of the text string "Right hit" and right-side arrow symbol) is executed.

The "shot notification" may be displayed not only during jackpot play, but also during play in a specific game state or during play in the normal game state. In particular, in situations where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a jackpot or the occurrence/end of a specific game state), a larger display that is easier for the player to recognize than the shot notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., to notify the player of the recommended launch position for the next game state.

In the "Shooting Notification (P830)", the image that is temporarily displayed in a larger size when the game state transitions is referred to as the "First Shooting Notification Image" ("Large Right-Hit Display (P831)", "Large Left-Hit Display (P833)"), and the display that shows the recommended firing position for the game state during almost the entire duration of the game state during a jackpot game or in a specific game state is sometimes referred to as the "Second Shooting Notification Image" ("Small Right-Hit Display (P832)", "Small Left-Hit Display (P834)").

As another type of "Shot-by-hit notification (P830)," if it detects that the game ball has been shot to a position other than the recommended launch position, for example, if the game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area during a jackpot, a "left-hit warning notification" ("right-hit warning notification (P835)") is issued to alert the player that the game ball should be shot to the right area P501R of the game area, displaying a message such as "Please hit to the right." Note that in a situation where the recommended launch position and the player's actual launch position are opposite, a "right-hit warning notification" ("left-hit warning notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of a display during a specific game state)
20 is a diagram showing the game effects during the operation of the electric chute support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). A wide variety of effects are displayed in the figure, but the explanation of those that have been explained in the above explanation will be omitted, and only the effects that have not been explained so far and the effects that have differences from the above explanation will be explained.

First, as a presentation display that has not been explained so far, we will explain the "presentation mode display (P840)" and "remaining number of plays display (P841)" as presentation displays during a specific game state.

"Display of performance mode"
The "presentation mode display (P840)" is a display showing the current state of the presentation display mode, and is a display showing that a preview presentation corresponding to the corresponding mode is being selected by lottery based on state information called the presentation mode. When the presentation mode display differs, the types of preview presentations visible to the player are generally made to give a significantly different visual impression, although there are some preview presentations that are common to both. In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, and a display is made showing that the game state of the underlying pachinko game machine P is "ST (number of times cut probability change)" (high probability/high base state).

In addition to notifying the presentation mode in a specific game state, the "presentation mode display (P840)" may also be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), and when there are multiple presentation modes in one game state, the display may be temporary each time the conditions for switching the presentation mode are met, or may continue until the presentation mode ends.

《Display of remaining games》
The "remaining number of times of play display (P841)" is a display showing the number of times the special symbol will be displayed (the number of times the special symbol will be drawn) until the specific game state ends, or the number of times the special symbol will be displayed until the current presentation mode ends. In Fig. 20, "56 remaining" is displayed at the top center of the screen, informing the player that the "ST (number of times cut probability change)" game state will continue until 56 more special symbol drawings are performed.

Next, we will explain the differences between the display example of the specific game state shown in Figure 20 and the display examples of the other game states described above.

Decorative symbols (specific game states)
A variable display of a decorative pattern P801 is displayed in the center of the screen in Fig. 20. In comparison with the decorative pattern P801 in the example of the presentation display in the normal gaming state in Fig. 20, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the example of the presentation display in the specific gaming state in Fig. 20.

In the pachinko game machine P, the specific game state is displayed as a display of the specific game state, and the display of the selected music P854 and the number of balls acquired P824 are displayed at the bottom of the screen. In the specific game state, additional displays that are not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) are displayed. If the decorative pattern P801 is displayed at the same size as in the normal game state, some of the patterns may overlap with other displays during the stop display, which may cause a problem of reduced visibility of the stop display patterns. In the pachinko game machine P, the display of the decorative pattern P801 is simplified and made small so that such problems are less likely to occur. As an example of simplifying the display of the decorative pattern P801, in addition to reducing the size, a method of not displaying character images or the like that are displayed in conjunction with the numbers indicating the patterns may also be adopted.

《Pending display area (specific game state)》
In the pachinko game machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in Fig. 20, the reserved object display area P810 in a specific game state has a display area for reserved objects "Keep 1" to "Keep 4" from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction as a display of reserved objects P811. Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" presentation mode state.

When the display of the change shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in this state, the display of the reserved object P811 located at the very bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the reserved objects P811 lined up in the back moves forward and becomes larger.

We will also explain the "result display effect," which is not shown in the diagram but is an important effect that is displayed during certain games.

《Result display》
The "result display effect" is an effect that, in the underlying pachinko game machine P, is mainly performed when the final change in a specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the reserved balls that occurred during the specific game state are cleared, and is performed when the player recognizes that the "consecutive wins" state has ended. It is an effect that informs the player of how many jackpot wins the player has won in the so-called "consecutive wins" state, and how many game balls the player has won in total (corresponding to the display of the number of balls won).

[Example]
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the above-mentioned base technology. Below, the differences from the base technology will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements that make up the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the base technology will be given the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs the "small hit V" described in the explanation of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specs") of the assumed pachinko gaming machine, and is a pachinko gaming machine that provides new gameplay by varying the content of the "specific gaming state" (particularly the length of the period during which the "base state" is maintained in the "high base state") in the normal gaming state after the execution of a jackpot game (or after the execution of a jackpot game based on the continuous operation device of the role that is activated by passing through a specific area P760 inside the large prize winning port P751 during a small hit game) depending on the "base state" in the normal gaming state when the small hit (or jackpot) game is started.

In particular, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment adopts a unique game feature in which, when the right to a small win (or a big win) is acquired in the special pattern reservation (reservation of a second special pattern) which is the main part of the play in the specific game state that is consumed immediately after the normal game state (low probability/high base state) ends and is controlled to the "(low probability/) low base state", the next small win (or big win) can be acquired during the period in which the specific game state (low probability/high base state) is maintained as the game state after the special game state (big win play), thereby effectively acquiring the right to two small wins (big wins).

The following is a detailed explanation of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which has the above-mentioned features.

(Board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board (the configuration of the game area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment can be implemented with a board configuration that is almost identical to that of the underlying pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is configured with a specific area P760 inside the large prize opening (attacker) P751 in order to adopt the gameplay (specifications) described below. Note that, as long as the changes do not change the gameplay disclosed below (or are only minor changes), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(Specifications)
Next, the playability (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be explained. In this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball output performance, only the specifications for "setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values for other setting values are set appropriately.

The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment has a winning/losing lottery probability set to 1/269 for the big win probability (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and 1/9.1 for the small win probability (only the second special symbol), and the number of winning balls is set to 4 balls for the first start winning hole (first start hole) P711, 3 balls for the second start winning hole (second start hole) P721, 3 balls for the left general winning hole P731L, 2 balls for the right general winning hole P731R, and 15 balls for the large winning hole (attacker) P751.

The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment also employs a second special symbol priority consumption control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is given priority for variable display. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small win" as a special symbol lottery result, but it is also possible to configure the first special symbol to have a "small win". Note that, as long as the game playability of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is not lost, it goes without saying that it is not limited to the second special symbol priority consumption control, and as a modified example, it is also possible to apply a first special symbol priority consumption control, or a ball entry order consumption control, which gives priority to consumption from the ball that entered first.

The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment employs a game feature (specification) called "small hit V" explained as the prerequisite technology, and is designed so that in addition to the case where a "big hit" is obtained by the special symbol lottery, when a "small hit" is obtained by the special symbol lottery and the game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening P751 during the small hit game that is subsequently executed, the device for continuously operating the role is activated and the big hit game is executed. In this embodiment, when a small hit game develops into a big hit game, the series of special game states from the start of the small hit game to the end of the big hit game are called "small hit V" or "small hit development big hit", etc.

The types of jackpots (including small jackpots V) in the special game state in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment are a 3-round jackpot (jackpot with the first special symbol) and a 10-round jackpot (jackpot with the second special symbol or small jackpot V). In addition, for the specific game, which is the advantageous normal game state, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment does not have a probability fluctuation function, and executes the specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chute support function (electric support) function after various jackpots (including small jackpots V).

In addition, in the detailed control example described later, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is configured to refer to the special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) at a predetermined timing during the specific game period and/or the period when the remaining reserved maximum of four variation displays are displayed after the specific game ends, and to select a variation pattern to ensure the variation display time of the special pattern as necessary, but the timing of referring to the special variation pattern table is such that the number of times the first special pattern variation display and the number of times the second special pattern variation display are separately counted and stored after the execution of the special game ends, and when the memory information of the number of variations stored corresponding to each of the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts to vary, the special variation pattern table for the first special pattern or the special variation pattern table for the second special pattern can be referred to.

(Game Flow)
Next, the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be explained using Fig. 21. The game flow shown in Fig. 21 is a flow assuming a case where a game is played according to the design intention of the player (normal game). Note that the game flow when a game that ignores the design intention of the player (abnormal game, irregular game) is played may not fit the situation shown in Fig. 21, but an explanation of the abnormal game will be omitted.

First, in "Normal Play (Low Probability/Low Base State)" in FIG. 21, the player plays with a firing strength that allows the game ball to enter the first start winning hole P711 (so-called "left shot" that fires the game ball toward the left side area P501L). When the game ball enters the first start winning hole, a special pattern lottery based on the first special pattern (Special Pattern 1) is held, and if the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot, "jackpot (Special Pattern 1)" is executed (FIG. 21 (A)). Note that the state surrounded by double lines in the figure represents a special game state (jackpot game, small jackpot game).

When the "jackpot (special symbol 1)" ends, the game state transitions to a specific game state (high base state) (Figure 21 (B)). The specific game state after the "jackpot (special symbol 1)" is "Breakthrough zone - low probability / high base (special symbol 2: 1 time) + maximum 4 reserved symbols remaining" (details will be described later), and the high base state (electric chute support function operating state) continues until the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes once and is displayed as stopped.

When the game moves to the "Breakthrough Zone", the player plays by "hitting to the right", aiming the game ball at the second start winning hole P721 located in the right area P501R of the game area P501. Since the "Breakthrough Zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the normal electric device P770 located in the second start winning hole P721 is likely to be in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter, and by firing the game ball into the right area P501R, the game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol operation hole P741, a normal symbol lottery is held, the normal electric device P770 is activated, and the ball entering the second start winning hole P721 causes a special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

In the "Breakthrough Zone", the high base state continues until one display of the second special symbol is completed, so the player can take part in a special symbol drawing for the second special symbol with a "small win", which is the drawing result that triggers a small win V, once during the high base state and for the maximum number of reserved second special symbols (four in this embodiment). Here, in the "Breakthrough Zone", the special symbol drawing (maximum of five times) for the second special symbol results in a big win or small win, and the player's expectation of winning a "small win V/big win (special symbol 2)" (Fig. 21 (C)) is set to approximately 45%. In the "Breakthrough Zone", if the special symbol drawing for the second special symbol does not result in a win (big win, small win), the game will transition to "normal play (low probability/low base)" (Fig. 21 (D)).

When the "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Chart 2)" ends, the game will transition to a specific game state, either "Battle Mode - Low Probability/High Base (Special Chart 2: 6 Times) + Maximum 4 Remaining Reserves" or "Pseudo Big Win - Low Probability/High Base (Special Chart 2: 95 Times) + Maximum 4 Remaining Reserves" (Figures 21 (E), (H)).

Here, the factor that creates the game playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is whether to transition to a specific game state, "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot", after the "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)". The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment determines whether to transition to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" based on the game state when the winning fluctuation of the special pattern that triggered the execution of the "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" begins, rather than the special pattern (stop display pattern) that triggered the execution of the "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)".

Specifically, when controlled to the "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", or "Pseudo-Big Win", and in a high base state where the electric chute support function is activated, in the case of a "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Chart 2)" triggered by the change in the special symbol that is the winning symbol for which the change display has begun, the game will transition to "Battle Mode" after the end of the "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Chart 2)" (Fig. 21 (E)), and will transition to "Pseudo-Big Win" after the end of the "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Chart 2)" triggered by the winning change in the second special symbol that corresponds to the remaining reserve (reserve related to the second special symbol) that begins to change in a low base state where the electric chute support function is not activated (Fig. 21 (H)).

"Battle mode - low probability / high base (Special symbol 2: 6 times) + maximum 4 reserved symbols remaining" (details will be described later) is a specific game in which the high base state (the state in which the electric chute support function is activated) continues until the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) changes 6 times and stops being displayed. As with the "Breakthrough Zone", the player shoots a game ball into the right area P501R, and aims to win a "small hit V / big hit (Special symbol 2)" before the second special symbol changes up to 10 times (6 times in the high base state + maximum 4 reserved symbols remaining) (Figure 21 (F)). Note that if the second special symbol does not change up to 10 times and becomes a small hit V or a big hit, the game will transition to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (Figure 21 (G)).

"Pseudo-jackpot - low probability/high base (Special symbol 2: 95 times) + maximum 4 remaining reserved symbols" (details to be described later) is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chute support function) continues until the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) changes 95 times and stops being displayed. As with the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", the player shoots a game ball into the right area P501R, aiming to win a "small hit V/jackpot (Special symbol 2)" before the second special symbol changes and displays a maximum of 99 times (95 times in the high base state + maximum 4 remaining reserved symbols) (Figure 21 (I)). In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the probability of a "small win" in the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is set to 1/9.1, so it can be said that a small win V or a big win is essentially confirmed by the time the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is performed 95 times, which is more than 10 times the small win probability. However, if the special pattern lottery result is not a "small win" or a "big win" even if the second special pattern is displayed 94 times during the "pseudo big win" game, the game will transition to the "battle mode" presentation mode (Fig. 21 (J)). The 95th rotation of the "pseudo big win" is the same as the 6th rotation in the "battle mode", and if the 95th rotation and the maximum 4 rotations of the reserved second special pattern do not result in a "big win" or a "small win", the game will transition to "normal play (low probability/low base)" (Fig. 21 (G)). As a variant, the timing of the transition to the "Battle Mode" presentation mode may be set to an earlier timing, for example, when the second special symbol has been displayed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot", i.e., when the number of times remaining is the same as the number of times that the high base state continues in "Battle Mode", which is 6 times.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the period controlled by the specific games "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", and "Pseudo Big Win", in addition to the end condition based on the number of times the second special symbol changes, the game may be configured to end when the first special symbol changes five times. The end condition of 95 times for the specific game based on the number of times the second special symbol changes in the "pseudo big win" is set so that the number of times the special symbol changes, which is the maximum duration of the electric chute support function under the current regulations, is not exceeded without satisfying either the specific game end condition of the first special symbol change display or the second special symbol change display. For example, if the end condition for the specific game based on the number of times the first special symbol changes is set to three times, the period of the "pseudo big win" can be set to the time when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes 97 times and stops.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which has the game flow described above, has a gameplay that aims to win a large amount of balls by obtaining a small hit V (or a big hit) based on a "small hit" which has a high probability of being won in the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern in the "breakthrough zone," "battle mode," and "pseudo big hit," and looping between the "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and the "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)." In particular, by winning a "small win" or "big win" in the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during the consumption of up to four remaining reserved balls generated in the specific games of "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", that is, after the high base state ends, the player can move to a "pseudo-big win", which is a specific game in which the next small win V (or big win) is virtually guaranteed, and one more small win V (or big win) worth of balls can be won. Therefore, the player can experience different gameplay, where the balls won are either one small win V (big win) or two small win V (big win) worth of balls, depending on the timing of the small win V (big win) won during "Battle Mode".

In the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment described above, the main end conditions for the high base state in the "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", and "Simulated Big Hit" are the number of times the second special symbol is displayed as 1, 6, and 94, respectively. However, depending on the balance between the entertainment value of the presentation and the playability (specs), the number of times the second special symbol is displayed as the end conditions for the high base state in the "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode" can be appropriately adjusted to, for example, 4 times, the same as the reserved number, or to 10 times to increase the probability of looping between the "Battle Mode" or "Simulated Big Hit" and "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)" (Note that the "small hit" probability in the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol and the number of rounds of the special game executed in the "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)" are also appropriately adjusted).

In such a modified example, if the number of times the second special symbol is displayed, which is the end condition of the high base state, is less than the maximum number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol, it is possible to produce a presentation that emphasizes winning in a lower base state, and if the number of times the second special symbol is displayed, which is the end condition of the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol, it is possible to produce a presentation that gives the impression that there are two chances to win a "small hit V/big hit (special symbol 2)". Also, if the number of times the second special symbol is displayed, which is the end condition of the high base state, is more than the maximum number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol, it is possible to provide an interesting presentation and gameplay that allows the player to enjoy the game with the expectation of winning a "small hit V/big hit (special symbol 2)" many times in the high base state.

(Breakthrough zone)
Next, the game control and presentation contents in the "breakthrough zone" will be explained with reference to Figures 22 to 24.

The "Breakthrough Zone" is a presentation mode that corresponds to a period during which the second special symbol is displayed once during a high base state, and the second special symbol is displayed once during a period during which the second special symbol is displayed once corresponding to up to four reserved second special symbols that occur during the high base state.

During "normal play (low probability/low base)" (see Figure 21), if a "jackpot" is obtained in the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern and a "jackpot (special pattern 1)" is executed, the "breakthrough zone" will start after the "jackpot (special pattern 1)".

After the "Breakthrough Zone" has started, when the first change in the second special symbol is displayed, the "Reserved Charge" display shown in Figure 22 begins. The first change in the second special symbol in the "Breakthrough Zone" is configured so that a long-term change pattern of around 60 seconds is selected in the change pattern lottery on the main control board P40 by referencing the special change pattern table (change pattern table for the first change in the breakthrough zone), and the "Reserved Charge" is executed for a period of around 30 seconds from the start of the change.

The "reserved charge effect" is an effect that prompts the player to hold the second special symbol during the display period of the "reserved charge effect" and display the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area 810. The "reserved charge effect" is configured so that the character displayed on the screen and the effect (effect) displayed around the character change so as to increase the expectation of a win each time the reserved object P811 is displayed (or each time a game ball enters the second start winning port P721), and the effect can also prompt the player to increase the reserved second special symbol by hitting to the right.

When the "reserved charge effect" ends with the first display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", during the first display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", an effect is performed (in this embodiment, a "breakthrough zone battle effect", see Figure 23) that notifies the player of the result of the lottery for the first display of the second special symbol and the advance judgment information regarding the reservation of the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the "reserved charge effect" regarding whether or not a "small hit V/big hit (special symbol 2)" can be obtained in the "breakthrough zone".

The "Breakthrough Zone Battle Performance" is a performance that notifies the results of the lottery (including advance judgment information) for up to 5 variations in the "Breakthrough Zone" at once, and for the reservation of the second special pattern that occurs in a high base state (especially while the "reservation charge performance" is being executed), no performance-based notification of the winning/losing lottery result is made other than the display of the variation of the simplified diagram P802. In addition, for the remaining reservations of the second special pattern in the "Breakthrough Zone" (reservations of the second special pattern that are consumed after the transition to a low base state), the main control board P40 is configured to refer to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for the remaining reservations of special pattern 2, or the special pattern 2 variation pattern table at low base) and select a short variation pattern of about 1 second. Note that, as in the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Performance," a variation display that notifies all the winning/losing lottery results, including the lottery result of the current variation display and the advance judgment information of one or more reservations that will start to vary from the next time onwards, in one variation display, is sometimes called a "summary variation."

If a winning variation that triggers a small win V (big win) is executed during the five variations of the "Breakthrough Zone", the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory" as shown in FIG. 24 will be displayed in the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Presentation". The "Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory" will be displayed even if the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "Breakthrough Zone" is a "miss", as long as there is a "win" among the remaining reserved symbols. In the example of FIG. 24, the number of reserved second special symbols in the simple reserved display P814 is 1, which indicates that the reserved symbol that began to vary when there were only two reserved second special symbols remaining was a winning variation. In the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory Presentation", if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "small win", a big win (small win V) occurs only when the game ball enters (passes) a specific area P760 in the large prize entry port P751 during the small win game, so the display of the simplified decoration diagram P802 is not composed of a sequence of numbers, and a "V" pattern that is not displayed as a normal decorative pattern is displayed to notify the player that they have obtained the right to execute the small win V. Also, although not shown, if a winning change is not executed during the five changes of the "breakthrough zone", a "breakthrough zone battle defeat presentation" is executed.

When the first display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the game state will transition from the high base state to the low base state. The timing at which the game state transitions from the high base state to the low base state is when the display time for the second special symbol has elapsed. In order to delay the timing of the display of the second special symbol for the first reserved symbol that is generated as a remaining reserved symbol, a certain waiting period (the fixed period for the special symbol in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment) is set after switching from the high base state to the low base state. Even if the normal electric device P770 of the second start winning port P721 is activated just before the first display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the operation of the normal electric device P770 is terminated during the waiting period (the same applies to the final high base state change in the "pseudo jackpot" and "battle mode" described below). Therefore, even if the remaining reserved symbols start to be consumed and it becomes possible to reserve more second special symbols, there is almost no possibility that the normal electric device P770 of the second start winning slot P721 will operate, just like in normal play (low probability/low base). In addition, since the waiting time is set to a long time of about 6 seconds, the "Breakthrough Zone Battle Presentation", "Breakthrough Zone Battle Victory Presentation", and "Breakthrough Zone Battle Defeat Presentation" continue to be executed even during the waiting time.

Although we will not go into detail here, if there is no winning lottery result or pre-determination information during the execution of the "reserved charge performance", and a winning reservation occurs for the reservation related to the second special pattern that occurs after the "reserved charge performance" has ended, it is difficult to replace the content of the performance from the "breakthrough zone battle defeat performance", so an alternative performance different from the "breakthrough zone battle victory performance" is performed to notify the player that they have acquired the right to a small win V (big win).

In the "breakthrough zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variable display of the first special pattern, which is not the main focus of the game, only displays the variable display of the simplified design image P802, and does not display effects that are recognized as being highly related to the "breakthrough zone" in terms of the appearance of the effects (such as the display of advance notice effects related to the "breakthrough zone"). If a "jackpot (special image 1)" occurs at a time when it is controlled to the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", or "pseudo jackpot", it is possible to control it to transition to "battle mode" instead of the "breakthrough zone".

(Small hit V production and pseudo big hit)
Next, referring to Figures 25 to 29, we will explain examples of small hit V (big hit) effects and "pseudo big hit" effects. The examples shown in Figures 25 to 29 are subsequent to Figure 24, and show examples of effects when a small hit V is won in the remaining reserve of the "breakthrough zone", the game moves to a "pseudo big hit" as a specific game, and a small hit V (big hit) is won again during the "pseudo big hit".

Figure 25 shows an example of a "V prize promotion effect" that encourages the player to place the game ball in (pass through) a specific area P760 in the large prize opening P751 during a small prize game with a small prize V in order to activate the consecutive role device.

In the "V prize promotion effect," an image that resembles the game board P5 is displayed in the approximate center of the screen, and an image that resembles the game area P501 is displayed with an arcing arrow image and an emphasized "V" letter image superimposed with animation and the like. Also, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right hit notification P832, a V prize promotion notification P837 is displayed, and the "V prize promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the player to hit the ball to the right from the entire displayed image to score a ball into the large prize opening P751 (specific area P760).

In addition, if a game ball enters (passes through) a specific area P760 in the large prize opening P751 during the execution of the "V prize promotion effect," i.e., if a "V prize" occurs, the "V prize effect" is executed. One example of the "V prize effect" is an effect in which the letter "V" (V prize already won display P837) shown in the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 26 is displayed together with a predetermined sound effect and a lighting effect of the effect lamp P82.

The "V prize-winning promotion performance" can be displayed from the period called the "small prize start demo" of the small prize game to the execution of the round (special game) of the small prize game. In addition, the round (special game) of the small prize game of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is performed in an opening mode that almost guarantees that 10 game balls will enter the large prize winning port P751 during the approximately 1.560 seconds of opening by repeating the process of opening the large prize winning port P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second 13 times.

Figure 26 shows the display mode of the "jackpot type notification effect" that is displayed during the execution of the role chain operation start demo (jackpot start demo), which is the timing when the small win game in the small win V ends and the transition to the big win game state is made by the operation of the role chain operation device, and notifies the amount of balls that will be paid out in the big win.

In the "jackpot type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (jackpot type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" and jackpot type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as jackpot type icons P860. Jackpot type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" is the icon that is selected when the first change display of the second special pattern in the "breakthrough zone", that is, the change display of the second special pattern that started to change in the high base state, results in a small hit V, and is an icon that suggests a transition to "battle mode" after one small hit V.

On the other hand, the jackpot type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is the icon selected in the small win V when any of the remaining four reserved balls in the "breakthrough zone" is a winning ball, and as shown in FIG. 21, it is an icon that suggests that after the small win V, the game state will transition to a pseudo-jackpot (specific game). During the "pseudo-jackpot", a series of performance contents are executed from the performance of the small win V (or big win) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo-jackpot" to the performance executed in the small win V (or big win) acquired during the "pseudo-jackpot", so that the player feels as if the balls of two small wins V (or big wins) were acquired in one small win V (or big win).

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and part of the "battle mode" (described later), a summary change is performed for one change of the second special pattern that started to change in the high base state and the remaining four reserved balls, so a "jackpot type notification effect" is performed for the acquired small win V, and a "jackpot type notification effect" is executed as an effect to notify the player of which of the changes subject to the summary change and the remaining reserved balls became a small win (jackpot). Note that, during the summary change, by checking the number of changes displayed on the simple design diagram P802 and the simple reserved display P814, it is obvious which will be selected in the "jackpot type notification effect", but unless the player is familiar with the specifications of the pachinko game machine, the player will only be able to know the amount of balls won from the "jackpot type notification effect".

Figure 27 shows an example of a presentation during a small hit V (jackpot) that precedes a "TWIN_BONUS", which is a presentation related to a small hit V (jackpot) that is executed as a hit in the remaining reserve of the "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", or "Pseudo Jackpot". In this example, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, it shows that the 5th round (the small hit play is counted as the 1st round) of the small hit V that is executed first among the two "small hit V/jackpots (Special Chart 2)" that are executed across the "pseudo jackpot" is currently being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the right column indicates the number of rounds of the small hit V (jackpot) that will be executed first among the two "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" and the number of rounds that have already been executed, while the left column displays the number of rounds that are scheduled to be executed with the small hit V (jackpot) obtained in the "pseudo jackpot", which is a special game. Note that the left column of the round display P820 in FIG. 27 is configured to be semi-transparent and not clearly displayed compared to the round display P820 in the right column, which displays the number of rounds of the small hit V (jackpot) currently being executed, because there is a possibility that a small hit V (jackpot) will not be obtained during a "pseudo jackpot".

Figure 28 shows an example of the presentation display during a "pseudo jackpot" special game. During a "pseudo jackpot" special game, the special game state (a jackpot game or a small jackpot game) is not in progress, but the presentation display is made as if the special game state was still in progress.

In the example of the "pseudo jackpot" display in FIG. 28, an animation of a group of cat-shaped spherical objects moving from the back of the screen to the front is displayed, and "Waiting for TWIN_BONUS_V..." is displayed at the top of the screen. The round display P820 also continues to display the round number of the small hit V (jackpot) that is executed first among the two "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)", and the left column of the round display P820 remains semi-transparent, indicating that the subsequent small hit V (jackpot) is waiting. Note that the display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to always executing the same animation as in the example, and may be configured so that the player can select the content of the animation and the content of the BGM (music) at any time.

In addition, during a "pseudo jackpot", a small jackpot V (jackpot) must be won by causing the ball to enter the second start winning hole P721 and participating in a special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, so the player must continue to shoot the game ball toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 even during the "pseudo jackpot" effect that appears to be between jackpot rounds. For this reason, as shown at the bottom of the effect example in Figure 28, in addition to the normal right-hit notification P832, a character says "Continue hitting to the right," and the effect is displayed to appeal to the player that it is necessary to shoot the game ball.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment displays a setting suggestion effect object P870 as shown in FIG. 28 during the execution of a "pseudo jackpot" in which the effect display looks like between rounds, in order to motivate the player to continue hitting to the right. In this example, as an example of the setting suggestion effect object P870, an object similar to the cat-shaped spherical object in the "pseudo jackpot" effect animation is displayed moving from right to left on the screen so that it is easily distinguished from other objects. In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the display of the setting suggestion effect object P870 may be specified to perform a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value every time a ball enters the second start winning hole P721, or to perform a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value as a variable effect every time the second special pattern changes.

The "pseudo jackpot" is a game state in which the high base state continues for 95 times, but until the 94th change display, the main control board P40 refers to the special change pattern table (pseudo jackpot change pattern table) to configure the change pattern related to the second special symbol so that a short change of about 0.5 to 1 second is likely to be selected. Since the probability of a small win is very high at 1/9.1, a small win (jackpot) is almost always obtained during the 94 changes that repeat short changes, but if a small win (jackpot) is not obtained until the 95th change display, the display display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in Figure 28 is stopped, and the display state is changed to a display state that is approximately equivalent to the final change of the high base state in the "battle mode" described later and the summary change of the remaining four reserved balls. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" at the top of the screen and the jackpot display such as the round display P820 are also ended.

The reason for switching to the "Battle Mode" presentation display state (presentation mode) at the 95th spin is that there is a tendency for short-term variations to be selected for the second special symbol presentation display up to the 94th spin, so it is necessary to display the 95th spin for a long time to give the player time to create a reserve for the second special symbol, while at the same time making effective use of the presentations prepared in other presentation modes as presentations during the long-term display of the 95th spin, and presenting the final variation in the high base state and up to four remaining reserves, with the aim of giving the player at least some presentation interest.

Figure 29 shows a display image that may be displayed during the small hit game and role combination start demo period when a small hit V (big hit) occurs during a specific game "pseudo big hit" (within 94 spins) and the second "small hit V / big hit (special chart 2)" is being executed. In the case of a small hit V (big hit) during a "pseudo big hit" or a small hit V (big hit) other than the summary fluctuation of the battle mode described below, the specification is that the "battle mode" will be transitioned to after the small hit V (big hit), so the above-mentioned "big hit type notification display" is not executed, and an alternative display such as a congratulatory image by a character is displayed. In addition, when the second "small hit V / big hit (special chart 2)" starts, the round display P820 switches from a transparent state to a clear state. Note that the timing at which the "V" indicating a small hit game and the "○" display indicating a big hit game in the round display P820 become clear may be shifted. Specifically, when a small win game starts, the "V" display becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) a specific area P760 in the big win port P751, the "O" display indicating a big win game becomes clear.

In addition, as a modified example, if the lottery results for the second special pattern include small hits V (jackpots) with multiple different numbers of rounds or small hits V (jackpots) with different types of specific game states after the end, the small hits V (jackpots) that are hit in a high base state may also be configured to execute a "jackpot type notification effect" that notifies the player of the number of rounds (amount of balls dispensed) of the current small hit V (jackpot) and the type of specific game state after the end.

As a variation of the presentation example during a "pseudo jackpot", in the presentation example shown in FIG. 28, the remaining number of plays display P841 for a specific game during a "pseudo jackpot" is not displayed, but it may be configured to display "10 plays remaining" when the remaining number of plays for a specific game becomes 10 or less, and the round display P820 for the second "small win V/jackpot (special chart 2)" may be displayed in a more unclear manner or hidden when the remaining number of plays for the "pseudo jackpot" becomes low (when it becomes 10 or less) or when the presentation mode switches to "battle mode".

As another variation of the presentation example during a "pseudo jackpot", when it is determined from the pre-determination information during a "pseudo jackpot" that a hold has occurred that will result in a winning variation related to the second special symbol, the presentation control board P41 is configured to immediately notify the player that a hold related to the winning second special symbol has occurred using the presentation display device P80, presentation lamp P82, speaker P83, presentation prop P560, etc., and may be configured to continuously notify the player that the right to multiple wins has been acquired in a similar manner, or in an even more noticeable presentation mode, if a hold related to the winning second special symbol occurs after announcing that a hold related to the winning second special symbol has occurred.

(Battle Mode)
Next, an example of the presentation display of the specific game "Battle mode" will be described with reference to Figures 30 to 32. Figure 30 shows the first half of the battle mode, and Figures 31 and 32 show an example of the final variation (sixth variation) and the maximum four remaining reserved variations in the high base state of the "Battle mode."

《Battle mode first half》
30 is an example of the effect display related to the first half of the battle mode (the first to fifth variations of the second special symbol in the "battle mode"). The effect of the "battle mode" is an effect that notifies the player of the acquisition of a small win V (big win) depending on whether the ally character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, with each change, an offensive and defensive battle between ally and enemy characters is played out in a dramatic way, and when the enemy gauge P883 reaches "0" (all gone), a small hit V (big hit) is announced. In addition, an ally gauge is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, and by increasing or decreasing using the results of the special pattern lottery for the changing second special pattern and advance judgment information regarding the reserved second special pattern, the player is informed that the likelihood of a small hit V (big hit) is increasing (or decreasing).

The chance-up icon display P880 is displayed on the right side of the screen in the example of the effect shown in Figure 30. The chance-up icon display P880 has its display content determined using the special pattern lottery result of the changing second special pattern and pre-determined information regarding the reserved second special pattern, and is an icon display that suggests that a chance-up effect will be displayed to give an ally character an advantage during the change effect corresponding to the current special pattern change display, or during the change effect corresponding to the next or subsequent special pattern change display.

Of the chance-up icon displays P880, the one displayed on the top row is an item chance-up icon P881, and the one displayed on the bottom row is a character chance-up icon P882. The item chance-up icon is an icon such as an "attack power up icon," "special move icon," or "weapon icon" that suggests that the attacks of ally characters will be more advantageous (enemy gauge P883 will be more likely to decrease), and the character chance-up icon P882 is an icon that suggests that a chance-up effect will occur that increases the likelihood of a jackpot by performing an effect related to the increase or decrease of ally gauge P884 according to the character that appears.

The chance up icon display P880, consisting of the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882, has multiple icons, and is configured so that the expected probability of a small win V (big win) can differ depending on the type displayed, but when an icon of a higher rank is displayed as having been newly acquired when an icon is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or character chance up icon P882 may be configured to be updated to the icon acquired this time.

In addition, the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882 may each indicate the occurrence of a different chance up effect, or may be configured so that when a specific combination is displayed, the two icons act simultaneously to cause one big chance up effect that significantly increases the chance of a big win.

<<Battle Mode Second Half: Summary Changes>>
Next, we will explain the final change (sixth change) of the high base state in "Battle Mode" and an example of the "Battle Mode Final Change Display" that is executed for up to four remaining reserved balls.

The "Battle Mode Final Change Presentation" is a presentation in which the results of the lottery (including advance judgment information) for five changes are announced all at once, just like the "Breakthrough Zone" presentation, and is composed of a "Reserved Charge Presentation (Battle Mode)" and a "Battle Mode Final Battle Presentation" just like the "Breakthrough Zone" presentation. The display of the sixth change of the second special symbol in the specific game "Battle Mode" in which the "Battle Mode Final Change Presentation" is executed refers to a special change pattern table (change pattern table for battle mode final change) and a change pattern of about one minute is selected, and the "Reserved Charge Presentation (Battle Mode)" is composed of about 30 seconds after the start of the change, and after the "Reserved Charge Presentation (Battle Mode)" ends, it transitions to the "Battle Mode Final Battle Presentation". The display of the remaining four reserved second special symbols is composed of a change pattern of about one second, just like the "Breakthrough Zone".

In the "Reserve Charge Effect (Battle Mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect is displayed to encourage the player to aim at the second start winning slot P721 and generate a reserve related to the second special pattern (for example, "Hit to the right to accumulate power (reserve)!!" is displayed near the bottom center of the screen). In addition, the ally gauge P884 moves from the bottom left to the center of the screen, and the word "CHARGE" and an arrow are displayed, thereby urging the player to hit to the right to accumulate the ally gauge P884 (indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot).

When the player generates a reservation for the second special symbol by following the instructions of the "reserved charge effect (battle mode)", a reserved object P811 with the letter "P" (the first letter of Power) is displayed in the reserved display area P810 displayed in the bottom right of the screen, or a reserved object P811 in a chance state suggesting the acquisition (stocking) of an item chance up icon P881 (or a character chance up icon P882) is displayed. These accumulated reserved objects display an effect on the ally gauge P884 and chance up icon display P880 at a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the fluctuation starts), causing the ally gauge P884 to increase or decrease, or the chance up icon display P880 to be acquired (stocked).

As a further application example of the effect using the reserved display area P810 of the "reserved charge effect (battle mode)", when four reserved second special symbols have been accumulated and a further ball enters the second start winning port P721, the reserved object P811 that was once displayed may be changed to a display mode that increases the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, from a "P" reserved to a "P" reserved with a flame effect, or a reserved indicating the acquisition of a character chance up icon) to perform an effect display (reserved chance up effect).

As another application example, the reserved display area P811 may be moved and displayed in a FIFO (First In First Out) manner, and when four reserved second special symbols are generated, depending on the state of the reserved object P811 that pops out of the reserved display area P811, the ally gauge P884 and chance up icon display P880 may be displayed to increase the likelihood of a jackpot.

When the "Reserved Charge Effect (Battle Mode)" ends, the game moves to the "Battle Mode Final Battle Effect" shown in FIG. 32. The "Battle Mode Final Battle Effect" is an effect display in which an ally character unleashes a special move, and depending on the display state of the final ally gauge P884 in the "Reserved Charge Effect (Battle Mode)" and whether or not there is a hit among the five target changes in the summary change, the ally character will perform an attack on the enemy character according to the expected probability of a small hit V (big hit).

Depending on the type of special move used by the ally character, the effect for reducing the enemy gauge P883 can be selected from several effect patterns, such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button P381 and changes the effect content depending on the operation state of the effect button P381, or a button effect that displays the result without a button effect. The types of button effects include a "single press" effect that displays the result by operating the effect button P381 only once, a "continuous press effect" that displays the result by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and a "lever operation effect" that operates the effect lever P382. In the "battle mode final change effect" of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the effect pattern that does not execute the button effect is configured to have a higher expectation. For example, in the "reserved charge effect", when the ally gauge P884 is definitely notified of a win by emitting rainbow colors, the button effect is not executed.

As mentioned above, if there is no small hit V (big hit) by the 94th spin during a "pseudo big hit", the game will enter battle mode on the 95th spin. The 95th spin of the "pseudo big hit" and the control of the remaining reserve (selection of the fluctuation pattern and the performance content) will be the same as the summary fluctuation in the latter half of battle mode. In other words, the 95th spin of the "pseudo big hit" will have a fluctuation of about 1 minute, and the "reserve charge performance (battle mode)" and "battle mode final battle performance" will be performed.

Example of using the Ally Gauge P884
The ally gauge P884 in "battle mode" represents the energy of an ally character, and the higher the number, the higher the expectation of a small hit V (big hit). As a modified example, during the reserved charge performance of the summary fluctuation in the latter half of the battle mode, the blank area and colored area of the ally gauge P884 displayed at the start of the fluctuation are inverted, and a performance method can be adopted in which the lower the expectation of a big hit of the display of the ally gauge P884 at the start of the summary fluctuation, the higher the expectation of a hit in the summary fluctuation (maximum of 5 fluctuations at the end of the battle mode).

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more ally gauge P884 there is, the higher the expectation of a big win, and at the timing when the second half of the battle mode starts (before the reverse display), the lower the ally gauge P884 is, the greater the chance of a hit, making for a novel presentation display.

Furthermore, by configuring in this manner, for example, the character chance up icon P882 can be configured to display a character that reduces the ally gauge P884 of an ally character, making it possible to create more interest in the dramatic interference of the character appearing in the character chance up icon P882 with the ally gauge P884 (increasing or decreasing the ally gauge P884) in both the first and second halves of the battle mode. For example, in the "pending charge effect (battle mode)", a character chance up icon P882 can appear suggesting a decrease in the ally gauge P884, and after a performance in which the ally gauge P884 is decreased, a performance in which the ally gauge P884 is reversed can be performed.

Here, we will explain some modified examples that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. Note that the modified examples described below may be combined and applied to the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment.

(Variation 1)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment adopts a method of determining whether the game will be controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after the execution of a "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)", depending on the game state (base state) at the timing when the hit fluctuation that triggered the execution of the "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" begins.

To adopt the method in this embodiment, when the result of the special pattern lottery performed at the start of the fluctuation is "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)", in addition to setting information such as a flag related to the special game to be executed, it is also necessary to store information related to the game state that is set as the specific game after the special game ("small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)") (such as the number of times to control to the high base state and the offset value for calling up various setting values), which makes it possible to execute the method.

As a first variation on whether control will be made to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after the execution of "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)", a specification may be adopted in which a determination is made after the special symbol has stopped to determine whether control will be made to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after the execution of "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)". As a specification for making a determination after the special symbol has stopped to be displayed, for example, a specification may be given in which the type of specific game of "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" is determined when a V is won during a small hit game, which is the timing when the transition to a jackpot is confirmed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment employs control to transition the game state (base state) when the final fluctuation of the high base state is executed for the "breakthrough zone," "battle mode," and "pseudo jackpot" executed as specific games, and when the fluctuation of the special symbols stops.

Therefore, by adopting the "specification for making a judgment after the special symbol stops displaying (specification for determining the type of specific game of "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" when a V is won during a small hit game)" as variant example 1, when the type of specific game is judged after the execution of "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" for the special symbol fluctuation display which is the final fluctuation in a high base state such as the first fluctuation in the "breakthrough zone" or the sixth fluctuation in the "battle mode" and in which a summary fluctuation is performed as a performance, the judgment is made under a situation controlled to a low base state, so it becomes possible to control so that the judgment result is always a transition to a "pseudo jackpot" which is advantageous to the player.

In other words, for the player, when a high expectation effect is displayed in which up to five fluctuations are executed as a combined fluctuation, and a win occurs, the player is guaranteed to transition to a special advantageous game called a "pseudo jackpot." The "Breakthrough Zone Battle Effect" and "Battle Mode Final Battle Effect," which are effects corresponding to the combined fluctuation, can attract more attention from players and be offered as highly entertaining effects.

(Variation 2)
The pachinko game machine P in this embodiment adopts a control method of changing the game state (base state) to a low base state in accordance with the stopping display of a special pattern in the final change of the high base state, but the timing of changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to a different timing.

Specifically, as a second variant, the timing for changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the final change of the high base state may be configured to be "when the change of the final change of the high base state is being displayed and the reserved value for the second special pattern has reached the upper limit value."

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, when transitioning from a high base state to a low base state in a specific game, it is important to maximize the remaining reserves, but even if a method is adopted in which the game state (base state) is changed from a high base state to a low base state when "the reserve related to the second special pattern reaches the upper limit value while the fluctuation of the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed," as in variant example 2, there is no effect on the game play (degree of advantage for the player).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the game state is transitioned to a low base state when the special symbol is displayed as a final change from the high base state, and the symbol fixation time of the special symbol is set to a long time, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the normal electric device P770 is operating during the first change after transitioning to the low base state. However, according to the specifications of variant example 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal electric device P770 to operate during the display of the change, without waiting for the special symbol to be displayed as a stop, so that the symbol fixation time when the special symbol is displayed as a stop can be configured to be short.

When variant 2 is adopted and the pattern fixing time is shortened, there is a concern that the second special pattern may be intentionally reserved just before the end of the final fluctuation in the high base state, creating a state in which the normal electric device P770 is activated at the start of the first fluctuation after the transition to the low base state. However, methods can be considered to avoid intentional attacks by making it difficult to target the timing of the end of the fluctuation by allowing multiple patterns to be selected for the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) of the special pattern in the final fluctuation in the high base state, or by setting the condition for the end of the operation of the normal electric device P770 to one or two balls (preferably one ball) entering the second start winning port P721.

(Variation 3)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is configured so that a small win pattern that triggers a 10-round big win (small win V) is selected as a small win game (small win V) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, and as shown in Figure 21, it is controlled to always transition to either a specific game of "battle mode" or "pseudo big win". However, as a variant example 3, it may be configured to have a small win pattern that executes a small win V (big win) with a number of rounds other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds or 7 rounds), or it may be configured to have a small win pattern that does not activate the electric chute support function after a small win V (big win), i.e., does not transition to a high base state, regardless of the game state (base state).

As an example of variant 3, if a configuration is adopted that has a small win pattern that does not activate the electric chute support function after a small win V (big win) (referred to as a "small win pattern without time reduction" or "small win pattern without support"), when the small win V is executed with the small win pattern without time reduction stopped and displayed, it becomes difficult to generate a reservation related to a new second special pattern after the small win V (big win), making it difficult to continue the consecutive win state. Note that when configuring the small win pattern without time reduction to be won with a certain probability (for example, about 10% of the time of winning a small win), it is preferable to configure it so that the winning probability of the small win itself is increased and the ease of consecutive wins is balanced so that the consecutive win performance is not excessively reduced.

On the other hand, by mixing such small win symbols without time reduction, for example, if there are two or more reserves that can trigger a small win V among the currently changing second special symbol and the reserves related to the second special symbol, and the first small win V is a small win symbol without time reduction and the pattern that can trigger the subsequent small win V is not a small win symbol without time reduction, the game state to which the game transitions after the subsequent small win V is "battle mode" in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment that does not have a small win symbol without time reduction, whereas in variant 3 it is "pseudo big win", and there is also the advantage that the gameplay can be changed when multiple small wins occur in succession.

When using a small win pattern without time reduction, if a small win without time reduction is won during a consecutive win, if there are remaining reserves, it is thought that the player will be very interested in whether or not the remaining reserves will win. In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the change time of the special pattern when the remaining reserves, which are reserves generated in a high base state, are consumed is configured to select a short change pattern by the "Special pattern 2 remaining reserve consumption change pattern table" (or "Special pattern 2 change pattern table at low base time"), but after the execution of a small win V based on such a small win pattern without time reduction, it is preferable to configure it so that a change time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each change, and a performance display is performed regarding whether or not a small win V (or a big win) has been won for each change without a summary change.

(Variation 4)
In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", a summary change is performed on up to four remaining reserved changes from the final change in the high base state, and a "jackpot type notification effect" is adopted to notify whether the small hit V (jackpot) was obtained in the high base state or the low base state. However, in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the control of the specific game state after the small hit V (jackpot) is achieved is different depending on whether the change is started in the high base state or the low base state. Therefore, it can be considered preferable to enable the player to recognize whether the small hit V (jackpot) was obtained in the high base state or the low base state as the effect content during the display of the change in the second special pattern.

Therefore, as a fourth variant, for the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode," a method is adopted in which the display of the second special pattern in a high base state, in which the type of specific game after a small win V (big win) is different, and the display of the second special pattern in a low base state are performed in different presentation modes (states in which at least some of the display contents are different from each other), making it possible to configure the system so that it becomes clear to the player whether the small win V (big win) was obtained in the high base state or the low base state.

Example of a presentation using variant 4 in the "Breakthrough Zone"
The "breakthrough zone" of the pachinko game machine P in this embodiment is configured to display a "reserve charge effect" and a "breakthrough zone battle effect" as effects for one change in a high base state and a maximum of four changes in the remaining reserves, but if a method of separating the effects for a high base state and a low base state is adopted as in variant example 4, the following example effects can be considered.

That is, in the "breakthrough zone" where interest is heightened as to whether or not a "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)" will be obtained after a "jackpot (special chart 1)" and a transition to a consecutive win state ("battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot") occurs, examples of the effects that distinguish between high base state and low base state include the "reserve charge & logo step-up effect" that is performed with one change in the high base state, and the "remaining reserve battle effect" that is performed over the remaining four reserves.

The "Reserve Charge & Logo Step-Up Effect" is an effect that notifies the player whether or not a "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Pattern 2)" that triggers a transition to "Battle Mode" has been obtained while encouraging the player to accumulate four reserves in the "Breakthrough Zone." For example, after the instruction "Put the game ball into the second start winning hole to complete the "Battle Mode" logo!" is displayed, the text "Battle Mode" is displayed, and the display mode of the text "Battle Mode" gradually changes depending on the ball entering the second start winning hole P721 (the occurrence of a reserve related to the second special pattern and an over-winning). For example, one character at a time lights up or switches to a red display, and when all characters are lit up, a win is notified (when all are lit up, the display becomes rainbow), or the color of the text "Battle Mode" changes from blue to green to red, and finally, when the effect button P381 is operated, the text emits rainbow light, indicating a win. An effect display is executed in such a manner of notification.

The "remaining reserved battle effect" can be, for example, an effect similar to the "breakthrough zone battle effect" of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. Note that in this case, a configuration may be made in which an ally character and an enemy character face off in a collective change for a maximum of four remaining reserved balls. Alternatively, a configuration may be made in which an ally character and an enemy character face off for each remaining reserved change (a presentation similar to that of the "first half of battle mode"). Note that, if a maximum of four remaining reserved balls are to be collective changes, it is necessary to configure the change pattern for the first special symbol of the remaining reserved ball to be a special change pattern.

In addition, during execution of the "Reserved Charge & Logo Step-Up Performance", if the high base state change display is a miss and the pre-determined information for the remaining reserved ball indicates a win, the logo step-up display may be changed to a rainbow colored display indicating a win (first confirmed notification), and then the word "BURST!" may be added to the "Battle Mode" character string to display the word "Battle Mode_BURST!" in rainbow colors (second confirmed notification). When "Battle Mode_BURST!" is displayed, the game progresses to the "Reserved Battle Performance" and the game waits for a win change. Since there is a risk that after the first confirmation notification, the player may stop firing the game ball toward the second start winning port P721, resulting in a situation where the player is unable to progress through the steps, the second confirmation notification may be executed without going through the first confirmation notification, or a button effect may be generated at the end of the effect to prompt the player to operate the effect button P381, regardless of whether the rainbow color (first confirmation notification) has been reached, and the effect may be upgraded to the second confirmation notification.

<<Example of a performance when variant 4 is adopted in "Battle Mode">>
Next, in the "battle mode" of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, a method (variant example 4) will be explained in which a presentation mode for a high base state and a presentation mode for a low base state are separated and at least some of the presentation modes are displayed to inform the player whether the specific game to be transitioned to after the special game (jackpot, small hit V) is "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" depending on the timing of obtaining a "small hit V/jackpot (special chart 2)," making it easier for the player to understand the type of specific game after the special game.

The "battle mode" of the pachinko game machine P in this embodiment is configured to perform the "first half of the battle mode" presentation from the first change to the fifth change in the high base state, and the "reserved charge presentation (battle mode)" and "battle mode final battle presentation" which are performed with the sixth change, which is the final change in the high base state, and the summary change of up to four reserved balls displayed in the low base state. However, in the "battle mode" when variant example 4 is adopted, the "first half of the battle mode" presentation is performed from the first change to the sixth change (final change) in the high base state, and the "battle mode final battle presentation" which is the summary change of up to four reserved balls displayed in the low base state can be executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the display of the special symbol, which is the final change in the high base state, is configured to have a special change pattern selected by the special change pattern table (variation pattern table for final change in battle mode). However, in variant example 4, a batch change is performed for a maximum of four remaining reserved symbols, so a special change pattern is selected by the special change pattern table (variation pattern table for final change in battle mode) when the display of the change related to the reserved second special symbol, which is consumed first in the low base state, is performed.

When executing "Battle Mode" employing Modification 4, the timing for executing the summary change is after the start of the change of the remaining reserve related to the second special symbol, so the game state is in a low base state and the reserve cannot be accumulated. Therefore, in the case of "Battle Mode" employing Modification 4, the "reserve charge effect (Battle Mode)" is not included as an effect of the summary change. However, if the reserve related to the second special symbol is not generated by the end of the sixth change in the high base state, the probability that the player can win a "small hit V / big hit (Special Chart 2)" will decrease significantly, so it is necessary to encourage the player to generate the reserve related to the second special symbol in the sixth change in the high base state.

Therefore, in the "battle mode" that employs variant example 4, in the final change (sixth change) of the high base state, the "first half of battle mode" presentation, which is a presentation of the same presentation mode from the first change to the fifth change, is executed, while in order to give the player time to generate a reservation for the second special symbol, a special change pattern table ("change pattern table for final change of the first half of battle mode") is used to display the change in the special symbol for about 30 to 40 seconds, and in the final change (sixth change) of the high base state, a "second special symbol reservation increase promotion presentation" is executed that suggests the current reservation number for the second special symbol and encourages the ball to enter the second start winning port P721.

In the "second special symbol reserved increase promotion effect" in the effect display device P80, when the "first half of battle mode" effect is displayed in the same manner as up to the fifth variation in the high base state, a method is conceivable in which an arrow image having a display area section corresponding to the reserved second special symbol divided into four parts is displayed in the lower right direction of the screen of the effect display device P80 (near the second start winning hole P721), and each time a reserved second special symbol occurs, the four divided display area sections are changed to a state indicating "reserved". In addition to the arrow image, a character or a message such as "Aim for the second start winning hole!" may be displayed to encourage the player to enter the second start winning hole P721, and when the reserved second special symbol reaches four, text such as "OK" or "Ready" may be displayed to notify the player that the goal has been achieved.

In addition, in the "second special symbol reserved increase promotion effect," the four-part display area section of the arrow image indicating the presence of reserved symbols may be used to execute an effect (see FIG. 31) in which, as in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, advance judgment information is used to display an image of acquiring an icon displayed in the chance-up icon display P880 as a reserved image.

(Variation 5)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is configured with only 10 rounds of "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)", but it can also be configured to be able to execute "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)" with a different number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds) depending on the stopping display mode of the special pattern that triggered the "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)".

In this case, the number of rounds can be estimated from the display during the change of the special pattern that triggers the "small hit V/big hit (special chart 2)", the start demo display of the small hit game, or the display state of the special pattern. Also, if a pre-reading performance that determines a hit or a pre-reading performance with an extremely high probability of winning is configured to be executed for subsequent reserved balls during the execution of the hit change, or if multiple pre-reading performances with a high probability of winning are configured to be executed simultaneously for multiple reserved balls, it is estimated that a strategy (illegal play) can be executed in which, if it is determined that the preceding "small hit V/big hit (special chart 2)" is a hit with a small number of rounds, the V is not intentionally entered, and the subsequent "small hit V/big hit (special chart 2)" is intentionally executed in a low base state, discarding the hit with a small number of rounds and making the game state after the subsequent hit a confirmed hit.

As a countermeasure against these strategies (illegal play), when information indicating a win has already been obtained from advance judgment information or information on the results of the special pattern lottery for the current variable display, the system may be configured not to execute the pre-reading performance based on advance judgment information for the newly generated reserved second special pattern, or the number of rounds may be determined not based on the stopped display mode of the special pattern, but rather the lottery may be performed when the ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 during a small win game.

(Variation 6)
In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, when a hit (small hit) is generated for any of the reserved symbols in the "Breakthrough Zone" where the summary change is executed, or in the final change of the high base state in "Battle Mode" and the change display for the maximum four remaining reserved symbols, the "Big Hit Type Notification Display" executed in the special game start demo of "Small Hit V/Big Hit (Special Chart 2)" is configured to notify whether the change display of the special symbol in the high base state was a hit (small hit) or the change display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit). However, the content of the display during the summary change may be configured to display a specific display content (for example, a display content in which an ally character repeatedly uses a specific special move to defeat an enemy character) or to perform a decorative pattern promotion display, thereby notifying that a hit (small hit) has been generated for the change display within the maximum four remaining reserved symbols.

In addition, if a win (small win) is notified within such a variable display of the maximum four remaining reserved balls before the "jackpot type notification effect" is executed, the jackpot type icons P860 of the "jackpot type notification effect" may all display "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative display may be executed for the period during which the "jackpot type notification effect" is executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment and the pachinko game machine P of variants 1 to 6 configured as described above, a "small hit V" is adopted as the specification (spec) of the game machine, and a method is adopted in which the type of specific game to be played after (after the big hit game) is changed depending on whether the small hit V (big hit) was obtained in a high base state or a low base state. However, if the specifications of the game machine can provide similar gameplay, that is, "gameplay in which the type of specific game after the big hit is changed depending on whether the timing of the big hit in the special pattern lottery of the random number value (random number value of the second special pattern) obtained by triggering the start port of the normal electric role device was in a high base state or a low base state," it goes without saying that it is possible to implement similar control and presentation content to those described in this embodiment and each variant.

One example of a gaming machine specification that can provide similar gameplay is a low probability gaming machine with a jackpot probability of about 1/100 at low probability times (when the probability fluctuation function is not activated), a V-ST machine (ST 10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18 at high probability times (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and a gaming machine specification in which the number of times the high base state of the "Breakthrough Zone", "Battle Mode", and "Pseudo Jackpot" continues is 1, 6, or 100 times.

In the case of such specifications, even after the end of the "breakthrough zone", a special period may occur in which the special chart 1 is drawn with a high probability, but this period can also be set as a special presentation period (for example, a period in which the presentation mode does not occur in a low probability/low base state). Since the low probability/high base state occurs after the 11th variation of the pseudo-jackpot, the probability of not winning a jackpot during the "pseudo-jackpot" is higher than in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, and since it is not in a high probability state, it is not appropriate to transition to "battle mode" just before the end of the "pseudo-jackpot", so it is preferable to configure it so that the end presentation occurs while the "pseudo-jackpot" screen is still on.

[Second embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the above-mentioned base technology and this embodiment as its basic configuration. Below, the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be mainly described, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements that make up the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

The details will be described later, but the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs the "small win V" like this embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a big win or small win in the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is 100%, and "the occurrence of a reservation for the second special pattern" or "winning the normal pattern lottery and opening the normal electric device 770 installed in the second start winning port P721 so that the game ball enters" indirectly means the acquisition of the right to play a big win game (including a small win V).

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second start winning port P721 related to the acquisition of the right to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, and executes a jackpot game (small jackpot V) for the reserved number of balls corresponding to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved number of balls related to the second special pattern generated during the special period. By configuring in this way, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment can provide the player with a gameplay in which multiple jackpot games (small jackpot V) are executed consecutively, and there is a possibility of winning a large number of game balls at once (because the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment employs second special pattern priority consumption control).

Below, we will explain three embodiments of the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P, which increases the entertainment value by changing the possibility of a hold occurring for the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern during a special period, but before that, we will explain the basic configuration of the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 33 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that may be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment.

In the approximate center of the play area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be seen, and a frame member of a center decorative unit (not shown) is attached to the opening, forming an inner partition of the play area P501.

Below the performance display device P80 is a first start winning port P711A into which game balls flowing down the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80 (left side area P501L) enter, and further below that is an outlet P790 (not shown). Also, a general winning port P731 is located in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the performance display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is shot into the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80, it is expected that the ball will enter the first start winning port P711A or the general winning port P731, resulting in a win.

On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. 33, from the top, an operating port P741, a second start winning port P721 related to the normal electric device P770, a first start winning port 711B, and a large winning port P751 are arranged, and game balls shot toward the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 can win a prize.

Here, the first start winning port P711A and the first start winning port P711B are start winning ports for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and the second start winning port P721 is a start winning port for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern. In other words, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game ball is shot toward the left area P501L or the right area P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning port P711A and the first start winning port P711B are configured to be able to acquire the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern.

(Specifications)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs a "small hit V" like this embodiment, and the major difference from this embodiment in terms of playability (game play) is that the probability of a "small hit" or a "big hit" in the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is 100%, and the reservation related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is in other words the right to play a big hit game (small hit V).

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment also executes a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chute support function (electric support) function after various types of jackpots (including small jackpots V) in the same way as this embodiment, but the conditions for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment are "the end of the variable display based on the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern a specified number of times" or "the execution of a jackpot game (small jackpot V)." For example, if the specified number of times is set to one time, the high base state can be ended even if the variable display of the first special pattern is performed once.

Although we will not go into detail here, other design values (such as the probability of a big win and the number of winning balls for each winning slot) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, but are set appropriately according to the nature of the game. In addition, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol priority consumption control in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, and the reason for this will be described later.

(Game Progress Procedure)
Next, the procedure and progress of the game when playing the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described. In order to simplify the explanation, the "prescribed number of times" will be described as one time with respect to the end condition of the specific game (high base state).

First, the player operates the handle P204 to launch a game ball toward the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the performance display device P80. The game ball launched into the left area P501L enters the first start winning hole P711A, and the right to a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is generated, and the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is executed.

When a jackpot game is executed by the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204 and launches the game ball toward the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 (right area P501R). The game ball launched into the right area P501R during the jackpot game enters the large prize winning hole P751 and the first start prize winning hole P711B. At this time, if a game ball is launched toward the large prize winning hole P751 during the jackpot game, at least one ball is configured to enter the first start prize winning hole P711B, and the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern is generated during the jackpot game. Note that since the game is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chute support state) during the jackpot game, there is almost no possibility of winning the second start prize winning hole P721 related to the normal electric role P770.

When the jackpot game ends and the specific game (high base state) starts, if there is no reserved item related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, a variable display related to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern that occurred during the jackpot game will start. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special pattern priority consumption control is adopted, if there is a reserved item related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern at the end of the jackpot game, a variable display related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern will start after the jackpot ends.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, when a fluctuation that results in a jackpot in the special pattern drawing of the first special pattern, or a fluctuation that results in a small jackpot or a jackpot in the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern, is started during a specific game (high base state) after the jackpot ends, a short-term fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), such as one second, is selected by the fluctuation pattern drawing, and the jackpot game (small jackpot V) is executed immediately after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, in a specific game (high base state), if a variable display (miss variable) is started in which the result of the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is a "miss," a long-term variable pattern (variation time), for example 100 seconds, is determined by the variable pattern lottery, and the high base state continues for a period of approximately 100 seconds until the variable display of the first special pattern stops and ends.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has a main gameplay (game characteristics) for acquiring a large number of game balls in a specific game, in which a game ball is fired at the actuation port P741 during the period during which the first special symbol miss variation is being executed in the specific game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "specific period"), thereby opening the normal electric device 770 provided in the second start winning port P721 by a normal symbol lottery, and by causing the game ball to win the second start winning port P721, the right to a big win game (small win V) is accumulated during the specific period of 100 seconds.

Here, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of a "win" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the time of one cycle of the normal symbol variable display period for one normal symbol lottery (miss), or the normal symbol variable display period for one normal symbol lottery (win) and the normal electric role device operation period is about 5 seconds, so that about 20 normal symbol lotteries can be executed in a specific period of 100 seconds. Note that the operation end condition of the normal electric role device 770 is set to "the passage of a specified opening time" or "the entry of one game ball", and one game ball can enter the second start entry port P721 for one "win" in the normal symbol lottery, i.e., one "win" in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to one right to a big win game (small win V).

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a new special pattern lottery is not executed during the specific period of a specific game, and the occurrence of the right to a big win (small win V) depends on whether the normal pattern lottery during the specific period is a win or not. Therefore, the performance display device P80 displays a picture notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery as a decorative pattern P801, and notifies the player of the occurrence of a state in which the right to a big win (small win V) can be obtained (the open state of the normal electric device 770 provided in the second start winning port P721).

If there are one or more reserved draws for the second special pattern during a specific period (the period during which the first special pattern in a specific game is being played), the special pattern draw for the second special pattern and the big win game (small win V) will be played repeatedly for the number of reserved draws for the second special pattern after the specific period ends.

When all reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that occurred during the specific period are gone and the last big win game (small win V) ends, the variable display related to the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) begins again and the specific period occurs again. If no reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol are obtained during the specific period, the specific game ends and normal play resumes.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, which proceeds as described above, the second special symbol priority consumption control is used, and the reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that occurs during a specific period are continuously consumed, and by continuously executing the jackpot game (small jackpot V), the period for acquiring game balls can be condensed into a short period, which has the effect of making it easier to feel as if a large number of game balls have been acquired.

If the first special symbol priority consumption control or ball entry order consumption control were used, during the period when game balls are shot into the right area P501R in a specific game or a big win game (small win V), a ball enters the first start winning port P711B, and in a situation where a reserved ball related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is reserved, a specific period will occur again and the period until the next big win game (small win V) occurs will be long, and the player may not feel that he or she has won a large number of game balls. Note that this does not deny the possibility of changing to the first special symbol priority consumption control or ball entry order consumption control in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, and if these controls are installed, a specific period can be generated when there is a reserved ball related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern, and there is also the advantage that the period during which games can be played in the specific period will be increased overall, and it will be easier to obtain reserved balls related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern.

So far, we have explained the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which is a pachinko gaming machine that allows the player to expect to win a large number of gaming balls by playing one or more jackpot games based on one or more reserved balls that have been generated during a specific period. Below, we will explain, based on three embodiments, pachinko gaming machine P that further applies the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment to increase its entertainment value.

In addition, in normal normal electric device control, after the operation end condition of the normal electric device 770 is established, an effective extension period is set for detecting the remaining balls inside the electric device. However, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the reservation related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is the right to a big win game (small win V), and since the design intention is to grant the right to one big win game (small win V) for a winning normal pattern lottery in a specific period, it may be configured not to set the effective extension period when the operation end condition of the normal electric device 770 is established (it is particularly preferable to control in this way when the operation of the normal electric device 770 is terminated by the establishment of "one game ball winning", and the effective extension period may be set when "the specified opening time has elapsed").

[Example 2-1]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the first application example (2-1 embodiment) will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, Figure 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big win (small win) pattern of the 2-1 embodiment, Figure 36 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation of the long-time chance state of the 2-1 embodiment, and Figure 37 is a diagram showing an example of the normal electric role release presentation of the 2-1 embodiment.

The feature of the second embodiment is that, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the length of the specific period (the fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after a big win (small win) is made different depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big win (small win) immediately before the specific period occurred.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of generating a reserve related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during the specific period is different, and multiple states can be provided to the player in a specific period with different expectations for consecutive wins (expectations that a specific period will be granted again after a jackpot) and the number of reserves (rights related to the occurrence of a jackpot/small jackpot) generated related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern. This adds variety to the specific game, making it possible to provide a pachinko game machine with high entertainment value.

The details of Example 2-1 are explained below. Note that the game machine's board configuration (placement of the prize-winning device, etc.) will be explained as being the same as in Example 2, but appropriate changes can be made as long as the game described below can be implemented.

(Game Flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of game state) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1st embodiment will be explained.

Normal play (low probability/low base state) is a play state in which the main part of the play is the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and the player shoots the game ball into the play area on the left side of the performance display device P80 (left side area P501L), aiming to get the game ball to enter the first start winning hole P711A and win a jackpot by the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern.

When a jackpot is obtained during normal play (Fig. 34 (A)), a "jackpot (special symbol 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol that executed the jackpot, the player is assigned to either a "short-time chance state" or a "long-time chance state" after the jackpot play (Fig. 34 (B), (E)).

Figure 35 shows the results of the pattern lottery (at the time of a jackpot) in the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern. In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when a jackpot is reached by the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, either "Special pattern 1_jackpot pattern A" or "Special pattern 1_jackpot pattern B" is selected by the pattern lottery. Note that while only two types of patterns are shown in Figure 35, this is a broad classification according to the type of jackpot and the specific game that is executed after the jackpot, and in reality there may be two or more types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device P51.

The "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B" shown in FIG. 35 is a jackpot pattern that will result in a "short-time chance state" being executed as a specific game after a jackpot game, and the "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" is a jackpot pattern that will result in a "long-time chance state" being executed as a specific game after a jackpot game.

Short-term chance state
After a "jackpot (special symbol 1)", when the game transitions to a "short-time chance state", a first special symbol lottery is held based on the reservation for the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first start winning port P711B located in the right-side area P501R when the jackpot game is executed, or based on the reservation for the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol remaining before the jackpot game, and if the first special symbol lottery is a miss, a one-minute chance state (low probability/high base state) occurs as a specific period.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second-first embodiment, in the chance state (low probability/high base state), when the player shoots a game ball into the right area P501R and the game ball passes through the operating port P741, a normal symbol lottery is held. At this time, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed as a normal symbol stop display pattern after the normal symbol is displayed for one minute on the normal symbol display device P53, and if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win", the normal electric role 770 is opened and the ball can enter the second start winning port P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning port P721, after a specific period of time has passed, a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol wins a big win or small win, and the game moves to "small win V/big win (special symbol 2)" (Fig. 34 (D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is a "miss," or when the normal symbol lottery is a "win" but the ball does not enter the second start winning hole P721, the game transitions to "normal play (low probability/low base state)" (Figure 34 (C)).

In the "short-time chance state", one normal symbol lottery is performed during a one-minute chance state (low probability/high base state), which is a specific period, and depending on whether the normal symbol is a hit or not, it is assigned to "small hit V/big hit (special symbol 2)" or "normal play (low probability/low base state)". Note that the hit probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1/3.3, and in the "short-time chance state", the probability of transitioning to "small hit V/big hit (special symbol 2)" is 30% (see "continuation rate" of "special symbol 1_big hit symbol B" in Figure 35).
After the execution of the "small hit V/big hit (special chart 2)", the game transitions to a "long-term chance state" (Figure 34 (G)).

"Long-term chance state"
The "long-term chance state" is a specific game that transitions after a "big win (special symbol 1)" (Fig. 34(E)) or after a "small win V/big win (special symbol 2)" (Fig. 34(G)), and is a specific period during which the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is a miss and the miss variation of the first special symbol is being executed.

The duration of the specific period of the "long-term chance state" varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big win game (small win V) executed immediately before the transition to the "long-term chance state", and the specific period (missing fluctuation of the first special symbol) is executed for a duration of either 5, 6, or 9 minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "Special symbol 1_Big win symbol A" and "Special symbol 2_Big win/small win symbol A", the duration of the specific period is set to 5 minutes, in the case of "Special symbol 2_Big win/small win symbol B", the duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes, and in the case of "Special symbol 2_Big win/small win symbol C", the duration of the specific period is set to 9 minutes.

In the "long-term chance state," as in the "short-term chance state," a normal symbol drawing is performed when a game ball enters the operating port P741 located in the right-side area P501R, and the normal symbol display device P53 displays the normal symbol variations for one minute per normal symbol drawing. In other words, if the specific period in the "long-term chance state" lasts for five minutes, five normal symbol drawings can be performed, and if the specific period lasts for nine minutes, nine normal symbol drawings can be performed.

In the "long-term chance state", if a "win" is obtained in the normal pattern lottery and the game ball can be entered into the second start winning hole P721 based on the opening of the normal electric role device 770, the reserved number related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern will be consumed after the specific period has passed, and the player will win a big win or small win in the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern, and will move to "small win V/big win (special pattern 2)" (Figure 34 (F)). Note that even after the reserved number related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern has occurred, it is possible to receive the normal pattern lottery as long as the specific period continues, and the right to execute a big win or small win can be accumulated (stocked) by the maximum number of reserved numbers related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern.

Although it has been explained that the normal symbol fluctuation time in the "long-term chance state" is one minute, if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric device 770 is activated (opened) after the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, so the normal symbol fluctuation time may be slightly shorter than the losing fluctuation (for example, 55 seconds), and one cycle, including the operation period of the normal electric device 770, may be designed to be completed in about one minute.

When a reservation related to the special pattern drawing of one or more second special patterns occurs in the "long-term chance state", "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)" is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved reservations accumulated (stocked) as the second special pattern in "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)". Note that when "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)" is repeated multiple times, each time it internally transitions to a low probability/high base state similar to the long-term chance state, but the variable display time of the big hit (small hit) based on the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern is set to 1 second, and "small hit V/big hit (special pattern 2)" is resumed immediately after the big hit game (small hit V) ends.

For this reason, for "Small Win V/Big Win (Special Chart 2)", a big win presentation called "STOCK-BONUS" is executed, and big win presentations are executed continuously until there are no more reserved items related to the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern. Even in a situation where the internal state is a "long-term chance state", a presentation for a specific period is not executed, and a presentation is executed to notify the player that big wins (small win V) will occur consecutively.

In the "long-term chance state", if five or nine normal symbol lotteries are performed and all result in a "miss", or if the normal electric device 770 is opened but no ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the game will return to "normal play (low probability/low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, in the "short chance state" or "long chance state", if the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern results in a "jackpot", the variation time is set to 1 second, and a "jackpot (special pattern 1)" is executed without a specific period occurring. In the "long chance state" and "short chance state", if a special pattern lottery for the first or second special pattern results in a jackpot or small jackpot, a specific period of 1 second strictly speaking occurs, during which a normal pattern may be displayed based on the ball entering the operating port P741 or a hold related to the normal pattern lottery.

However, in the pachinko game machine P of the second-first embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win", if the machine is not in a high base state (electric chute support state) at the time when the stop display is made, the normal electric device 770 will not be opened in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole P721, and the possibility of the ball entering the second start winning hole P721 is almost zero. Therefore, even if the normal symbol lottery is a "win" due to the jackpot variation (small jackpot variation) of the first or second special symbol in the "long-term chance state" or "short-term chance state", one minute later, the special symbol has stopped and the jackpot game is being played, so the machine has moved to the low base state, and no new reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol will be generated during the "small jackpot V/jackpot (special symbol 2)" and the win variation period of the special symbol in the "long-term chance state" or "short-term chance state".

In addition, in the "long chance state", if a jackpot is won by the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, the state will transition to "jackpot (special pattern 1)". However, if this jackpot is based on "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern B", the state will transition to the unfavorable "short chance state", and the player may feel that they have suffered a disadvantage. In order to prevent such disadvantages, if "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern B" is won in the "long chance state" or "short chance state", the game state after the "jackpot (special pattern 1)" may be controlled to be the "long chance state" (specific period of 5 minutes).

(Example of a long-term chance state)
36 shows an example of a presentation in the "long chance state" which is the most advantageous game state for the player (the game state in which it is most likely to win a jackpot) in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. In the "long chance state" in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, a "four consecutive battle presentation" is performed (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is executed five times in a row after the start of the "long chance state").

As mentioned above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment allows N normal symbol lottery draws during a specific period (N minutes) during which the first special symbol of a specific game, which is in a low probability/high base state, is fluctuating and losing, and in the "long-term chance state" where the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal symbol presentation is performed for one normal symbol lottery, and the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment executes four "battle presentations" and one "final chance" presentation (a presentation common to the short-term chance state).

The example screen in FIG. 36 shows the state in which the third "battle effect" of the "four consecutive battle effects" is being executed. More specifically, the effect mode display P840 on the top left side of the screen displays the effect mode title "consecutive battles", indicating that this is a "four consecutive battle" effect, and the remaining number of plays display P841 indicates that the third "battle effect" is currently being executed, indirectly suggesting to the player that there are two "battle effects" (including the third) and a "final chance" remaining.

Two reserved objects P811 are displayed in the reserved display area P811 at the bottom right of the screen, indicating that two reserved objects related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern have been acquired.

In the center of the "Battle Presentation" screen, an image of characters facing each other is displayed, and depending on whether the player's character positioned on the right side can defeat the enemy character on the left side, the result of the normal pattern lottery is announced as either a "win" or a "lose."

The simple decoration P802 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the result of the normal pattern lottery is displayed as a decorative pattern in the simple decoration P802. The simple decoration P802 notifies the result of the normal pattern lottery, and since there is a risk that if the number of consecutive numbers is stopped and displayed in the case of a "win", the player may be mistaken into thinking that a jackpot has been won at that point, the simple decoration P802 may be configured to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery of a "win", for example, by displaying a "V" symbol in the center, such as "3V3". Also, during the "4 consecutive battles" performance, the first special pattern is a miss variation, so the result of the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is not notified by a decorative pattern, but the simple decoration P802 for the special pattern lottery may be displayed separately.

Below the simple design diagram P802 of the normal symbol, a right-hit notification P832 is displayed as a hit-differentiating notification P830. In the "long-term chance state" and "short-term chance state", it is necessary to enter the ball into the operating port P741 during the limited time during the display period of the missing variation of the first special symbol to receive the normal symbol lottery. In order to prevent a specific period from passing without receiving the normal symbol lottery the number of times as intended by the design, if control over the variation of the normal symbol or control over the operation of the normal electric role 770 is no longer performed during the display period of the variation of the special symbol, a notification may be issued after a relatively short time of about 3 seconds by switching to a mode that emphasizes the right-hit notification P832, and prompting the player to shoot the game ball into the right-side area P501R and enter the operating port P741.

When the player's character wins in the "battle performance", a "normal electric device release performance" is performed as shown in FIG. 37. In the "normal electric device release performance", an image that imitates the second start winning hole P721 and the character string "aim" are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second start winning hole P721. Since the normal electric device 770 has an end condition of "entering one game ball into the second start winning hole P721" or "the passage of a predetermined operating period", in the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment, in the "normal electric device release performance", an indicator display (recommended firing period display) that roughly corresponds to the operating period of the normal electric device is displayed below the image that imitates the second start winning hole P721, and indicates to the player the period during which the ball can be shot into the second start winning hole P721.

The "normal electric device release performance" may be configured to be performed before the normal electric device 770 is activated, such as during the normal symbol win fluctuation or when the normal symbol win pattern is fixed, taking into account the time from when the game ball is released until it reaches the second start winning port P721.

The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment configured as described above allows the length of the duration of the specific period during which the reserved balls related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern that guarantees a big win (small win V) in a specific game to be acquired to be varied depending on the type of special pattern that will result in a big win (small win V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game, and provides a gaming machine that provides intervals during which a large number of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time, as with the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and provides a specific game in which the expectations for consecutive wins and the expectations for acquiring game balls differ depending on the duration of the specific period, resulting in the effect of providing a pachinko gaming machine that enhances the entertainment value of the specific game.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment)
In the pachinko game machine of the above-mentioned embodiment 2-1, in the "short chance state" and "long chance state", the jackpot fluctuation or small jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is set to one second, so that a specific period does not occur. However, (a) after a jackpot game (small jackpot V) executed with some special pattern types, the jackpot fluctuation time is set so that a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) can occur even in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, or (b) in the fluctuation pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery in the "short chance state" and "long chance state" is a jackpot or small jackpot, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 minutes with a probability of several percent, so that a "special chance state" in which a reservation related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern can be obtained during a jackpot fluctuation (or small jackpot fluctuation) in the "short chance state" or "long chance state" can be separately provided.

In such a "special chance state", if there is a reserved symbol for the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern at the start, the "four consecutive battles presentation" may be resumed as a "recharge chance" while notifying the player that there is a reserved symbol for the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern. Also, if there is no reserved symbol for the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern at the start, if there is no reserved symbol for the second special pattern at the time of the final battle of the "four consecutive battles presentation", the occurrence of a big win (small win V) may be notified as a revival presentation, and if the second special pattern is reserved during the "special chance state", a presentation display may be displayed to add a big win game (small win V) executed in "STOCK-BONUS" after the final battle.

In addition, when the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a big win game (small win V) executed with some of the special pattern types, as another variation, a special battle presentation may be generated as a "STOCK-BONUS" presentation in a big win game (small win V) triggered by the target special pattern type, or in some of the big wins (small wins) that are not the target (false), and the occurrence of the "special chance state" may be notified when a successful mode in which the player's character wins the special battle is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment, it is designed on the assumption that when the specific period continues for N minutes, N normal pattern lotteries (1 minute per lottery) will be executed. However, after the transition to the specific game, the first special pattern starts to change, and then there is a time period until the ball enters the operating port P741 and the normal pattern lottery is executed, or there is a continuous period during the specific period during which the normal pattern change display is not performed, so in consideration of the possibility that the player may not be able to receive the N normal pattern lotteries, the time for the first special pattern to change without a result, which is the specific period, may be set to N minutes + X seconds, or the pattern fixation time after the N-second change display of the first special pattern may be set to X seconds, thereby providing a guaranteed time of "X seconds" so that the player does not lose the right to the normal pattern lottery.

When a guaranteed time is set in this way, after the results of the N regular symbol lottery draws are announced, it becomes necessary to wait for the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" until the big win (small win) game starts, or until the game returns to normal play. During these periods, if a big win (small win) occurs, "Waiting for STOCK-BONUS to be executed" is displayed, and if a game returns to normal play, a "result presentation" is executed to announce the total number of balls won through consecutive wins.

Also, in order for the player to receive N normal symbol lotteries, the system may be configured to warn the player as the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" decreases. As a warning effect, the right hit notification P832 may be changed to an emphasized state, and a warning message such as "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle!!" may be displayed or sounded. The guaranteed time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol (after the start of the specific period) until the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the period during which control of the normal symbol or normal electric device is stopped thereafter. When "X seconds" have elapsed, a new "1 minute" (corresponding to the time for one cycle of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol lottery and the operation of the normal electric device) is set as the guaranteed time, and the same control is repeated.

[Example 2-2]
Next, a second application example (2-2 embodiment) of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 38 to 41. Figure 38 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-2 embodiment, Figure 39 is a diagram showing an example of presentation during chance time in the 2-2 embodiment, Figure 40 is a diagram showing another example of presentation during chance time in the 2-2 embodiment, and Figure 41 is a diagram showing an example of presentation during super chance time in the 2-2 embodiment.

The feature of the second embodiment is that the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is controlled so that, when a predetermined condition (the number of reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is two or more in the second embodiment) is satisfied for the reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during the execution of the "chance time" which is the first specific period (the period during which reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern can be acquired, and may be simply referred to as the "first specific period"), the right to a more favorable state is granted for the next second specific period (a state in which reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern are more likely to be acquired, and may be simply referred to as the "second specific period") than the first specific period. This allows the player to focus on whether or not a transition to a more favorable state is possible depending on the game results during the specific period (the number of reserved symbols acquired related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The details of Example 2-2 are explained below. Note that the game machine's board configuration (placement of the winning device, etc.) will be explained as being the same as in Example 2 and Example 2-1, but appropriate changes are possible as long as they can be used to create the game described below.

(Game Flow)
First, the game flow (transition of game state) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 38. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also adopts the second special symbol priority consumption control, similar to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

Normal play (low probability/low base) is a play state in which a game ball is launched into the left area P501L of the play area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, and the game ball enters the first start winning hole 711A, thereby executing a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, with the aim of winning a "jackpot (special pattern 1)" (Figure 38 (A)).

When a "jackpot (special symbol 1)" is hit, a "chance time" begins (Fig. 38 (B)). The "chance time" is a game state with a low probability/high base state (one electric support), and like the pachinko gaming machines of the second and second-1 embodiments, it is a game state in which a specific period occurs during the period (80 seconds) when the first special symbol is in a miss fluctuation state, during which a reserved lottery for the second special symbol can be acquired.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second-second embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of an 80-second miss fluctuation of the first special symbol. During this time, it is possible to receive a normal symbol lottery (1/9.99 hit probability, 10-second fluctuation time per time) by inserting a game ball into the operating port P741 located in the right area P501R of the game area P501, and by performing 8 normal symbol lotteries during the "chance time", it is a game state in which the aim is to obtain the right to execute "STOCK-BONUS", a small hit V/big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol described later. In other words, during this 80-second specific period, as described above, it is possible to receive 8 normal symbol lotteries with a hit probability of 1/9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time.

In "Chance Time", if you win the normal pattern lottery with a probability of 1/9.99 mentioned above and the game ball lands on P721, which is in the ball-entering easy state, you will get at least one reserved symbol for the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern, and you will again get the right to play "Chance Time" or "Super Chance Time" described below. The probability (continuation rate) of getting the right to play "Chance Time" is 56.9% (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 once in eight tries (80 seconds/variable time 10 seconds)), and the probability of getting the right to play "Super Chance Time" is 19% (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 twice or more in eight tries (80 seconds/variable time 10 seconds)). If you do not get a reserved symbol for the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern in "Chance Time", you will return to normal play (Figure 38 (I)).

After a specific period of time has elapsed in "Chance Time", if there is one reserved symbol related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, the game will move to "STOCK-BONUS" (small win V/big win game based on the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol) (Figure 38 (D)), and after "STOCK-BONUS" ends, the game will move to "Chance Time" (Figure 38 (E)).

In addition, in "Chance Time", if you get two or more reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, you can get the right to execute "Super Chance Time". "Super Chance Time" is a period during which the small win or big win fluctuation of the second special symbol, which started to change when there were two reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, is being executed, and a specific period of 170 seconds occurs during which the fluctuation of the special symbol is displayed. In other words, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as mentioned above, you can receive 17 regular symbol lotteries with a winning probability of 1/9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds each.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second-2 embodiment, it is possible to obtain a reserved number related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern even during the specific period during which the second special pattern is subject to small win or big win fluctuations, which is the execution period of "Super Chance Time." Since "Super Chance Time" (170 seconds) is set to a longer period than the specific period in "Chance Time" (80 seconds), it can be said that there are more regular pattern lotteries that can be executed, and there is a higher possibility of obtaining a reserved number related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern.

In "Super Chance Time", the normal symbol lottery is held about 17 times, and there is an approximately 83.3% chance of winning a reserved lottery for the second special symbol, making it possible to win the right to play "Super Chance Time" again. If a reserved lottery for the second special symbol is not won in "Super Chance Time", the game moves to "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of "Super Chance Time" (Fig. 38(G)). If a reserved lottery for the second special symbol is won, the game moves to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (Fig. 38(F)). After "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" is played, the game returns to "Super Chance Time" (Fig. 38(H)).

The "STOCK-BONUS" that is executed after the "Super Chance Time" is repeated until the reserved number of pieces related to the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern becomes 0 (because the fluctuation related to the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern becomes 1 second, the specific period of 80 seconds does not occur even if the internal state is the same as "Chance Time"), and the "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" that is executed after the "Super Chance Time" is repeated until the reserved number of pieces related to the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern becomes 2 (because the fluctuation related to the special pattern drawing of the second special pattern becomes 1 second, the specific period of 170 seconds does not occur even if the internal state is the same as "Super Chance Time").

If two reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol are acquired during "Chance Time", "Super Chance Time" will start after the 80-second non-fluctuating display based on the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol, which is "Chance Time". In other words, the display period for the second special symbol is determined by the number of reserved symbols, regardless of whether the base state, which is the game state, in other words the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (time-shortening state) is activated or not, and when the second special symbol is selected by the lottery, if there are two reserved symbols, a display period of 170 seconds is selected, and if there are any other reserved symbols, a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the second-2nd embodiment, even if the player is unable to obtain a reserve for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during "Super Chance Time," which is the most advantageous state for the player, "STOCK-BONUS" will be executed once and then "Chance Time" will begin. This creates a two-stage structure from the most advantageous state to the transition to normal play, and even if the most advantageous state, "Super Chance Time," has ended, the player can be made to think that "there is still a chance," resulting in a game flow that can prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

(Example of the performance of the pachinko game machine P according to the second embodiment)
Next, examples of the presentation of "Chance Time" and "Super Chance Time" in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to Figs.

<<Example of Chance Time Presentation of Pachinko Game Machine P of Second-2nd Example>>
FIG. 39 shows an example of the presentation display in the chance time after the "jackpot (special symbol 1)". At the top of the screen, a presentation mode display P840 (the character string "Chance Time") and a remaining number of plays display P841 (the character string "54 seconds left") are displayed. In the pachinko game machine P of the second-second embodiment, since the specific period is the period during which the special symbol is displayed, the "remaining time of change" of the special symbol (or the remaining time until the display of the special symbol is completed and the electric chute support state is completed) is displayed as the remaining number of plays display P841.

A reserve display area P810 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and in the example of Figure 39, there are no reserves related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, so the reserve object P811 (see Figure 36) is not displayed, and the simple reserve display P814 in the center left of the screen also displays the number of reserves related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern as "0."

The bottom left of the screen displays the cumulative number of winnings P824 (displaying "Total_00600pt") and the jackpot icon display P821 (displaying the icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number of winnings), which show the number of winning balls and the number of jackpot games (small jackpot V) in the game at the time displayed in FIG. 39.

The center of the screen shows a state in which "7" symbols with characters are displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right and middle columns as a changing display of decorative symbol P801, and indicates that the left symbol is being displayed changing. Here, decorative symbol P801 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery, and is configured to notify a "win" as the result of the normal symbol lottery by displaying three 7 symbols in a row or other special decorative symbols.

In the example of FIG. 39, the decorative symbol P801 of 1 (the decorative symbol in the left column) is not yet stopped, and "Aim for '7 (image)'" is displayed along with an image that resembles the effect button P381, and by having the player operate the effect button P381, a button effect is executed that notifies the player whether three "7" symbols in the decorative symbol P801 will line up (win) or whether a decorative symbol P801 other than a "7" symbol will be displayed on the left (miss). Note that even if a predetermined time has passed since the effect button was displayed (if the player has not pressed the effect button for the predetermined time), the image that is scheduled to be displayed final, such as a line of 7s or a miss, will be displayed.

In addition, without being limited to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 39, as a presentation for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery during "Chance Time", for example, a presentation using characters (e.g., a battle presentation) may be executed without a variable display of the decorative pattern P801, and a successful state (battle victory) may be displayed to notify that the normal pattern lottery has been won.

Figure 40 is a diagram showing another example of the "Chance Time" presentation of the pachinko game machine P of the second-second embodiment. More specifically, this is an example of a presentation display that is displayed in a situation where one reserved object related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is acquired in the "Chance Time" (in Figure 40, one reserved object P811 is displayed in the reserved display area P810 at the bottom right of the screen), and at least a "STOCK-BONUS" is executed and entry into "Chance Time" again is confirmed, i.e., a consecutive win is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the presentation mode display P840 has switched to "Promotion Chance", and a command-like message saying "Destroy the Seal!!" is displayed below the text "Promotion Chance". A character holding a heavy weapon is displayed in the center of the screen, suggesting that the character's success in "destroying the seal", which is required as a presentation, will result in a notification that the result of the normal pattern lottery will be a win. In other words, in the "Chance Time" situation, the presentation tendency and presentation mode for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery are configured to switch before and after the reservation for the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is obtained.

The reason for switching the presentation mode during "Chance Time" is that in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, if there is no hold for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during the execution of "Chance Time", the player focuses on whether the advantageous state will continue (whether he will be able to gain the right to enter "Chance Time" again), and after a hold for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern occurs, the player becomes interested in whether a hold for the special pattern lottery for a second second special pattern, which is the right to execute "Super Chance Time", will occur, and therefore it is expected that the effect of increasing interest can be achieved by displaying the presentation that is optimal for the different interests of these players.

The example in FIG. 40 shows an example of a presentation using a character holding a heavy weapon, but presentations using other characters may be used, or a different presentation may be used each time a normal pattern lottery is executed to show the result of the normal pattern lottery. Also, even after a reservation is obtained for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, it may be configured to be possible to execute a presentation display that is the same as that before the reservation for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern occurs, as shown in FIG. 39.

Although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 40, if a reserve for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is obtained and the right to play two or more big wins (small wins V) is obtained, the state may be changed to one in which the performance is determined by a different performance tendency and performance mode.

<<Example of Super Chance Time Presentation of Pachinko Game Machine P of Second-2nd Example>>
FIG. 41 shows an example of the Super Chance Time presentation executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, a "Super Chance Time" effect is shown in which the effect display is substantially the same as that of "Chance Time" shown in FIG. 39. The difference is that, in order to celebrate the most favorable controlled situation, the display area of the decorative pattern P801 variable display for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery is changed, and an animation is displayed in the background as an effect image. Note that, in the example of FIG. 41, the background animation is an image that is not related to the result of the normal pattern lottery, but there are cases where a preview image (such as a mini character action or an additional effect display for the decorative pattern P801 variable display) is displayed superimposed on the background animation image to notify the expectation that the decorative pattern P801 variable display will be a winning display and notify the result.

When the number of reserved balls related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern becomes four during the execution of "Super Chance Time", since a ball entering the second start winning port P721 does not result in the acquisition of the right to a new big win game (small win V), the changing display of the decorative pattern P801 for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery may be made non-display or may be changed to be displayed in an even smaller display area. In this way, by reducing the visibility of the changing display of the decorative pattern P801, the visibility of the animation display in the background may be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the second-2 embodiment, the background animation during "Super Chance Time" is configured to display about 10 animations in sequence depending on the number of times (or consecutive times) that Super Chance Time is executed. Then, in a situation where "Super Chance Time" has been executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 or 10 times), if a reserve related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is obtained, a special effect (for example, an effect display related to the animation displayed in the immediately preceding "Super Chance Time") may be executed as the effect of the big win game (small win V) executed in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS".

If the reserved prize for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is not obtained during the specified number of "Super Chance Time", "Chance Time" will start after "STOCK-BONUS". However, if the right to execute "Super Chance Time" is obtained again, the same background animation as the previous specified number of times will be displayed again (divide effect). During the execution of "Super Chance Time" where the divide effect is executed, if the reserved prize for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is not obtained, the background animation during "Super Chance Time" may be configured not to proceed.

In addition to the presentation display mode shown in FIG. 41, during "Super Chance Time", a presentation mode may be executed that draws attention to a preview presentation that notifies the result of a normal pattern lottery, such as "Chance Time" shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, or the player may be allowed to select from a number of presentation modes at their own discretion, such as a presentation mode similar to this "Chance Time" or a presentation mode that is mainly based on the background animation described above.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment)
Next, we will explain modified examples of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. First, as a first modified example, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has two specific periods with different advantageous degrees as a specific period, but a modified example in which the number of specific periods is increased to three or four is conceivable.

More specifically, as a first modified example of the pachinko game machine P of the second-2 embodiment, when determining the variable display related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, it is possible to control the determination of the time (variation pattern) of the variable display related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern so that a specific period (a period during which the reserved number related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern can be acquired) can occur not only when the number of reserved numbers related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is two, but also when the number of reserved numbers related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is three or four.

At this time, the specific period may be configured to be longer the more reserved the number of reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is (for example, a variation pattern of 40 seconds when there are 2 reserved symbols, 50 seconds when there are 3 reserved symbols, and 60 seconds when there are 4 reserved symbols) or, conversely, the specific period may be configured to be shorter when there are more reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is (for example, 100 seconds when there are 2 reserved symbols, 20 seconds when there are 3 reserved symbols, and 10 seconds when there are 4 reserved symbols).

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-2 embodiment)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine P of the second-2nd embodiment, the second specific period (the variable display period of the big win (small win V) based on the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern when there are two reserved pieces related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern) is performed according to a variable pattern (variable time) determined by a variable pattern lottery table which is determined depending on the number of reserved pieces related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern, regardless of the game state (high base state or low base state). However, the second specific period may be configured to be generated according to a variable pattern determined by a variable pattern lottery table which is referenced under the condition that "the number of reserved pieces related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern and the game state are in a high base state."

By configuring it in this way, even if the reserved number for the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern during the first specific period (missing fluctuation of the first special pattern in the high base state) matches the number of conditions for generating the second specific period, the game state will transition to a low base state at the end of the first period, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period will no longer be met, so that it is possible to always transition to a big win game (small win V) after the end of the first specific period, and it is possible to control the second specific period to always be executed after a big win game (small win V).

At this time, in order to acquire the right to execute the second specific period, it is necessary to obtain the condition for generating the second specific period after the execution of a big win game (small win V) during the first specific period plus the reservation for the special pattern lottery of one second special pattern. However, as described above, after the end of the first specific period and the end of the second specific period, a transition to a big win (small win V) is always made, and the start of the first specific period and the second specific period can also be configured to always be after the execution of a big win (small win V), making the transition of the game state easy for the player to understand.

[Example 2-3]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a third application example (2-3 embodiment) will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 43. Figure 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-3 embodiment, and Figure 43 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big win (small win) symbols of the 2-3 embodiment.

The feature of the second-third embodiment is that the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is configured to be in one of a number of high base states (electric support modes) with different control over the normal pattern lottery depending on the type of special symbol (large win symbol, small win symbol) that triggered the execution of the large win game (small win V) immediately before the transition to the specific game (high base state), thereby making it possible to configure the machine to differ in the ease of acquiring the reserved symbol related to the special pattern lottery for the second special symbol during a specific period in the specific game (a period during which the reserved symbol related to the special pattern lottery for the second special symbol can be acquired), thereby increasing the interest of the specific game due to the difference in game performance (control over the normal pattern lottery) during the specific period.

More specifically, in the pachinko game machine P of the second and third embodiments, the types of high base states (electric support modes) with different controls for the normal symbol lottery during a specific period are configured as "electric support mode 1," in which the probability of the normal symbol lottery being a "hit" is 1/1 (100%), and "electric support mode 2," in which the probability of the normal symbol lottery being a "hit" is 1/10 (10%), and further, when controlled to "electric support mode 2," the number of plays maintained in the high base state is configured to be anywhere from 1 to 3.

In other words, when controlled to "Electric Support Mode 1," by playing as intended by the design, the player is guaranteed to obtain the reserve for the special pattern lottery of the four second special patterns, and when controlled to "Electric Support Mode 2," the player is able to play a game in which the player receives the regular pattern lottery in the hope of continuing the specific game (a consecutive game).

The details of Example 2-3 are explained below. Note that the game machine's board configuration (placement of the winning device, etc.) will be explained as being the same as in Example 2, Example 2-1, and Example 2-2, but appropriate changes are possible as long as they can be used to create the game described below.

(Game Flow)
Fig. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of the second-third embodiment. In the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" of Fig. 42, the player aims to acquire the right to execute "jackpot (special pattern 1)" by shooting the game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area P501, making the game ball enter the first start winning hole P711A, and receiving the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern (Fig. 42 (A)).

When the "Big Win (Special Figure 1)" starts, the player shoots a game ball into the right area P501R of the play area P501, causing the game ball to enter the large prize opening P751, and acquires game balls with the prize ball. At this time, as in the second embodiment, the second-first embodiment, and the second-second embodiment, if a ball is shot at the large prize opening P751 during a big win game, a ball will also enter the first start prize opening P711B, and at least one first special symbol will be reserved for the special symbol lottery during the big win game (small win V). After the "Big Win (Special Figure 1)", as shown in FIG. 42, the game moves to "STOCK-TIME 1" (FIG. 42(B)).

"STOCK-TIME 1" is a specific game that is in a low probability/high base state (electric chute support state), and based on the symbol that triggers the execution of a "jackpot (special chart 1)", it controls the state to one of two high base states (electric support modes) with different probabilities of winning the normal symbol lottery, and also controls the number of times that the special symbol changes and is maintained in the high base state if a jackpot game (small jackpot V) is not executed to one of 1 to 3 times, based on the symbol that triggers the execution of a "jackpot (special chart 1)".

A specific example of the game state of "STOCK-TIME1" is shown in FIG. 43. In the allocation of symbols for the big win game (small win V) of the pachinko game machine P of the second-third embodiment shown in FIG. 43, the big win symbols (group) whose "symbol (group)" names are "Special chart 1_Big win symbol A" to "Special chart 1_Big win symbol D" are the big win symbols that will be controlled in "STOCK-TIME1".

Here, the "selection probability" in FIG. 43 indicates the probability that a jackpot pattern included in any of "Special chart 1_jackpot pattern A" to "Special chart 1_jackpot pattern D" will be selected by lottery for the special jackpot pattern, and the "number of electric support times" indicates the number of times the game will be played to maintain the high base state set after each jackpot game of "Special chart 1_jackpot pattern A" to "Special chart 1_jackpot pattern D."

The "normal symbol probability" in Figure 43 indicates the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be a "win" in the specific game (high base state) controlled after "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A" to "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol D". The high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is called "electric support mode 1", and the high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is called "electric support mode 2".

In the pachinko game machine P of the second and third embodiments, the time for a losing variation based on the special pattern drawing of the first special pattern in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the time for a normal pattern variation based on the normal pattern drawing is about 4 seconds per variation. In other words, during one losing variation of the first special pattern in the high base state (electric support state), about seven normal pattern variations are executed, and if the duration of the high base state is such that the special pattern variation display is two or three times, the maximum number of times that the normal pattern drawing can be executed increases to about 14 times or about 21 times.

The "continuation rate" in Figure 43 indicates the probability (expectation) of winning the reserve for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern during a specific period (the total period of losing fluctuations of the first special pattern in a high base state), and indicates that the right to play a specific game (STOCK-TIME2) will be acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In the pachinko game machine P of the second and third embodiments, there are cases where the high base state is maintained multiple times (the number of electric support times is two or three), but if a reservation related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is obtained during the execution of the losing variation of the first special pattern, which is the first or second specific period, the second special pattern priority consumption control will not execute the second or third specific period (losing variation of the first special pattern), and a big win game (small win V) will be executed by the special pattern lottery related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine P of the second-third embodiment, in a specific game controlled to "electric support mode 1," it is possible to obtain four reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern in a short period of time (30 seconds), while in the case of control to "electric support mode 2," even if the number of electric support times increases, the execution of the specific period in which a reserved symbol related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern can be obtained is canceled the moment that the specific period in which a reserved symbol related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern (missing fluctuation of the first special pattern) ends, so obtaining multiple reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is a rare event when controlled to "electric support mode 2."

Returning to FIG. 42, the explanation of the game state (game flow) will be continued. In "STOCK-TIME 1", if a reserved lottery for the special pattern of the second special pattern can be obtained before the specified number of times (electric support number of times) of play based on the jackpot pattern that triggered the execution of "jackpot (special pattern 1)" is played is consumed, "jackpot (special pattern 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (FIG. 42 (C)). On the other hand, in "STOCK-TIME 1", if a reserved lottery for the special pattern of the second special pattern cannot be obtained before the specified number of times (electric support number of times) of play is played by the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, the game returns to "normal play" (FIG. 42 (D)).

The "Big Win (Special Chart 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is controlled to repeatedly play the big win game (small win V) until all reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern acquired in "STOCK-TIME 1" or "STOCK-TIME 2" are exhausted, and after the "Big Win (Special Chart 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" corresponding to all reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern are executed, the game moves to "STOCK-TIME 2" (Fig. 42 (E)).

Incidentally, each time a "Big Win (Special Symbol 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed, "STOCK-TIME2" is executed internally, but the big win (small win) fluctuation of the second special symbol based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol ends in a short fluctuation of about 1 second, so no specific period occurs until all reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are gone and a losing fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the normal electric device 770 is not opened in a manner that makes it easy for the ball to enter.

"STOCK-TIME 2" is a specific game to which the game transitions after a big win game (small win V) based on the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern, and has three types of game states as shown in Figure 43. Like "STOCK-TIME 1," "STOCK-TIME 2" is composed of a combination of the types of high base states, "Electric Support Mode 1" and "Electric Support Mode 2," and the number of games (electric support count) to maintain the high base state, and there is no difference in the game mechanism. However, in "STOCK-TIME 2" which is entered after the big win game (small win V) of "Special Chart 2_Big Win/Small Win Pattern A" to "Special Chart 2_Big Win/Small Win Pattern C", the allocation frequency is higher and the game is controlled to "Electric Support Mode 1", where the probability of a normal pattern being a "win" in the normal pattern lottery is 1/1, and there is a high possibility that a "STOCK-BONUS" will be executed for four big win games (small win V), making it a game state in which it is easy to win a large amount of balls in a short period of time.

In addition, even when "STOCK-TIME 2" is in "Electric Support Mode 2" with a normal symbol probability of 1/10, the number of electric support times in the specific game is set to a minimum of 2 times, which is more than the minimum number of electric support times of 1 time when "STOCK-TIME 1" is executed in "Electric Support Mode 2", and the expectation of the continuation (consecutive wins) of the specific game is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME 2", if a reserve is obtained for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, a "Big Hit (Special Pattern 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (Figure 42 (F)), and if a reserve is not obtained for the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern, the game returns to "normal play" (Figure 42 (G)).

(Modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the second and third embodiments)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko game machine P of the second-third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine P of the second-third embodiment, the "electric support mode 1" and the "electric support mode 2" with different "normal symbol probability" that is the probability of "winning" in the normal symbol lottery are described as states in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, but the types of the "electric support mode" are not limited to two, and it is also possible to set "electric support mode 3", "electric support mode 4", etc., which have different "normal symbol probability".

As a method of varying the type of "electric support mode", the type of "normal symbol change time reduction function (normal symbol time reduction)" may be varied rather than the "normal symbol probability", and the change time per change of the normal symbol may be set to 2 seconds per change or 8 seconds per change instead of 4 seconds, or the change time of various normal symbols may be determined so that the average is 4 seconds. By making it possible to execute different "electric support modes" using the "normal symbol time reduction", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed in a specific period can be varied, and the shorter the normal symbol lottery can be executed, the higher the game state that can be expected to have a higher continuation rate. Also, the "electric support mode" may be configured with different specifications by combining the types of "normal symbol probability" and "normal symbol time reduction".

Above, examples 2-1 to 2-3 have been described as application examples of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment. These application examples of the pachinko gaming machine P of examples 2-1 to 2-3 and their variations can be implemented as independent technologies, but they can also be implemented by combining the technologies disclosed in each as appropriate.

In addition, the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment have been described as an embodiment in which a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery is the occurrence of a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting winning port P721, and the acquisition of a reserved symbol related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol. However, as a modified example of the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, it is also possible to configure the modified example as follows so that a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery does not result in the acquisition of a reserved symbol related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol (the right to play a big hit game (small hit V)).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, as an example of a method of implementing a modified example in which a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery does not result in the acquisition of a reservation (the right to play a big hit game (small hit V)) for the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, a method of adopting a board configuration in which a distribution device (such as a movable valve member) that distributes game balls to two flow paths inside the winning device for the normal electric device 770 is provided, one flow path is configured as a flow path that guides game balls to the general winning port P731, and the other is configured as a flow path that guides game balls to the second start winning port P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the allocation device inside the winning device for the normal electric role 770 is changed depending on the winning pattern lottery of the normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery and the type of "electric support mode", etc., to create a state in which the probability of winning in the second start winning port P721 when the normal pattern lottery is a "win" is different. As a specific example, the operation pattern of the allocation device inside the normal electric role 770 and the winning device is set so that the probability of winning in the second start winning port P721 is 100% for "normal pattern_winning pattern A", and the probability of winning in the second start winning port P721 is 50% for "normal pattern_winning pattern B", and the probability of winning in the second start winning port P721 is 10% (or 0%) for "normal pattern_winning pattern C".

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment configured in this manner, if a "win" is won in the normal pattern lottery during the execution of a specific period, a "normal electric device opening performance" is executed, and the player is prompted to insert a game ball into the normal electric device 770. When the player inserts a game ball into the winning device related to the normal electric device 770, regardless of whether the ball has entered the general winning port P731 or the second start winning port P721, a notification is issued to increase the expectation of whether a reservation related to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern has occurred (F The color of the project effect may be stepped up from "blue" ⇒ "green" ⇒ "red" ⇒ "gold" ⇒ "rainbow (confirmation of acquisition of reserved symbols related to the special pattern lottery of four second special symbols)," and the number of reserved symbols acquired related to the special pattern lottery of the second special symbol may be announced as a game result at the end of the specific period (for example, a button effect is executed at the fixed time of the special symbol at the end of the specific period, and "V x ○ symbols" is displayed as the number of reserved symbols acquired related to the special pattern lottery of the second special symbol by pressing the button).

When configured in this way, it is preferable not to display the number of reserved numbers related to the special symbol lottery (display by the reserved number display area P810, simple reserved number display P814). Also, by adopting such a modified example, even if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, a reserved number related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not necessarily occur, so it is possible to send out more situations in which the normal electric device 770 opens, and it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine P that is a modified example of the application example of the second embodiment and that has many changes in presentation by increasing the frequency of winning normal symbol lotteries in a specific period of time.

("Rescue function" which activates the variable time shortening function based on the number of times the special symbol is activated)
The "rescue function" activates the fluctuation time shortening function triggered by the number of times a special pattern is activated; when a variable display of a special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times in a low base state (so-called "normal play"), this function generates a high base state (operation state of the electric chute support function).

More specifically, when a special game is played a predetermined number of times after transitioning to a low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared or after a game end condition is met in a high base state, or after a special game that transitions to a low base state is played), a high base state is generated, making it easier to win a starting winning hole for the normal electric device 770 (starting winning hole for the first special pattern or the starting winning hole for the second special pattern), making it easier to obtain the right to enter a special pattern lottery, and preventing players from consuming excessive game balls.

The "rescue function" may be configured to set multiple play times as a predetermined number of play times, and to make the number of time-saving times granted when the rescue function is activated the first time (the number of play times that maintain the high base state) different from the number of time-saving times granted when the rescue function is activated the second (third) time.

In addition, if the "rescue function" is configured to always activate when a special pattern lottery is executed for a predetermined number of plays, there is a risk that the player may be forced to play excessively depending on the performance of the "rescue function" that is activated. Therefore, the function may be configured to execute a lottery for activating the "rescue function" when a special pattern lottery is executed for a predetermined number of plays, and the "rescue function" may be configured to activate with a 1/2 chance, for example, assuming that the probability of winning the activation of the "rescue function" is 50%.

(Activation of the function to shorten the time for special symbols to change due to the "time-saving symbol")
In the pachinko game machine and the present embodiment, a pachinko game machine P has been described that operates the special symbol variation time shortening function (time shortening function) and the electric chute support function after a jackpot game (special game) is played. The operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function (time shortening function) and the electric chute support function is not limited to only after such a special game is played, but may be configured to start operation when a specific type of special symbol (miss symbol, small win symbol) is displayed stationary, and even if a jackpot game is not played.

For example, in the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "losing" result and the winning pattern lottery (losing pattern lottery) is a "losing pattern with time reduction" which has a 1/800 chance of being won, a high base state (time reduction state, electric chute support state) may be generated which continues until 100 special pattern lotteries have been performed.

In addition, the number of plays to be maintained in the high base state may be varied by providing different types of "time-saving losing symbol", depending on the type of "time-saving losing symbol". For example, the number of plays may be 50 for "time-saving losing symbol A", 100 for "time-saving losing symbol B", and up to 10,000 for "time-saving losing symbol C" (effectively guaranteeing the next big win).

The function for shortening the time it takes for special symbols to change (time-saving function), the "rescue function" related to the electric chute support function, and the "time-saving symbols" can also be applied to the technology disclosed in this embodiment, the second embodiment, and an application example of the second embodiment.

In particular, for this embodiment, the second embodiment, and the second embodiment application example, which employ a small win V as the specification (spec) of the gaming machine, by adopting a function to shorten the time for the special symbol to change (time-saving function), a "rescue function" related to the electric chute support function, and a "time-saving symbol", it becomes possible to create a situation in which it is easy to obtain a reserved ball related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of resulting in a big win game (small win V), even when the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a "big win" during "normal play", and it is expected that the player's consumption of game balls will be more effectively reduced.

[Third Example]
In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment and the second embodiment, the player actually operates the effect button P381 to change the effect content or display new effect content, but the effect using the effect button P381 is not limited to this. In addition, the simple pattern P802 was displayed as a display object showing the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is also possible to configure it to be displayed as a display object to play a role of ensuring visibility to give diversity to the effect in the decorative pattern P801 in addition to such a role. In addition to the playability of the "small hit V" mainly based on the special pattern, it is also possible to apply the playability of the "small hit V" mainly based on the normal pattern, which makes it possible to widen the range of play. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is the third embodiment, and hereinafter, only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

Button effects and automatic operation functions
As described above, an effect that changes the effect content or displays new effect content by operating the effect button P381 is called a button effect. This button effect differs depending on the type, in terms of whether or not an operation prompt image (details will be described later) is displayed, the type of operation, and the type of effect content. This button effect allows the player to guess the probability of winning. In other words, the expectation of winning is configured to differ depending on the effect content changed by the button effect and the type of newly displayed effect content (effect content type).

An operation prompting image is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button P381 or the effect lever P382, and refers to an image in which an image indicating an operation mode (for example, as described above, a "single press" which is an operation mode in which the effect button P381 is operated only once, a "continuous hit" which is an operation mode in which the effect button P381 is pressed multiple times, a "lever operation" which operates the effect lever P382, etc.) is accompanied by an image (for example, an image of text such as "Press!" for "single press" or "hit repeatedly!" for "continuous hits" and "pull the lever!" for "lever operation") indicating the operation mode. Note that when the operation prompting image is displayed, a dedicated sound instructing the operation mode (for example, a sound such as "Press!" for "single press", "hit repeatedly!" for "continuous hits", and "pull the lever!" for "lever operation") may be output at the same time. The presence or absence of a display of an operation prompting image indicates whether the button performance displays an operation prompting image or not, and a button performance that displays an operation prompting image is called a front button performance (also called a first operation performance), and a button performance that does not display an operation prompting image is called a back button performance (also called a second operation performance). A back button performance that does not display an operation prompting image does not display an operation prompting image (and therefore does not output a sound indicating the operation mode described above), but when the performance button P381 or performance lever P382 is operated, the performance content changes or new performance content is displayed.

The operation type is the type of operation mode described above, and is the operation mode of the effect button P381 or the operation mode of the effect lever P382 for changing the effect content or displaying new effect content. In addition to "single press", "repeated hits", and "lever operation", the operation types may include "long press" in which the effect button P381 is continuously pressed, and "long pull of the lever" in which the effect lever P382 is continuously pulled, and the operation prompting image corresponding to such an operation type is an image of a button image with the words "long press!" in the case of "long press" (at this time, the sound "long press!" may be output), and an image of a button image with the words "keep pulling the lever!" in the case of "long pull of the lever" (at this time, the sound "keep pulling the lever!" may be output).

The type of performance content is the type of performance content that is displayed by operating the performance button P381 or the performance lever P382. For a front button performance, the type of performance content differs depending on the type of operation prompt image or operation mode, and for a back button performance, the type of performance content differs depending on other performance content when the back button performance is executed (for example, whether a high expectation reach performance (a development performance that develops after a reach state is formed, a so-called super reach performance) as described above is being executed, whether an image of a specific character is being displayed immediately before the execution of a high expectation reach performance, etc.). The types of performance content in the front button performances include, for example, in the case of a "single press performance" (also called a "single operation performance"), dialogue performances before the reach state is formed and cut-in performances after the reach state is formed (development performance A among the multiple development performances), in the case of a "rapid tap performance" (also called a "rapid tap operation performance"), meter performances before the reach state is formed and enemy annihilation performances after the reach state is formed (development performance B among the multiple development performances), in the case of a "lever operation performance", a blackout performance before the reach state is formed and a role object drop performance after the reach state is formed (development performance C among the multiple development performances). Details of these front button performances will be described later. In addition, as for the type of effect content in the hidden button effect, for example, when a high expectation reach effect (a development effect that develops after the formation of a reach state, a so-called super reach effect) as described above is being executed and the reach effect is development effect D (a reach effect with a lower expectation of a jackpot than development effects A, B, and C, and an effect that has the possibility of developing further from development effect C to any of development effects A to C), the hidden button effect can be pressed repeatedly for 10 seconds while development effect C is being executed (the operation valid period is 10 seconds), and by pressing repeatedly, the color of the title indicating that development effect D is being executed (the title display that is always displayed while development effect D is being executed) changes. The title color change effect changes color (the color of the title lights up with each operation, and as the color lights up, the color of the title can change in the following order: blue → green → red → gold, with the latter color indicating a higher likelihood of a jackpot or progression to development A or development B). The hidden button effect when an image of a specific character is being displayed just before the execution of a reach effect with high expectations, is when the button is pressed once when the specific character smiles (effective operation period is 0.5 seconds), and only if the change that is executing this effect is a jackpot, the word "confirmed" is displayed in rainbow colors.

Specific examples of button effects in the third embodiment are as follows.
(1) Display of dialogue prompt image: Yes (front button display), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Single press. Type of effect: Before the reach state is formed, a character and button image (without the "Push!" display) are displayed, and when the effect button P381 is pressed once, a "speech image with speech bubble" is displayed. The color of the image (color of the speech bubble) increases in the order of blue < green < red < gold.
(2) Display of cut-in operation prompt image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Single press. Type of performance content: During the execution of the development performance A, a button image (with "Push!" displayed) is displayed, and when the performance button P381 is pressed once, a "cut-in of an ally character" is displayed. The colors of the image (cut-in colors) are green < red < gold, in that order, which indicates a high probability of a jackpot. After the cut-in performance, it is announced whether or not there has been a jackpot (for example, if the ally character wins against the enemy character, it is a jackpot, and if they lose, it is a miss).
(3) Display of meter operation prompt image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 5 seconds (operation valid period does not end with button operation, but ends when the meter reaches 20 stages)
Operation type: Continuous tapping. Type of effect: Before the reach state is formed, a 20-level meter and a button image (with the message "Continuous tapping!") are displayed, and when the effect button P381 is repeatedly tapped, a "meter is filling up" display is displayed according to the number of times the button is pressed. The more the meter fills up, the higher the chance of a big win.
(4) Enemy annihilation operation promotion image display: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 7 seconds (operation valid period does not end with button operation)
Operation type: Continuous taps. Type of performance content: During the execution of the development performance B, the display "100 enemies remaining" and a button image (with the display "Continuous taps!") are displayed, and when the performance button P381 is repeatedly tapped, the display "remaining enemy count decreases" is displayed according to the number of times the button is repeatedly tapped. When the remaining enemy count reaches 0, a jackpot is announced.
(5) Display of blackout effect operation prompt image: Yes (front button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Lever operation. Type of performance: Before the reach state is formed, a lever image (with "Pull!" displayed) is displayed, and when the performance lever button P382 is operated, the screen goes dark with a "plink" sound, and then the "large white letters saying 'Super Hot'" are displayed. Although it is not a guaranteed jackpot, it has a relatively high chance of winning compared to the dialogue and meter performances (only when the dialogue and meter performances are gold, the chance of winning is higher with the dialogue and meter performances). If the image shows the word "Confirmed", it means that a jackpot has been confirmed.
(6) Display of the image to promote the falling of the reels: Yes (front button effect), the operation valid period is 3 seconds (the operation valid period ends when the button is pressed)
Operation type: Lever operation Presentation content type: When a lever image (with "Pull!" displayed) is displayed during the execution of the development presentation C, and the presentation lever button P382 is operated, the reel falls only if there is a jackpot, and the presentation display device P80 turns into a rainbow-colored screen. If there is no jackpot, the reel does not fall, and the presentation display device P80 turns into a gray screen. Compared to the cut-in presentation and the enemy annihilation presentation, the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high (there is a higher chance of the reel falling in the reel falling presentation than the friendly character winning after the cut-in presentation, or the remaining enemy count becoming zero in the enemy annihilation presentation, but if the cut-in is gold, the friendly character's victory may be confirmed).

The "rapid tapping effects" such as meter effects, enemy annihilation effects, and title color change effects change based on the player's actual rapid tapping operation, but the "auto rapid tapping" operation mentioned above may also be enabled.

In this way, when executing button effects, effects are generated or changed based on actual player operation, but in the third embodiment, effects can be generated or changed even without player operation, just as if there had been a player operation. Specifically, this is as follows.

In a situation where there are no reserved symbols corresponding to either the first or second special symbol, if a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the first or second special symbol stops changing, the reel will enter a state of waiting for change. In this state of waiting for fluctuation, when the effect button P381 is pressed once, two item screens, "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF", are displayed as shown in FIG. 44. (In other words, in a situation where there are neither reserved symbols corresponding to the first special pattern nor reserved symbols corresponding to the second special pattern, the state is not waiting for fluctuation until a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has stopped, so even if the effect button P381 is pressed once, the two item screens, "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF", are not displayed. However, as a modified example, in a situation where there are neither reserved symbols corresponding to the first special pattern nor reserved symbols corresponding to the second special pattern, the state of waiting for fluctuation may be entered immediately after the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has stopped. In that case, the two item screens, "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF", are displayed by pressing the effect button P381 once immediately after the fluctuation has stopped.) This item screen can be selected by moving the cursor left or right on the cross key. When the cursor is placed on the "Automatic operation function ON" item screen and the effect button P381 is pressed again, the screen changes to "Automatic operation function is ON" as shown in FIG. 45, and the automatic operation function is set. When the cursor is placed on the "Automatic operation function OFF" item screen and the effect button P381 is pressed again, the screen changes to "Automatic operation function is OFF", and the automatic operation function is not set (cancelled). Although not shown, in the variable standby state, the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 continue to be displayed, and even if the "Automatic operation function ON", "Automatic operation function OFF" item screen, and the "Automatic operation function ON" screen are displayed afterwards, the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 continue to be displayed on the rear layer.

With the automatic operation function set, the front button effects are generated or changed at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period, even if the player does not actually operate the buttons, in the same way as if the player had actually operated the buttons. Specifically, when a dialogue effect is executed, a "dialogue image with speech bubble" is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, when a meter effect is executed, a "meter accumulating" display is automatically displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, as if the player had repeatedly hit the buttons at 0.2 second intervals, when an enemy annihilation effect is executed, a "remaining enemy count decreasing" display is automatically displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, as if the player had repeatedly hit the buttons at 0.1 second intervals, when a blackout effect is executed, a "large white letter with the word "super hot" written on it (or a letter with the word "confirmed") is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. In this way, when a front button effect is executed, even if the player does not actually operate the buttons, a display can be generated or changed at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period, in the same way as if the player had actually operated the buttons. Furthermore, if the automatic operation function is not set and there is no actual operation by the player, the "dialogue image with speech bubble" will not be displayed when a dialogue effect is performed, the "meter filling up" will not be displayed when a meter effect is performed, the "number of remaining enemies decreasing" will not be displayed when an enemy is annihilated (however, the process of the decrease is simply not displayed, and the final number displayed will be 1 in the case of a miss and 0 in the case of a jackpot), and the "large white letters with the word 'super hot' written on them" (or the words 'confirmed') will not be displayed when a blackout effect is performed.

Here, the cut-in effect and the drop effect of the gambling device, which are part of the front button effect, and the two types of back button effects are button effects that are not subject to the automatic operation function. In other words, even if the automatic operation function is set, if there is no actual operation by the player, it is not considered that there was an actual operation by the player. However, for the cut-in effect and the two types of back button effects, whether the automatic operation function is set or not, the effect will not occur without actual operation by the player, but for the drop effect of the gambling device, whether the automatic operation function is set or not, if there is no operation by the player, at the timing when the operation effective period expires (i.e., 3 seconds after the operation effective period begins), if there is a jackpot, the gambling device will fall and the effect display device P80 will display a rainbow-colored screen, and if there is no jackpot, the gambling device will not fall and the effect display device P80 will display a gray screen. By configuring it this way, the button effects that occur just before a jackpot is confirmed or that are closely related to the jackpot announcement can give the player the feeling that they are grabbing the jackpot themselves, so we have deliberately not applied an automatic operation function and instead made the occurrence of the effects dependent on the player's operation.

The automatic operation function can be set or not (set or cancel) not only by selecting from two item screens that are displayed by pressing the performance button P381 once in the waiting state for the automatic operation to be performed, but also during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereafter referred to as the symbol change). Specifically, it is as follows.

In a state where the automatic operation function is not set, during a period that is not an operation effective period during the pattern change (a period during which the pattern change is not an operation effective period in the front button performance and the back button performance), the automatic operation function is set by pressing and holding the performance button P381 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (also called "continuous operation" or "continuation of single operation"). In that case, a screen stating "The automatic operation function has been turned ON" as shown in FIG. 45 is displayed during the pattern change, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the change standby state and is displayed at the bottom left instead of the center of the screen. Also, if the automatic operation function is set, when the performance button P381 is pressed once during the pattern change, the setting of the automatic operation function is released (it is also released by pressing the performance button P381 once during the operation effective period of the front button performance). In that case, a screen stating "The automatic operation function has been turned OFF" is displayed during the pattern change, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the change standby state and is displayed at the bottom left instead of the center of the screen. However, in some situations, these settings and settings cannot be set or released.
(1) Situation in which the automatic operation function cannot be set (1-1) When the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function overlaps with the operation valid period of the front button effect before the predetermined time has elapsed (when the operation valid period of the front button effect starts before the predetermined time has elapsed)
(1-2) When the operation valid period of the back button effect overlaps with the time until the predetermined time of pressing and holding the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function is reached (when the operation valid period of the back button effect starts before the predetermined time has elapsed)
(1-3) When the next pattern change after the current pattern change (the pattern change that started when the long press was started) starts before the specified time of pressing and holding the effect button P381 to set the automatic operation function is reached. (2) When the automatic operation function cannot be released. (2-1) When the effect button P381 is pressed once during the operation valid period of the back button effect.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set and cancel the automatic operation setting in an appropriate situation without waiting for the pattern change to stop (more precisely, a state of waiting for change). As a variant, the automatic operation function may be set by starting a long press of the effect button P381 during a valid operation period during the pattern change (a pattern change period during which the operation is valid in the front button effect and the back button effect), when the automatic operation function is not set, and then the long press reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the valid operation period ends. When configured in this manner, in the single press performance of the front button, the effective operation period ends at the time of the single press, so if the performance button P381 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the start of the effective operation period of the single press performance of the front button, the automatic operation function is set when the predetermined time is reached. However, if the performance button P381 is pressed and held after the effective operation period of the repeated press performance begins, the "auto repeated press" operation is performed, but the automatic operation function is not set even if the predetermined time is reached from the start of the long press, and only if the long press continues after the effective operation period ends will the long press after the end of the effective operation period reach the predetermined time. The automatic operation function is set when this occurs (for example, taking the meter effect, which is a rapid-fire effect, as an example, if a long press is started with 4 seconds remaining of the 5-second valid operation period, and the long press is continued, the auto rapid-fire will be executed for the remaining 4 seconds of the valid operation period; however, if the long press is continued even after 2 seconds have passed since the start of the long press, and the long press is continued after the remaining 4 seconds of the valid operation period has passed, and the long press is continued for a further 2 seconds after the remaining 4 seconds of the valid operation period has passed, the automatic operation function will be set 2 seconds after the remaining 4 seconds of the valid operation period has passed). Also, when configured in this way, as a modified example of (1-1), the automatic operation function may be set even if the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a specified time and overlaps with the effective operation period of the front button effect (when the effective operation period of the front button effect starts before the specified time has elapsed), and further, the automatic operation function may be set even if the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a specified time and overlaps with the effective operation period of the back button effect (when the effective operation period of the back button effect starts before the specified time has elapsed).

In the third embodiment, the player can set the automatic operation timing to reflect the player's preferences for the automatic operation function. In other words, it is possible to set even the timing of the appearance or change of the appearance in the front button appearance (the timing at which it is considered that a button operation has occurred) when the automatic operation function is set.

As mentioned above, with the automatic operation function set, for the front button effects, even if the player does not actually operate the display, when a dialogue effect is executed, a "dialogue image with speech bubble" is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period, when a meter effect is executed, a "meter filling up" is automatically displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period as if the player had pressed the button repeatedly at 0.2 second intervals, when an enemy annihilation effect is executed, a "number of remaining enemies decreasing" is automatically displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period as if the player had pressed the button repeatedly at 0.1 second intervals, and when a blackout effect is executed, "large white letters with the word 'super hot' written on them" (or letters reading 'confirmed') is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period, and this automatic operation timing (the timing at which the effect occurs or the effect changes in the front button effect when the automatic operation function is set (the timing at which it is considered that a button operation has occurred)) is referred to as the normal setting state of the automatic operation function. The automatic operation timing change state of the automatic operation function is a state in which the automatic operation timing of the front button effects to which the automatic operation function can be applied (the timing of the effect occurrence or effect change in the front button effects when the automatic operation function is set (the timing at which a button operation is considered to have occurred)) has been changed from the normal setting state of this automatic operation function. Note that this change in automatic operation timing can be set arbitrarily for each of the front button effects to which the automatic operation function can be applied. Specifically, it is as follows.

In a situation where there is no reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped, the game enters a fluctuation standby state. When the performance button P381 is pressed once in this fluctuation standby state, as described above, two item screens, "Automatic operation function ON" and "Automatic operation function OFF", are displayed. By moving the cursor to the "Automatic operation function ON" item screen on this item screen and operating the up arrow key, a setting item screen for automatic operation timing as shown in FIG. 46 is displayed. More specifically, as setting item screens for automatic operation timing, four item screens, "Dialogue occurrence timing", "Meter accumulation start timing", "Enemy annihilation start timing", and "Blackout occurrence timing", are displayed. When these four item screens are displayed, by operating the up, down, left, and right arrow keys to move the cursor to any of the item screens and pressing the performance button P381 once, a dedicated occurrence timing setting screen for setting the occurrence timing of the front button performance corresponding to that item (occurrence timing when the automatic operation function is set) is displayed. Furthermore, "dialogue timing" corresponds to the dialogue effects, "meter accumulation start timing" corresponds to the meter effects, "enemy annihilation start timing" corresponds to the enemy annihilation effects, and "blackout timing" corresponds to the blackout effects.

As shown in FIG. 47, the dedicated screen for setting the timing of "dialogue occurrence timing" displays three screens, "beginning", "midway", and "end". When the cursor is moved to one of the screens by operating the cross key left or right and the effect button P381 is pressed once, the occurrence timing corresponding to that screen is set. Here, "beginning" is the timing immediately after the start of the effective operation period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the effective operation period), "midway" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the effective operation period, and "end" is the timing at the end of the effective operation period (timing 3 seconds after the start of the effective operation period). The same is true for the dedicated screen for setting the timing of "blackout occurrence timing", which can be selected from three screens, "beginning", "midway", and "end". The dedicated screen for setting the timing of "meter accumulation start timing" displays three screens, "beginning", "midway 1", and "midway 2". When the cursor is moved to one of the screens by operating the cross key left or right and the effect button P381 is pressed once, the occurrence timing corresponding to that screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the valid operation period (0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), "midway 1" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period, and "midway 2" is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the valid operation period. On the dedicated screen for setting the occurrence timing of "enemy annihilation start timing", three item screens, "first", "midway 1", and "midway 2", are displayed, so when the cursor is moved to one of the item screens by operating the directional pad left or right and the performance button P381 is pressed once, the occurrence timing corresponding to that item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the valid operation period (0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period), "midway 1" is the timing 2.5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period, and "midway 2" is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

As a variant, this change in automatic operation timing may be set uniformly; for example, the automatic operation timing may be set uniformly in increments of 0.5 seconds between immediately after the start of the valid operation period (0 seconds after the start of the valid operation period) and 2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period, regardless of the type of front button presentation to which the automatic operation function can be applied (can be set to 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, or 2 seconds after the start of the valid operation period).

This configuration allows the player to set the automatic operation timing for each of the multiple types of front button effects at any timing of their choosing, allowing the player to enjoy effects occurring at timings that suit their own preferences.

In addition, in the front button performance, just before the operation prompt image is displayed, an operation prompt prompt performance may be executed, which suggests that the operation prompt image will be displayed soon. Specifically, just before the button image or lever image is displayed, a silhouette image showing the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed in advance, which suggests that the button image or lever image will appear after that (i.e., the operation prompt image will be displayed). When the button image or lever image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute such an operation prompt performance, and the button image or lever image may be displayed immediately without going through the operation prompt performance. Here, the operation prompt performance may have multiple display modes, and when configured in this way, for example, the operation prompt performance with a red effect (the operation prompt performance in which the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed as if it is shining lightly red) may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the operation prompt performance with a blue effect (the operation prompt performance in which the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed as if it is shining lightly blue). In addition, as another modified example, multiple types of button images or lever images may be provided (for example, in the case of button images, blue button images and red button images may be provided, and a high expectation preview performance is more likely to be performed with a red button image than with a blue button image, for example, a red line performance is more likely to be performed than a blue line performance), and a specific button image (for example, a red button image) may be more likely to be displayed with an operation promotion prompting performance accompanied by a red effect than with an operation promotion prompting performance accompanied by a blue effect. In addition to the above, a long-term (for example, 4 seconds) operation promotion prompting performance may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (for example, 2 seconds) operation promotion prompting performance, or a long-term (for example, 4 seconds) operation promotion prompting performance may be configured to be more likely to be displayed with a specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a short-term (for example, 2 seconds) operation promotion prompting performance. In addition, when the display mode of the operation-promoting prompting effect is configured to have multiple types, it may be configured so that an operation-promoting prompting effect with a higher expectation is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the changing display (a specific timing after the reach state is established) than in the first half of the changing display (a specific timing before the reach state is formed), or it may be configured so that an operation-promoting prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the changing display (a specific timing before the reach state is formed), and only in the latter half of the changing display (a specific timing after the reach state is formed). As a further variation, a dialogue display may be executed (a button image may be displayed) even during one or more variable displays (pre-reading variable displays) before the reserved ball that is the subject of the pre-reading display is consumed, and the possibility of an operation-promoting prompting display being executed may be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the reserved ball that is the subject of this pre-reading display is consumed, and the possibility of a high-expectation operation-promoting prompting display being executed may be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the activated reserved ball that is the subject of this pre-reading display is consumed. As another variation, in the case where the operation promotion prompting performance is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach state is formed) (or the operation promotion prompting performance with low expectation is executed instead of the high expectation operation promotion prompting performance), and the operation promotion prompting performance is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach state is established) (or the operation promotion prompting performance with high expectation is executed instead of the low expectation operation promotion prompting performance), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach state is formed in the first half of the variable display and the specific timing after the reach state is formed in the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot may be, or the button image in the specific timing after the reach state is formed in the second half of the variable display may be more likely to be an image with high expectation (for example, a red button image is more likely to be used instead of a blue button image).

"Decorative and simple designs"
The decorative pattern P801 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple pattern P802. The combination of the decorative pattern P801 is composed of three patterns, and in principle, they are stopped one by one after the variable display. The combination of the simple pattern P802 is also composed of three patterns, but the three are stopped simultaneously after the variable display. The combination of the simple pattern P802 is displayed as the same combination of the decorative pattern P801.

During the execution of the development performance, the decorative pattern P801 may be configured to be displayed small (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the decorative pattern P801 may be hidden (alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such a situation, the simple pattern P802 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple pattern P802 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the performance display device P80, and displays a variable manner while the first special pattern or the second special pattern is changing, and displays a stationary manner while the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, and like the decorative pattern P801, the three patterns are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner. By providing this simple pattern P802, it is possible to notify that the decorative pattern P801 is changing (in other words, that the result of winning or losing has not been determined) even in a situation where it is desired to make the decorative pattern P801 small or hidden (for example, when executing a development performance, when a performance using a movable role is performed and the center of the performance display device P80 is hidden, etc.). In other words, this simple pattern P802 can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern P801). When this simple pattern P802 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the variable display is always continued from the start of the first special pattern or the second special pattern until the stop display is performed. In other words, even if the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped midway (for example, when a special decorative pattern P801 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo consecutive performance), it is preferable that the simple pattern P802 is configured not to be temporarily stopped midway (for this reason, a special pattern displaying characters such as "NEXT" is provided for the simple pattern P802, The simple symbol P802 only stops to confirm the winning combination), and further, in order to prevent the player from mistaking a losing variation for a big win, and in order to prevent the player from knowing in advance that a big win is occurring, it is preferable to display the winning combination while maintaining the winning combination that indicates a loss to the player, whether it is a losing variation or a big win variation (for example, if the type of the simple symbol P802 is "1" to "7", the winning combination is displayed as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...).

In addition, when decorative pattern P801 and simple pattern P802 start to change from a situation where they are fixed and stopped, the starting pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the change starts) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the time when they stopped to be fixed, but when simple pattern P802 starts to change from a situation where it is fixed and stopped, the starting pattern combination will be a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time when it stopped to be fixed. For example, when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to change in a situation where both the number combinations related to the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed at "243", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the decorative pattern P801 is "354", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple pattern P802 is fixed to "123". When the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 start to change in a situation where both the number combinations related to the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed at "333", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the decorative pattern P801 is "444", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple pattern P802 is fixed to "123". In addition to this, the simple pattern P802 can have the following characteristics to clearly differentiate its role from the decorative pattern P801. Specifically, they are as follows.

The display area of the decorative pattern P801, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple pattern P802, which is used to guarantee the display (to compensate for the display state of the decorative pattern P801). This is not limited to situations where the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are fixed and stopped, or where the decorative pattern P801 has just formed a ready state (a ready state before the development of a development performance) and the simple pattern P802 is being displayed in a variable manner, but is also preferable in situations where the decorative pattern P801 has become a small pattern during a development performance, etc., and the simple pattern P802 is being displayed in a variable manner.

By setting the display position of the decorative pattern P801 to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, described below, or stage B in normal mode), it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with the decorative pattern P801 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is preferable to display it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Details of the presentation modes in the third embodiment will be described later.

The display mode of the decorative pattern P801 is different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a variety of presentations with the decorative pattern P801 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the decorative pattern P801 is composed only of the decorative pattern P801 of numbers (decorative pattern P801 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the decorative pattern P801 is composed by combining the decorative pattern P801 of numbers with the decorative pattern P801 of an ally character (decorative pattern P801 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is preferable to configure the simple pattern P802 with only the same display mode, for example only the decorative pattern P801 of numbers, regardless of whether the first or second presentation mode is used, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The display area of the decorative pattern P801 can be varied (moved or made a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether it is before the development performance or not, whether the development performance is in progress or not, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the decorative pattern P801. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is preferable to not vary the display area of the simple pattern P802 (does not move or is not made a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern P801 can have a variety of presentations by varying its speed to low, medium, high, or ultra-high depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of the change, in the middle of the change, or about to end, etc.). On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is preferable to not vary the speed of the simple pattern P802 or to reduce the number of stages in which it is varied (e.g., only low and high speed), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. In addition, with regard to the direction of change, it is preferable that the decorative pattern P801 can change not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (enabling change in multiple directions), while the simple pattern P802 can only change from top to bottom. In addition, the decorative pattern P801 may vary from top to bottom in the first presentation mode, but may rotate on the spot and be displayed in a sequential order in the second presentation mode, and the simple pattern P802 may only vary from top to bottom in both the first and second presentation modes.

The decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped (a temporary stop during the change of the first or second special pattern, a temporary stop accompanied by a slight shaking change) before it is fixedly stopped (a stop at the timing when the first or second special pattern stops), and at that time a specific pattern that is a decorative pattern P801 other than a number (for example, a decorative pattern P801 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts the development to an advanced performance) is temporarily stopped, so that the performance of the decorative pattern P801 can be related to other performances. On the other hand, since the simple pattern P802 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the simple pattern P802 or to temporarily stop the specific pattern, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern P801 overlaps with the display area of other preview effects (e.g., dialogue effects, meter effects, etc.), that is, it is displayed in a superimposed manner. This superimposed display is permitted in order to use as much of the area on the performance display device P80 as possible to create a powerful performance, but since the simple pattern P802 plays a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple pattern P802 so that it does not overlap (does not display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview effects. However, in relation to special preview effects that inevitably overlap (e.g., blackout effects displayed on the entire performance display device P80, role-piece drop effects, etc.), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simple pattern P802 higher than the display priority of the special preview effect (set the simple pattern P802 to be displayed in the foreground layer above the special preview effect). In addition, it is desirable to ensure that the right-hit notification image (different from the image displayed during special play, a right-hit notification image dedicated to the high base state displayed during the high base state, but it may be an image common to the image during special play, or may be the right-hit notification P832 described above) is always visible to the player, so it is desirable to design it so that the display area of the simple pattern P802 and the display area of the right-hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in a superimposed manner). However, when the display area of the decorative pattern P801 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the decorative pattern P801 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (display in a superimposed manner), and in that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern P801 lower than the display priority of the right-hit notification image (set so that the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in a rear layer behind the right-hit notification image).

During special play, the decorative pattern P801 may be displayed as a single pattern, not as a combination pattern. For example, if "777" is fixed and a special play is executed, "7" is displayed during the special play, and if "222" is fixed and a special play is executed, "2" is displayed during the special play. This allows the player to recognize which decorative pattern P801 was used to win during special play. As a variation, only decorative patterns P801 corresponding to a jackpot with a high degree of advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during special play. It is desirable that the display area displaying one decorative pattern P801 displayed during special play does not overlap with the other display areas during special play, such as the round display area, the right hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, in other words, does not display in a superimposed manner (however, it may be displayed in a superimposed manner with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has a higher display priority). In addition, it is preferable that the simple pattern P802 is not displayed during special play (because variable display is not performed during special play), but it may be displayed during special play.

In addition to changing (e.g., moving from top to bottom), decorative pattern P801 may also be displayed with a specified action when the change starts, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach state is formed, during a temporary stop, etc. (the action in each situation may be referred to as an action at the start of the change, an action at a temporary stop, an action when a reach state is formed, or a swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "624" at the time of the fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern end. In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any of the movements. In addition, if the reach state is formed and the development performance does not progress (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "212" at the time of the final stop), when the variation starts, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then continue to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then continue to swing, then the left and right patterns rotate to notify that it is a reach, then continue to swing again, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops, and swings a little, then at the final stop timing, all the movements of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are completed (the middle pattern does not rotate). In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any of the movements. In addition, when the display progresses to an extended performance (when the decorative pattern P801 and the simple pattern P802 are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), at the start of the change, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern P801 all expand before the change begins, and then, when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, and then, when the right pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, and then, to notify that it is a reach, the left and right patterns perform a rotating motion, and then the swinging motion continues again, and then, the left pattern and While the right and left patterns are swinging, the middle pattern changes (at this time, the middle pattern is expanding and swinging from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio before are overlapping or have a high overlapping ratio), and then the normal background changes to a reach background to execute the development performance, and when the development performance announces that it is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left, middle, and right patterns continue swinging for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all of the left, middle, and right patterns end their movements (the middle pattern does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simple pattern P802 does not perform any of the movements. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide diversity to the presentation of the decorative pattern P801, while the simple pattern P802 only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern P801, so it is preferable to configure the simple pattern P802 so that it does not perform any particular action, and to avoid unnecessary development and design. In addition, it is possible to configure a specific pattern among the decorative patterns P801 (for example, the middle pattern "7") so that it does not perform a specific action or has a lower probability of performing it compared to other patterns. This specific action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) described above (especially for the middle pattern "7" after the formation of the reach state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of the action in a specific pattern. In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is formed by combining the decorative pattern P801 of a number with the decorative pattern P801 of an ally character (decorative pattern P801 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), the decorative pattern P801 of both the number decorative pattern P801 and the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character perform a swinging motion, but the swinging width (the swinging distance, for example, if swinging up and down, the distance width between the state in which the decorative pattern P801 is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to realize a swinging motion with a sense of dynamism. In such a configuration, the swinging width of the decorative pattern P801 of the number may be made smaller than the swinging width of the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character, or the decorative pattern P801 of the number may not perform a swinging motion, and only the decorative pattern P801 of the ally character may perform a swinging motion.

Here, in the third embodiment, a performance using the decorative pattern P801 can be performed, which is different from the pseudo consecutive performance. At least one of the left, middle, and right patterns in the decorative pattern P801 (for example, the right pattern) is fixed in a temporary stop state from the start of the first special pattern or the second special pattern to the stop display {other patterns (for example, the left and middle patterns) fluctuate or temporarily stop while varying the fluctuating speed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, super high speed, etc. depending on the fluctuating situation from the start of the fluctuating of the first special pattern or the second special pattern to the stop display (that is, as an example, while the left and middle patterns are fluctuating, the right pattern continues to be temporarily stopped from the start of the fluctuating)}. Such a fluctuating of the decorative pattern P801 is called a fixed special fluctuating. When the fixed special variation is performed, the expectation of a big win in the reserved is higher than when the fixed special variation is not performed, or the expectation that the variation in which the fixed special variation is performed is a big win variation is higher. In addition, when the fixed special variation is performed, it is preferable that the simple pattern P802 continues to display the variation from the start of the variation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern until the stop display is performed (it is preferable that the variation speed is not variable, or the number of stages in which it is variable is reduced, and when the first special pattern or the second special pattern is displayed, it is fixed and stopped). Since the decorative pattern P801 is fixed (temporarily stopped) from the start of the variation, it is difficult for the player to know whether the fixed special variation is changing or not, so by always displaying the simple pattern P802, the player can confirm the situation of the variation display. In addition, an experienced player (a player who knows the existence and role of fixed special variations) can sense in advance that the fixed (temporarily stopped) decorative pattern P801 will stop for a certain amount of time, so for example, if the center pattern is a fixed special variation that is fixed (temporarily stopped) at "7," and the right and left patterns form a "7" and a ready state, the player can sense a jackpot in advance.

In the third embodiment, there are multiple types of presentation modes, and each type of presentation is determined as to which type of presentation can be performed. To specifically explain the presentation modes and the content of presentations performed in the presentation modes, for example, "normal mode" and "rush mode" are set as multiple types of presentation modes, and one of the multiple types of presentation modes is alternatively set depending on the game state and the number of times the special pattern is displayed, and a variable presentation corresponding to the set presentation mode is performed. Basically, when the game state is in a normal state (low base state), the "normal mode" is set, and when the game state is in a time-saving state (high base state), the "rush mode" is set. When any of the presentation modes is set, a background image (background image that displays the decorative pattern 61) dedicated to the presentation mode is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variable presentation) that suggests that the presentation mode is being stayed in, and BGM dedicated to the presentation mode is output from the speaker 83. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different from each other for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode the player is currently staying in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "normal mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and the "pre-reading stage". After 20 or more changes or if the development effect is missed, the player will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", and from "Stage C" to "Stage A". If the pre-reading preview effect judgement results in the execution (transition) of the "pre-reading stage", the player will transition from the current stage to the "pre-reading stage" (the execution of the development effect is confirmed at the time of transition to the "pre-reading stage", and if the player hits the jackpot, a double number will be displayed in the "pre-reading stage", and if the player misses, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "pre-reading stage", and the player will return to the stage before the transition to the "pre-reading stage" at the next change). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" and "Prediction Stage" (it is also different from the stage BGM in "Rush Mode"), but in "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss (a miss that does not form a reach state, for example a scattered number such as "351") and the stage BGM starts from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts, and in "Stage B", "Stage C" and "Prediction Stage", even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss, the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) and continues to be output for the next fluctuation (the same is true for "Rush Mode" as well, with continuous output).

Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and the "Pre-reading Stage," but in any stage, when there is a temporary stop in the pseudo consecutive performance (when a specified pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern changing near a specified temporary stop position and then displayed as a temporary stop), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-changing display (a second change after the temporary stop) triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-changing display. Thereafter, when the development progresses to a development performance in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" or "Preview Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were currently in) is switched to the background image of the development performance (and also switches to BGM dedicated to the development performance), and the stage BGM is not output while the development performance is being executed, and when an effect indicating a miss is displayed in the development performance, the background image of each stage is switched back to that of the stage (the background image of the stage displayed before the development performance was developed) within the variable display in which the development performance was executed, but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next variable display begins, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the development performance is not output either (it is silent, or a specific BGM that is different from both the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the development performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a missed reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (end), and even if it is "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (or "Stage A" where this is not the case), if it is a miss via a development performance, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.

In addition, in "rush mode", pseudo consecutive performance is not executed. Here, a special performance that suggests that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed (for example, a continuation line announcement, such as "It will continue!", which confirms the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance from then on, or "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance from then on) is executed, suggesting that a pseudo consecutive performance (re-changing display) will be executed from then on, but this special performance is displayed only in "stage A" and "stage C", and is not displayed in "stage B" and the "preview stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of a pseudo consecutive performance being executed can be detected in advance and a stage where it cannot be detected, and by repeating the stage transition between these stages, a performance that does not tire the player is realized. In "stage A", a special performance with a character A motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special performance with a character B motif is executed. In addition, there is also a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed) which is different from the special effect and confirms that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed thereafter just by its occurrence, and there is also a development confirmation effect (for example, when character D appears, the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed) which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive confirmation effect and confirms that a pseudo consecutive performance will not be performed and will develop into a development performance just by its occurrence. This pseudo consecutive confirmation effect and development confirmation effect can be performed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Prediction Stage". In this way, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo consecutive confirmation effect, and the development confirmation effect, it is possible to diversify the expectation of the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance and the expectation of the development into a development performance. In addition, during one change display, all of the special effects, pseudo consecutive confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in that case, during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. Here, in a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-change display, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect may also be executed during that certain re-change display.

《The gameplay of "Small Win V" based on normal symbols》
In the gaming machine in this embodiment and the second embodiment (including the application example), the gameplay is mainly based on special symbols in the low base state, and the gameplay is mainly based on both special and normal symbols in the high base state, but in the third embodiment, the gameplay is mainly based on normal symbols in both the low base state and the high base state, so that it is not a gameplay that is expected only from the result of the winning/losing lottery performed by the gaming machine (it is not a passive gameplay), but rather it is possible to focus on the operation mode of the normal electric role P770, and to expect a jackpot or visually increase the expectation of a jackpot based on that operation mode. Specifically, it is as follows.

The details will be described later, but the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko game machine that employs the "small win V" like this embodiment. The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment does not have the second special symbol, but only has the first special symbol. The probability of winning a big win or small win in the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is 100%, and "the occurrence of a reservation related to the first special symbol" or "winning the normal symbol lottery and opening the normal electric role P770 provided in the first start winning port P711 and entering the ball" indirectly means the acquisition of the right to play a big win game (including the small win V) (effectively becoming a big win). In the third embodiment, one reservation related to the first special symbol is provided, but four may be provided. Also, as a modified example, it is not necessary to provide a reserve (reserve function) for the first special symbol (in this case, the winning/losing lottery is held when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal electric device P770 installed in the first start winning port P711 is opened and the game ball enters the lottery, but since there is no reserve function, if the winning/losing lottery is held again, the normal symbol lottery must be won again, the normal electric device P770 installed in the first start winning port P711 must be opened, and the game ball must enter the lottery again).

Therefore, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment generates a normal period in which it is difficult to enter the first start winning port P711 related to the acquisition of the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and a special period in which it is easy to enter the first start winning port P711 related to the acquisition of the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a state in which the ease of entering the first start winning port P711 is different without requiring the second start winning port P721, thereby reducing the number of winning ports required while making it appear as if the probability fluctuation function is operating in the small win V.

The following describes an embodiment of a third embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine P that is more entertaining by changing the ease of winning the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern during a special period.

Figure 48 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. An opening is formed in the upper center of the play area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment so that the performance display device P80 can be seen, and a frame member of a center decorative unit (not shown) is attached to the opening to form a partition section inside the play area P501. A specific ball entrance P910 is attached below the performance display device, and a distribution device P900 is provided that distributes game balls that enter the specific ball entrance P910 to either the operation entrance P741 or the exit P790 (not shown). In addition, the first start winning hole P711 (the first start winning hole P711 is a starting winning hole for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern) and the normal electric device P770 are located in the upper left of the game area P501, and the large winning hole P751 is located in the lower left of the game area P501. In other words, in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, there is no need to switch from left hitting to right hitting or right hitting to left hitting, and the game progresses only with left hitting.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs the "small hit V" like this embodiment, and the major difference from this embodiment in terms of playability (game play) is that it does not have a second special symbol, and the probability of a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is 100%.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment also executes a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chute support function (electric support) function after various jackpots (including small jackpots V) in the same way as in this embodiment, but the end condition of the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is "the end of the variable display based on the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern a specified number of times" or "the execution of the jackpot game (small jackpot V)". The specified number is set to one (it is configured so that the high base state can end even if the first special pattern is displayed once). Although not described in detail, other design values (jackpot probability, number of prize balls for various winning holes, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment and are set appropriately according to the game characteristics.

Next, the procedure and progress of the game when playing the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment will be described. First, in the low base state, the player operates the handle P204 and launches a game ball toward the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the performance display device P80. The game ball launched into the left area P501L can enter the specific ball entrance P910, and if the ball enters the specific ball entrance P910, it is distributed by the distribution device P900 to either the operation port P741 or the outlet P790 (not shown). In the third embodiment, one first route toward the operation port P741 and nine routes toward the outlet P790 are provided in the distribution device P900. If the game ball is distributed to the first route and enters (passes) the operation port P741, a normal pattern lottery is executed. In the third embodiment, the probability of a "win" in the normal pattern lottery is set to, for example, 1/1 (100%) in both the low base state and the high base state. However, when a "win" occurs in the normal pattern lottery in the low base state, the variable display period of the normal pattern related to one normal pattern lottery is 120 seconds on average, and the operation period of the normal electric role P770 related to one normal pattern lottery (win) is selected to be 5 seconds at 10% and 0.01 seconds at 90%. The reason why the average variable display period of the normal pattern related to one normal pattern lottery is set to 120 seconds is because the performance display device P80 executes a performance that notifies whether the operation period of the normal electric role P770 related to one normal pattern lottery (win) is 5 seconds or 0.01 seconds during this time (in other words, suggests the expectation that it will be 5 seconds). In addition, whether in the low base state or the high base state, the operation end condition of the normal electric role 770 is set to "the passage of the specified opening time" or "the entry of one game ball". Here, if 5 seconds is selected as the operation period of the normal electric role, it is easy to enter the normal electric role P770, so the player aims to enter the normal electric role P770 and actually enters it to acquire the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern (if 0.05 seconds is selected as the operation period of the normal electric role P770, it is very difficult to enter the normal electric role P770, so the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern cannot be acquired practically). Since the probability of "small hit" or "big hit" in the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern is 100%, if the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern is acquired, it is a small hit V specification, so it is practically guaranteed to be a big hit.

After a big hit (small hit V) from a low base state, there will always be a transition to a high base state (as an alternative, there may be a 50% chance of transitioning to the high base state and a 50% chance of transitioning to the low base state). In the high base state, as in the low base state, the ball is inserted into the specific ball entry port P910, and the aim is for the ball to enter (pass) into the operating port P741 via the distribution device P900. However, in the high base state, if a "hit" is obtained in the normal pattern lottery, the period during which the normal pattern is displayed for one normal pattern lottery is one second on average, and the operating period of the normal electric device P770 for one normal pattern lottery (hit) is 100% selected to be 5 seconds. Therefore, in the high base state, unlike the low base state, the ball entering (passing) into the operating port P741 always makes it easier for the ball to enter the normal electric device P770. Therefore, by the ball entering (passing) into the operating port P741, the player essentially acquires the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and since the probability of a "small hit" or a "big hit" in the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is 100%, a big hit is essentially guaranteed. The reason why the average of the variable display period of the normal pattern related to one normal pattern lottery is set to 1 second is that since the operation period of the normal electric role P770 related to one normal pattern lottery (win) is always 5 seconds, there is no need to execute the performance of informing whether the operation period of the normal electric role P770 related to one normal pattern lottery (win) is 5 seconds or 0.01 seconds (suggesting the expectation of 5 seconds) on the performance display device P80, so that the normal electric role P770 can be immediately switched to the operation. Note that even after a big win (small win V) from the high base state, the high base state is always switched to, so the situation in which the high base state ends and the low base state is when the big win or small win is not won (when the variable display ends as it is) before the variable display based on the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern is terminated the specified number of times (1 time in the third embodiment) in the high base state to which the big win (small win V) is transitioned. In other words, since the high base state continues until the variable display based on the special pattern lottery for the specified number of times (one time in the third embodiment) of the first special pattern in the high base state ends, it is possible to create a gameplay effect in which the ball enters (passes) the operating port P741 from the distribution device P900 before this state ends.

To supplement, if 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the normal electric role P770, the performance display device P80 displays "Aim for the electric chute!" before and after the normal electric role P770 is activated, and if a small win is won, the performance display device P80 displays "Aim for the attacker!" before and after the start of the small win game. As a modified example, it may be configured so that there is no big win, and only small wins (the probability of a "small win" in the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is 100%). As a modified example, after a big win (small win V) from the high base state, it may be configured to transition to the high base state with 80% and transition to the low base state with 20%. In such a configuration, the specified number of times of the first special pattern at which the high base state ends may be 99 times instead of 1 time. In such a configuration, it is preferable not to have a hold function, but if you want to increase the consecutive win performance, there is no problem with having it. In addition, when configuring it, since the specified number of times for the first special pattern is very high, the possibility of the high base state ending with the specified number of times for the first special pattern is low, so the gameplay is not about getting the ball to enter (pass) the operating port P741 from the distribution device P900 before the variable display based on the special pattern lottery for the specified number of times for the first special pattern ends, but rather the important thing is to avoid a big hit (small hit V) that transitions to a 20% low base state.

[Fourth embodiment]
By incorporating the above-mentioned "rescue function," the pachinko gaming machine P (including the base technology) of this embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment can further expand the range of play. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail below, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Note that, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment employs the aforementioned "second special symbol priority consumption control" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)." In the low probability low base state, the game machine transitions to a high probability high base state after the special game ends, and this state continues for up to 100 spins (until the total number of special symbol lotteries related to the first special symbol and the special symbol lotteries related to the second special symbol (total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner) reaches 100). After 100 spins, the game machine transitions to a low probability high base state, but if a jackpot occurs within these 100 spins, the ST number (number of times in the high probability high base state) is reset to 100 after the special game related to the jackpot ends. In the low probability high base state, since the electric chute support function is not activated, the player aims the game ball at the special chart 1 starting hole and shoots it in, and the game proceeds with the winning/losing lottery (and change) for the first special pattern, and in the high probability high base state, since the electric chute support function is activated, the player aims the game ball at the special chart 2 starting hole and shoots it in, and the game proceeds with the winning/losing lottery (and change) for the second special pattern. In addition, when the first special pattern is changing, the second special pattern does not change (even if there is a reserved symbol related to the second special pattern, it waits for the winning/losing lottery and the start of the change), and when the second special pattern is changing, the first special pattern does not change (even if there is a reserved symbol related to the first special pattern, it waits for the winning/losing lottery and the start of the change). In addition, as a modified example, by adopting a "V probability change", it may be configured so that it is possible to transition to not only the high probability high base state but also the low probability high base state after the special game ends. More specifically, by allowing the ball to enter the "specific area P750" during the execution of a special game, the state will transition to a high probability high base state, and by not allowing the ball to enter the "specific area P750", the state will transition to a low probability high base state. In this case, in a special game that is executed when the result of the winning/losing lottery for the first special pattern is a jackpot, there is a special game in which the ball can easily enter the specific area P750 (a special game in which the obstructing member blocking the specific area P750 is driven for a long time to a position where it does not prevent the ball from entering, or a special game in which the first guide position that guides the game ball outside the specific area 750P and the second guide position that guides the game ball into the specific area P750 are arranged in a direction parallel to the first guide position). The ratio of special games in which the ball is easily scored into the specific area P750 and difficult to score into the specific area P750 (special games in which the movable guide member is in the second guide position) to special games in which the ball is difficult to score into the specific area P750 (special games in which the obstructing member blocking the specific area P750 is not activated or is activated for only a very short time) is 50:50, and in the special games that are executed when the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is a jackpot, it is preferable to configure the special games so that (1) the ratio of special game jackpots in which the ball is easily scored into the specific area P750 and difficult to score into the specific area P750 is 80:20, or (2) only special games in which the ball is easily scored into the specific area P750 are included.

In this way, the trigger for entering the high base state in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment is a jackpot (special game), but in addition to that, a "rescue function" is provided, and a trigger for entering the high base state is provided other than after the end of the special game. Specifically, after the high probability high base state ends (after 100 spins have passed since the end of the special game), and after another 599 spins have passed (the next fluctuation after the 699th spin after the end of the special game), that is, at the 700th spin after the end of the special game, the high base state is entered (in other words, when the number of fluctuation displays after the end of the special game reaches 700 times, it can be said that the high base state, which is the "rescue function", is entered, and hereafter, the number of fluctuation displays (700 times in the above example) that enters this high base state is simply referred to as the "start number"). However, the high base state in this "rescue function" is not granted until the high probability state, that is, it transitions to a low probability high base state. In addition, this low probability high base state that is entered from the 700th spin will continue for up to 100 spins (until the total number of special pattern draws for the first special pattern and the special pattern draws for the second special pattern (the total number of variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern) reaches 100), that is, from the 700th spin after the special game ends until the 799th spin (in other words, the number of variable displays during which the high base state, which is the "rescue function", continues can be said to be 100, and hereinafter, the number of variable displays during which this high base state continues (100 in the above example) may be simply referred to as the "continuation number"). From the next variation (from the 800th spin after the special game ends), the game will transition to a low-probability, low-base state (in other words, when the number of variation displays after reaching the above-mentioned specific number reaches 100, the high-base state, which is the "rescue function," will end and the game will transition to a low-base state; hereafter, the number of variation displays at which the high-base state, which is the "rescue function," ends (799 times in the above example) will be referred to as the "ending number"). Naturally, in this low-probability, high-base state, which is the "rescue function," the electric chute support function is activated, so the player will aim at the special chart 2 starting hole and fire the game ball to enter the hole, and the game will proceed with the winning/losing lottery (and variation) for the second special pattern, and in the low-probability, low-base state to which the game transitions thereafter, the electric chute support function is not activated, so the player will aim at the special chart 1 starting hole and fire the game ball to enter the hole, and the game will proceed with the winning/losing lottery (and variation) for the first special pattern. Please note that in the following description, "XXXth spin" refers to the number of spins counted from the end of the special game.

Figure 49 shows the presentation pattern (presentation content displayed on the presentation display device P80) relating to the state immediately before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function." Note that in Figure 49(a), which is the 699th spin, which is the state immediately before the occurrence of the "rescue function," there is at least one reserved symbol related to the first special symbol (or there is one reserved symbol related to the second special symbol).

Figure 49 (a) shows the situation where the fluctuation has stopped on the 699th spin (one spin before the start of the high base state (the occurrence of the "rescue function")). Note that the symbol fixation time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing immediately after the fluctuation has ended). On the 699th spin, the first special symbol has stopped fluctuating and is stopped, and the decorative symbol is displayed as still. In this situation, even before the 699th spin is reached (for example, from the 697th or 698th spin), the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and a mountain background is displayed behind the decorative symbol. This halt in fluctuation (or, more precisely, the lapse of the symbol fixation time after the fluctuation has stopped) triggers a transition from the low probability low base state to the low probability high base state.

Figure 49 (b) shows the situation where the 700th spin (the start number of times to enter the high base state (the occurrence of the "rescue function")) fluctuation has started and the situation during the fluctuation. From the situation in Figure 49 (a), the reservation of the first special symbol is consumed, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started for the 700th spin. More precisely, it is the situation where the 700th spin fluctuation, which is the fluctuation of the new first special symbol, has started after the pattern fixation time for the 699th spin has passed. Here, at the start of the fluctuation (or immediately before the fluctuation starts), the word "Right hit" (hit distinction notification A) is displayed in small letters in the upper right corner of the screen. Then, after that (or at the same timing), the mountain background, which is the background of the performance mode (performance stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state, becomes hidden, and instead a stage change performance indicating a transition to a low probability high base state occurs. This stage change performance is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately goes dark from the mountain background that was displayed until then, and the white letters "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. At approximately the same time when the background for the stage change is displayed, the speaker 83 outputs a voice saying "Enter SEVEN RUSH!". This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of a presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to a low probability high base state. In addition, at approximately the same time when the background for the stage change is displayed, the characters "Please hit right" (hit-differentiated notification B) are displayed in a large size. As a modified example, the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" or display large characters saying "Please hit right" after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 2 seconds) since the background for the stage change is displayed, or after the background for the stage change is hidden (in other words, approximately the same time as the display of the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in FIG. 49(c) described later is started). As a variant, the words "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" may be displayed, in which case it is desirable to display them a predetermined time after the background for stage changes is displayed (e.g., 2 seconds) or after the background for stage changes is hidden.

Figure 49 (c) shows the situation during the change on the 700th spin. The background for the stage change on the 700th spin is hidden, and instead an empty background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large "Hit right" letters may be hidden, but it is desirable that they continue to be displayed from the background for the stage change (or that they continue to be displayed until the change stops on the 700th spin, or until the 701st spin begins). Note that, unlike the large "Hit right" letters, the small "Hit right" letters are always displayed during the low probability high base state.

Figure 49(d) shows the situation where the fluctuation of the 799th spin (the number of times when the high base state ("rescue function") ends) has stopped. Note that the pattern fixation time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing just after the fluctuation has ended). As mentioned above, the 700th spin was a fluctuation of the first special pattern, but the 701st to 798th spins (not shown) are already in a high base state (low probability high base state), so the fluctuation of the second special pattern. However, there is no problem if all or part of the 701st to 798th spins are fluctuations of the first special pattern. And the 799th spin is also a fluctuation of the second special pattern. Therefore, Figure 49(d) shows that the fluctuation of the second special pattern has ended as the 799th spin. At this time, the text "SEVEN RUSH END..." may be displayed. In FIG. 49, at the 799th spin just before the end of the "rescue function" in FIG. 49(d), there is at least one reserved symbol related to the second special symbol (or there is one reserved symbol related to the first special symbol). From the 700th to 799th spins, the sky background of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. In this situation where the symbol fixation time has not yet elapsed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

Figure 49 (e) shows the situation when the 800th spin fluctuation started and the situation during the fluctuation. From Figure 49 (d), the reserved second special symbol is consumed, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol has started as the 800th spin. More precisely, the 799th spin symbol fixation time has passed and the 800th spin fluctuation, which is the fluctuation of the new second special symbol, has started. Here, the small "Right Hit" character (hit distinction notification A) that was displayed in the upper right corner of the screen at the start of the fluctuation (or just before the fluctuation started) is hidden. Then, after that (or at the same timing), the sky background that is the background of the performance mode (performance stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state is hidden, and instead a stage change performance indicating a transition to a low probability low base state occurs. This stage performance is the same performance (background) as the stage performance (background for stage change) of the 700th spin. As a variant, the stage presentation (background) at the 700th spin may be different from the 700th spin (background for stage change). For example, the background for stage change may be a white background with the words "STAGE CHANGE" in black. After that, the background for stage change is hidden, and instead, a mountain background corresponding to the low-probability low-base state is displayed. As a variant, the background may be an ocean background instead of a mountain background (which may be different from the background before the "rescue function" occurs), or it may be designed to have a mountain background or an ocean background (which may be configured to have a different background from the background before the "rescue function" occurs). Note that, in order to make it clear that the mountain background (or ocean background) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state at this time is not a "rescue function", it is desirable to configure it so that it always ends within 100 spins, which is the number of times the high-base state ("rescue function") continues, and switches to a background of a different presentation mode (presentation stage) (for example, a grassland background or a space background).

By configuring as described above, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the "rescue function" has occurred, and the resulting change in base state and change in presentation mode (presentation stage) are carried out smoothly, allowing the player to recognize the change in base state without any sense of incongruity in the presentation. In addition, because the type of starting hole the player aims for changes as the base state changes (changing from special chart 1 starting hole to special chart 2 starting hole), the corresponding shot-distinguishing notification is also displayed immediately and continuously for shot-distinguishing notification A, and prominently displayed for shot-distinguishing notification B in conjunction with the stage change, making it possible to appropriately and emphatically notify the player of the shot-distinguishing (aiming for the special chart 2 starting hole) when the base state changes, and to continuously notify the player of the shot-distinguishing (aiming for the special chart 2 starting hole) even in the subsequent high base state, thereby realizing an appropriate shot-distinguishing notification for the player.

In FIG. 49, a situation is described under the assumption that there is a reserve for the first or second special symbol at the timing when the base state switches (the timing when the "rescue function" is activated and the timing when the "rescue function" ends). Next, in FIG. 50, a situation is described in which there is no reserve for the first or second special symbol at the timing when the base state switches (the timing when the "rescue function" is activated and the timing when the "rescue function" ends).

Figure 50 shows the presentation state (presentation content displayed on the presentation display device P80) relating to the state immediately before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function." Note that in Figure 50(a), which is the 699th spin, which is the state immediately before the occurrence of the "rescue function," there are no reserved symbols for at least the first special symbol (there are no reserved symbols for the second special symbol either).

Figure 50(a) shows the situation where the fluctuation has stopped on the 699th spin. Note that the symbol fixation time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing immediately after the fluctuation has ended). On the 699th spin, the first special symbol has stopped fluctuating and is stopped, and the decorative symbol is displayed as still. In this situation, even before the 699th spin is reached (for example, from the 697th or 698th spin), the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed, and a mountain background is displayed behind the decorative symbol. This halt in fluctuation (or, more precisely, the lapse of the symbol fixation time after the fluctuation has stopped) triggers a transition from the low probability low base state to the low probability high base state.

Figure 50(b) shows the situation where the 699th rotation has ended (the symbol fixation time has also elapsed) and the first special symbol and decorative symbol are still displayed. As mentioned above, there are no reserved symbols related to the first special symbol (there are no reserved symbols related to the second special symbol either), so this situation continues. In this situation, the words "Right Hit" (Hit Distinction Notification A) are displayed in small letters in the upper right corner of the screen. The small words "Right Hit" start to be displayed immediately after the 699th rotation has ended and the symbol fixation time has elapsed. Note that the base state at this time has already switched to a high base state, and is in a low probability high base state. However, the mountain background continues to be displayed as the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage).

Figure 50 (c) shows the situation where the 700th rotation fluctuation has started. From the situation of Figure 50 (b), the second special pattern has started to fluctuate due to the ball entering the special pattern 2 starting hole. By starting the fluctuation, the mountain background, which is the background of the performance mode (performance stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state, becomes invisible, and instead a stage change performance indicating a transition to a low probability high base state occurs. This stage change performance is a stage change background in which the screen immediately goes dark from the mountain background that was displayed until then, and the white letters "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. Almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, a sound "SEVEN RUSH ENTER!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the performance mode (performance stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, almost at the same time as this stage change background is displayed, the letters "Please hit right" (hit distinction notification B) are displayed in large. As a modified example, the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" or display large letters saying "Hit right" after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, approximately at the same time as the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in FIG. 50(d) described below starts to be displayed). As a modified example, the letters "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" may be displayed, and in this case, it is desirable to display the letters after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden.

Figure 50 (d) shows the situation during the change at the 700th spin. The background for the stage change at the 700th spin is hidden, and instead an empty background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large letters "Please hit right" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they continue to be displayed from the background for the stage change (or that they continue to be displayed until the change at the 700th spin stops, or until the 701st spin begins). Note that, unlike the large letters "Please hit right", the small letters "Please hit right" are always displayed during the low probability high base state.

Figure 50(e) shows the situation where the fluctuation at the 799th spin has stopped. Note that the pattern fixing time has not yet elapsed (this is the timing immediately after the fluctuation has ended). As mentioned above, the 700th spin was the fluctuation of the first special pattern, but the 701st to 798th spins (not shown) are already in a high base state (low probability high base state), so the fluctuation is of the second special pattern. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the 701st to 798th spins are the fluctuation of the first special pattern. And the 799th spin is also the fluctuation of the second special pattern. Therefore, Figure 50(e) shows that the fluctuation of the second special pattern has ended as the 799th spin. At this time, the text "SEVEN RUSH END..." may be displayed. In FIG. 50, at the 799th spin just before the end of the "rescue function" in FIG. 50(e), there are no reserved symbols related to at least the second special symbol (there are no reserved symbols related to the first special symbol either). From the 700th to the 799th spin, the sky background of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. In this situation where the symbol fixation time has not yet elapsed, the low probability high base state is maintained.

Figure 50 (f) shows the situation where the second special symbol and the decorative symbol are still displayed after the 799th rotation has finished (the symbol fixation time has also passed). As mentioned above, there are no reserved symbols related to the second special symbol (there are no reserved symbols related to the first special symbol either), so this situation continues. In this situation, the small "Right Hit" characters (hit distinction notification A) in the upper right corner of the screen, which had been displayed in the previous high base state, are no longer displayed. The timing when the small "Right Hit" characters end display (are no longer displayed) is immediately after the 799th rotation has finished changing and the symbol fixation time has passed. Note that the base state at this time has already switched to the low base state, and is now in the low probability low base state. However, the sky continues to be displayed as the background of the performance mode (performance stage).

Figure 50 (g) shows the situation where the 800th spin fluctuation has started and the situation during the fluctuation. From the situation in Figure 50 (f), this is the situation where the first special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the ball entering the first starting hole. This is the situation where the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started as the 800th spin by starting the fluctuation. More precisely, this is the situation where the symbol fixing time of the 799th spin has passed and the fluctuation of the 800th spin, which is the new fluctuation of the first special symbol, has started. In this situation, the small "Right Hit" character (hit distinction notification A) that was already displayed in the upper right corner of the screen is not displayed. Then, after that (or at the same timing), the sky background that is the background of the performance mode (performance stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state is not displayed, and instead a stage change performance indicating a transition to a low probability low base state occurs. This stage performance is the same performance (background) as the stage performance of the 700th spin (background for stage change). As a variant, the stage presentation (background) at the 700th spin may be different from the 700th spin (background for stage change). For example, the background for stage change may be a white background with the words "STAGE CHANGE" in black letters. After that, the background for stage change is hidden, and instead a mountain background corresponding to the low-probability, low-base state is displayed. As a variant, the background may be an ocean background instead of a mountain background (which may be different from the background before the "rescue function" occurs), or it may be designed to have a mountain background or an ocean background (which may be configured to have a background that is different from the background before the "rescue function" occurs and a background that is not different). Note that in order to make it clear that the mountain background (or ocean background) corresponding to the low-probability, low-base state at this time is not a "rescue function," it is desirable to configure it so that it always ends within 100 spins and switches to a background for a different presentation mode (stage presentation) (for example, a grassland background or a space background).

As a modified example of the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the "rescue function" ends may be set to the start of the pattern fixing time (or just before the pattern fixing time starts when the fluctuation stops) rather than after the pattern fixing time for the 799th spin has elapsed. In other words, the low probability high base state may be configured to transition to the low probability low base state at the start of the pattern fixing time for the 799th spin (or just before the pattern fixing time starts when the fluctuation stops). If configured in this way, it is desirable that the small "Right hit" letters (hit selection notification A) are hidden at the start of the pattern fixing time (or just before the pattern fixing time starts when the fluctuation stops), and that the small "Right hit" letters (hit selection notification A) are hidden during the pattern fixing time.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, even after the special game ends, the game transitions to a high probability high base state, which is a high base state. This high probability high base state continues for 100 spins, so the "high base state for 100 spins" is the same whether it is the high base state after the special game ends or the high base state of the "rescue function" (note that, as a modified example, (1) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the special game ends may be 100 spins and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "rescue function" may be 200 spins instead of 100 spins, or (2) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the special game ends may be 200 spins instead of 100 spins and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "rescue function" may be 100 spins).

In a high base state after the special game ends, the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 100th spin) is configured to be different from the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 1st to 99th spins), and in a high base state of the "rescue function", the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 799th spin) is configured to be the same as the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 700th to 798th spins). The fluctuation pattern table referenced in the high base state of the "rescue function" (e.g., 700th to 799th spins) may be (1) a fluctuation pattern table different from the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., 100th spin) and the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation (e.g., 1st to 99th spins), or (2) the same as the fluctuation pattern referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., 1st to 99th spins). The fluctuation pattern described here is the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol.

Here, the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (for example, the 100th spin) is called "Fluctuation Pattern Table A", the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (for example, the 1st to 99th spins) is called "Fluctuation Pattern Table B", and the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the high base state of the "rescue function" (for example, the 700th to 799th spins) is called "Fluctuation Pattern Table C". With regard to "Fluctuation Pattern Table A", when the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and the reserved symbols are reduced from 4 to 3 as the fluctuation starts, The selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is different between the case where the reserved number of the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, and the reserved number decreases from 1 to 0 due to the reserved consumption associated with the start of the fluctuation), and the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same between the case where the reserved number of the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 4, and the reserved number decreases from 4 to 3 due to the reserved consumption associated with the start of the fluctuation) and the case where the reserved number of the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1, and the reserved number decreases from 1 to 0 due to the reserved consumption associated with the start of the fluctuation). The fluctuation pattern table is simply shown in FIG. 51, and FIG. 51(a) shows the case where the "fluctuation pattern table B" and the "fluctuation pattern table C" are set to different fluctuation pattern tables, and FIG. 51(b) shows the case where the "fluctuation pattern table B" and the "fluctuation pattern table C" are set to the same fluctuation pattern table. Note that the fluctuation patterns described here are the fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol. In addition, when referring to the "Change Pattern Table A," that is, in the final change of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin), the aforementioned "Result Display Presentation" is executed. However, even if it is the same final change of the high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "Result Display Presentation" in the final change of the high base state of the "rescue function" (e.g., the 799th spin).

As a modified example, the high base state after the special game ends may be configured to refer to "variation pattern table B" for all (e.g., 100 spins), and the high base state of the "rescue function" may be configured to refer to "variation pattern table C" for all (e.g., 100 spins), and the pattern fixation time may be set to a long time only for the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin). Specifically, the pattern fixation time is set to 10 seconds only for the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin), and the pattern fixation time is set to 0.5 seconds for other variations of the high base state (all variations of the high base state of the "rescue function" other than the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends). By configuring in this way, the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced, reducing the development burden, while the "result display performance" can be executed with a pattern fixation time of 10 seconds.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the look-ahead performance can be executed in both the low base state and the high base state. However, in the low base state, the look-ahead performance can be executed for the reserved ball related to the first special pattern, but the look-ahead performance is not executed for the reserved ball related to the second special pattern, and in the high base state, the look-ahead performance can be executed for the reserved ball related to the second special pattern, but the look-ahead performance is not executed for the reserved ball related to the first special pattern.

Here, in some situations where the "rescue function" occurs (before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function"), the execution of the look-ahead performance is restricted. This is because, before the occurrence of the "rescue function", the game is in a low base state mainly consisting of games with the first special symbol (win/lose lottery and fluctuation), but after the occurrence of the "rescue function", the game switches to a high base state mainly consisting of games with the second special symbol (win/lose lottery and fluctuation). In other words, the special symbol that can be used to execute the look-ahead performance switches from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. If the reserved number related to the first special symbol that occurred before the occurrence of the "rescue function" is not consumed before the occurrence of the "rescue function", an event occurs in which the look-ahead performance for the reserved number related to the first special symbol is executed even after the occurrence of the "rescue function". In order to prevent this, the game is configured not to execute the look-ahead performance for the reserved number related to the first special symbol even in a low base state from 5 fluctuations before the occurrence of the "rescue function". More specifically, for five fluctuations from the 695th spin to the 699th spin, the pre-reading performance is not executed for the reserved symbols related to the first special symbol. To add, the pre-reading performance is not executed for the reserved symbols related to the first special symbol that occurred during the fluctuations of the 695th spin, the 696th spin, the 697th spin, the 698th spin, and the 699th spin, but the pre-reading performance may be executed for the reserved symbols related to the first special symbol that occurred during the fluctuations before the 695th spin (for example, the fluctuation of the 694th spin). Specifically, when a new reserved symbol related to the third first special symbol occurs during the fluctuation of the 694th spin and a pre-reading performance is executed for the new reserved symbol, the pre-reading performance for the new reserved symbol is executed during the fluctuation of the 695th spin where the new reserved symbol is consumed and the third reserved symbol becomes the second reserved symbol, and the fluctuation of the 696th spin where the new reserved symbol is consumed and the second reserved symbol becomes the first reserved symbol. In other words, the look-ahead effect is executed until a predetermined number of times, which is a number of times of change display that is less than the start number, is reached, and the look-ahead effect is not executed until the start number is reached from this predetermined number, and it can be said that the predetermined number can be set to an appropriate number. Note that the "change" described in this paragraph refers to the change of the first special symbol.

And, for one fluctuation immediately after the occurrence of the "rescue function", the pre-reading performance for the reserved symbol related to the second special symbol is not executed even in the high base state. More specifically, for the 700th spin, the pre-reading performance for the reserved symbol related to the second special symbol is not executed, that is, the pre-reading performance is not executed for the reserved symbol related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation of the 700th spin. Although the pre-reading performance is executed for the reserved symbol related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation from the 701st spin to the 799th spin, as a modified example, during a part of the period before the end of the "rescue function" (for example, from the 796th spin to the 799th spin, or from the 790th spin to the 799th spin, etc.), the pre-reading performance may be executed for the reserved symbol related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation. Also, in the high base state after the special game ends, rather than in the high base state of the "rescue function", the look-ahead performance may be executed from the first variation, that is, the look-ahead performance may be executed for the reserved second special symbol that occurred during the variation of the first variation in the high base state after the special game ends. In addition, when comparing the look-ahead performance in the high base state after the special game ends and the look-ahead performance in the high base state of the "rescue function", one or more of the following characteristics (A) to (F) may be included.
(A) The high base state after the end of a special game is more likely to result in a predictive effect being executed than the high base state of the "rescue function."
(B) The high base state after the special game ends has fewer types of pre-reading effects than the high base state of the "rescue function."
(C) The high base state after the special game ends has a higher expectation of a jackpot when the pre-reading effect is executed than the high base state of the "rescue function."
(D) In a high base state after the end of a special game, the pre-reading effect is less likely to be executed than in the high base state of the "rescue function."
(E) The high base state after the special game ends has a greater number of types of pre-reading effects than the high base state of the "rescue function."
(F) The high base state after the special game ends has a lower expectation of a jackpot when the pre-reading effect is executed than the high base state of the "rescue function."

In the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned "normal symbol probability change" is not adopted, and the probability of activating the normal electric role P770 (probability of hitting the normal symbol) is the same whether in the low base state or the high base state, and the probability is set to 2/3. As a variant, it may be set to 1/1 (probability of winning for sure). However, the above-mentioned "normal symbol time reduction" and "extended opening of the normal electric role" are adopted.

Figure 52 shows the win/loss results, patterns, and variation patterns for the normal pattern lottery in both the low base state and the high base state (including both the high base state after the end of a special game and the high base state of the "rescue function").

Figure 52 (a) shows the winning/losing, patterns, and variation patterns for the normal pattern lottery in the low base state. As mentioned above, the winning probability of the normal pattern in the low base state is set to 2/3. In addition, there are three types of patterns for the normal pattern in the low base state, specifically, winning pattern 1, winning pattern 2, and losing pattern. The winning probability is 1/3 for each (when the normal pattern is a winning pattern with a 2/3 chance, it becomes winning pattern 1 and winning pattern 2 with a 1/2 chance, and when the normal pattern is a losing pattern with a 1/3 chance, it becomes a losing pattern). In the case of winning pattern 1 in the low base state, the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 is one opening for 0.05 seconds, and in the case of winning pattern 2 in the low base state, the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 is one opening for 0.05 seconds. In addition, the number of types of normal pattern fluctuation patterns in a low base state is greater than the number of normal pattern fluctuation patterns in a high base state described below (in other words, the number of types of normal pattern fluctuation display times in a low base state is greater than the number of types of normal pattern fluctuation display times in a high base state), 18 types, specifically, fluctuation patterns 1 to 18, each with a different fluctuation time, and each fluctuation time is 1 to 18 seconds (varying in 1 second increments). The winning probability is 1/18 for each (the selection probability is the same whether the pattern is a winning one or a losing one).

Figure 52 (b) shows the win/loss, patterns, and variation patterns for the normal pattern lottery in the high base state. As mentioned above, the winning probability of normal patterns in the high base state is set to 2/3. Also, there are three types of patterns for normal patterns in the high base state, the same as in the low base state; specifically, there are three types, winning pattern 1, winning pattern 2, and losing pattern, the same as in the low base state. The winning probability is 1/3 for each (if the normal pattern is a winning pattern with a 2/3 chance, it will be winning pattern 1 and winning pattern 2 with a 1/2 chance, and if the normal pattern is a losing pattern with a 1/3 chance, it will be a losing pattern). In the high base state, the opening pattern of the normal electric role P770 when the winning symbol 1 is selected is 3 openings of 1.8 seconds each (with a 0.6 second closure between openings), and when the winning symbol 2 is selected, the opening pattern of the normal electric role P770 is 2 openings of 2.9 seconds each (with a 1 second closure between openings). In addition, there are two types of normal symbol fluctuation patterns in the high base state, specifically, fluctuation patterns 19 to 20, which have different fluctuation times, and the respective fluctuation times are 0.1 seconds and 0.2 seconds. The winning probability is 3/4 for fluctuation pattern 19 and 1/4 for fluctuation pattern 20 (the selection probability does not differ whether the symbol is a winning symbol or a losing symbol).

In this way, by making the winning/losing, pattern, and variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery the same for both the high base state after the special game ends and the high base state of the "rescue function", there is no need to develop a winning/losing, pattern, and variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery exclusive to the high base state after the special game ends, or a winning/losing, pattern, and variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery exclusive to the high base state of the "rescue function", and since there is no "normal symbol probability change" in the first place, there is no need to have a winning probability for the normal symbol for each of the low base state and the high base state. Furthermore, by providing a large number of variation patterns in the low base state where the normal symbol is likely to stop with a winning symbol (in the fourth embodiment, the winning symbol stops 2/3 of the time), it is possible to give randomness to the timing of the normal symbol stopping in the low base state (the timing of opening the normal electric role P770), making it difficult to enter the special symbol 2 starting hole (targeted hit) in the low base state (in other words, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that try to change the second special symbol, which is not the main focus in the low base state).

Here, in the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the time of the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) when a special game is executed is set to 30 seconds. Since the base state during execution of a special game is a low base state, when the normal pattern changes, a change time of up to 18 seconds can be selected. However, because the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) lasts for 30 seconds, even if the player stops firing the game ball after the final round of play just before the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends, by setting this time value, even if the ball enters the normal symbol operation port P741 just before the player stops firing the game ball and the normal symbol starts to change, the normal symbol change ends before the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends, so if the ball enters the normal symbol operation port P741 after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends and transitions to the high base state after the special game ends, the normal symbol change (change of 0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) can immediately start in the high base state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 51, in the high base state after the special game ends, if the number of reserved symbols related to the second special pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (2 to 4 symbols) (for example, 4 symbols and the reserved symbols decrease from 4 to 3 as the number of reserved symbols is consumed at the start of the fluctuation), the shortest time for the second special pattern to fluctuate is 2 seconds, and if the number of reserved symbols related to the second special pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (1 symbol) (for example, 1 symbol and the reserved symbols decrease from 1 to 0 as the number of reserved symbols is consumed at the start of the fluctuation), the shortest time for the second special pattern to fluctuate is 15 seconds. Therefore, in the first four fluctuations in the high base state after the special game ends, if there is no ball entering the special symbol 2 starting hole (if the normal electric device 770 is not opened and the ball cannot enter), the total time of the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 21 seconds, which is "2 seconds + 2 seconds + 2 seconds + 15 seconds", which is "the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 4 to 3 as the reserved symbols are consumed + the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 3 to 2 as the reserved symbols are consumed + the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 2 to 1 as the reserved symbols are consumed + the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 1 to 0 as the reserved symbols are consumed", and this time is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state, which is 18 seconds. Therefore, even if the player stops shooting the game ball just before the end of the special game end demo (jackpot end demo), by setting such a time value, even if the ball enters the normal symbol operation port P741 just before the player stops shooting the game ball and the normal symbol starts to change, the change in the normal symbol ends before the end of the four changes in the second special symbol in the high base state after the special game ends after the special game ends (a situation in which four reservations related to the second special symbol have already occurred after the special game ends) after the special game end demo (jackpot end demo) ends. If the player fires a game ball into the normal symbol operation port P741 after the special game ends and the game transitions to the high base state after the special game ends (finishing demo), the normal symbol fluctuation (fluctuation of 0.1 or 0.2 seconds) in the high base state can be immediately started before all (4) reservations related to the second special symbol are consumed and all (4) fluctuations of the second special symbol are completed, so it is possible to generate a reservation related to the second special symbol before all (4) reservations related to the second special symbol are consumed and all (4) fluctuations of the second special symbol are completed.

[Fifth Example]
In the fourth embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "rescue function" has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "rescue function" is not limited to such a form. Therefore, a pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "rescue function" different from that of the fourth embodiment is set as the fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment (including the differences from the base technology and this embodiment) will be described in detail below, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Note that, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the base technology or the elements described in this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, employs the "parallel control (parallel consumption)" described above. Therefore, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can change at the same time. However, during a change in which the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the lottery for the second special symbol will not be a jackpot, and during a change in which the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the lottery for the first special symbol will not be a jackpot. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured so that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small jackpot with a high probability (for example, 1/2).

Figure 53 shows an example of the layout of the winning devices and other components in the play area of the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment.

In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko game machine P, an opening is formed in the approximate center of the play area P501 so that the performance display device P80 can be seen, and a frame member of a center decorative unit (not shown) is attached to the opening, forming an inner partition of the play area P501.

Below the performance display device P80, there is provided a first start winning port P711A into which game balls flowing down the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80 (left side area P501L) enter, and further below that is provided an outlet P790 (not shown). Also, a general winning port P731 is located in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the performance display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80, it is expected that the ball will enter the first start winning port P711A or the general winning port P731, resulting in a win. On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. 53, the operating port P741, the first start winning port P711B related to the normal electric role P770, the second start winning port 712, and the large winning port P751 are arranged from the top, and the game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 can win a prize (the first start winning port and the second start winning port are also called the special figure 1 starting port and the special figure 2 starting port, respectively). In addition, as a modified example, the normal electric role P770 may be attached to the first start winning port P711A without the first start winning port P711B, or the first start winning port P711B related to the normal electric role P770 may be arranged directly below the first start winning port P711A.

Here, the first start winning port P711A and the first start winning port P711B are the start winning ports for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, and the second start winning port P721 is the start winning port for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, even if the game ball is shot toward either the left area P501L or the right area P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning port P711A and the first start winning port P711B are configured to be able to acquire the right to the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, but since it is difficult for the ball to enter the second start winning port P711B unless the high base state is in place, the game based on the ball entering the first start winning port P711B cannot be substantially progressed (or is difficult to progress) unless a special game is executed or a "rescue function" occurs. The second start winning port P712 is also located in the right game area (right area P501R) like the first start winning port P711B, but unlike the first start winning port P711B, it is not equipped with a normal electric device P770, so whether in the high base state or the low base state, the ball can be entered by shooting it toward the right game area (right area P501R).

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a jackpot in a low probability state is 1/300, the probability of a jackpot in a high probability state is 1/50, and the probability of a small jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted.
(E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special pattern, so in these game states, the first special pattern has a relatively shorter change time than the second special pattern (the average change time of the first special pattern is 20 seconds in the low probability low base state and 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, but the average time of the second special pattern is 10 minutes in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, and high probability high base state).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter change time than the first special symbol (the average change time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds in the high probability low base state, but the average change time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot pattern for the first special pattern, the "10R special jackpot A," which triggers a transition to a high probability low base state in special mode until the next time, is selected with a 10% probability, the "3R special jackpot B," which triggers a transition to a high probability high base state in special mode until the next time, is selected with a 60% probability, and the "3R normal jackpot," which triggers a transition to a low probability high base state for 100 spins, is selected with a 30% probability.
(H) As the jackpot pattern for the second special pattern, the "10R special jackpot A," which triggers a transition to a high probability low base state in special state until the next time, is selected with a 35% probability, the "3R special jackpot B," which triggers a transition to a high probability high base state in special state until the next time, is selected with a 35% probability, and the "3R normal jackpot," which triggers a transition to a low probability high base state for 100 spins, is selected with a 30% probability.
(I) When the second special symbol stops on the small winning symbol, the large winning hole P751 opens for 1.5 seconds, and on average, two game balls can enter (30 game balls can be paid out).

By providing the above features, in the high probability low base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning a "small hit", is high, so small hits can be made to occur frequently in a short period of time in a game mainly based on the second special symbol, and the opening of the large prize winning port P751 (small hit game) based on the small hit win can be used to frequently acquire game balls, so that while waiting for the next big hit, game balls can be increased by small hits. Such specifications are called "small hit rush". On the other hand, in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, and high probability high base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol, which has a high probability of winning a "small hit", is low, so small hits cannot be made to occur frequently in a short period of time, and the game progresses mainly based on the first special symbol rather than the second special symbol. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment has a gameplay that aims to transition to a high probability, low base state using a special game related to the first special game as a trigger in a game that is mainly based on the first special symbol.

The following describes the number of times the "rescue function" occurs (the number of times the low probability high base state occurs) when the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment is equipped with the "rescue function," and the transition of the presentation mode (presentation stage) when the "rescue function" occurs.

Unlike the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured to generate a "rescue function" when the fluctuation starts (the pachinko game machine P in the fourth embodiment is configured to generate a "rescue function" when the fluctuation stops (when the pattern fixing time has elapsed). Specifically, the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment generates a "rescue function" at the start of fluctuation for the 500th spin (when the next fluctuation starts in a situation where the low probability high base state that is transitioned to after the special game related to the "3R normal jackpot" has ended and 100 spins have passed and the state has transitioned to the low probability low base state, and 399 spins have passed from there in the low probability low base state). In addition, it should be noted that the "XXXth spin" described in the following description is the number of spins counted from the end of the special game (the end of the special game related to the "3R normal jackpot").

Figure 54 shows the presentation mode (presentation content displayed on the presentation display device P80) for the state immediately before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function." Note that in Figure 54, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "rescue function" occurs when the fluctuation begins at the 500th spin, so the presentation mode when the "rescue function" occurs does not change depending on whether there is a reserve related to the first special pattern or a reserve related to the second special pattern when the 499th spin stops, which is the state immediately before the "rescue function" occurs.

Figure 54 (a) shows a situation where the first special symbol, which occurs on the 499th spin, has stopped changing. The symbol fixation time has also elapsed. In this situation, even before the 499th spin is reached (for example, from the 497th or 498th spin), the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to a low probability, low base state is displayed, and a mountain background is displayed behind the decorative symbol.

Figure 54 (b) shows the situation where the first special symbol has started to change, which is the change at the 500th spin. From the situation in Figure 54 (a), the reserved first special symbol has been consumed, and the first special symbol has started to change at the 500th spin. By starting the change, a "rescue function" is generated, and the state transitions to a low probability high base state from the start of the change. Here, at the start of the change (or immediately before the start of the change), a "→" symbol indicating an arrow (hit-differentiation notification C) is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (it is displayed smaller than the hit-differentiation notification A described later and is displayed in an inconspicuous manner). Then, after that (or at the same timing), the "rescue function" is generated, that is, the state transitions to a low probability high base state, but the mountain background, which is the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state, is still displayed.

Figure 54 (c) shows the situation where the first special symbol has started to change as the 501st spin. After the first special symbol, which had changed from the situation in Figure 54 (b), has stopped, the reserved first special symbol is consumed, and the first special symbol has started to change as the 501st spin. By starting the change, a stage change effect occurs, which suggests that the background will change to the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state, which is the "SEVEN RUSH" described later. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately goes dark from the mountain background that was displayed until then, and the white letters "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. At the same time as this background for stage change is displayed, a sound "SEVEN RUSH ENTER!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the effect mode (effect stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, at approximately the same time as the background for stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (hit notification C) indicating an arrow is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen, and instead, the characters "hit right" (hit notification A) are displayed in small letters in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, at approximately the same time, the characters "hit right" (hit notification B) are displayed in large letters. As a modified example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, approximately at the same time as the display of the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" begins), the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" or the characters "hit right" may be displayed in large letters. As a modified example, the characters "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" may be displayed, and in that case, it is desirable to display them after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden. If the change on the 501st spin is the change of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and shot selection notifications A and B will not be displayed, and the mountain background and shot selection notification C will continue to be displayed.

Figure 54 (d) shows the situation during the change on the 501st spin. The background for the stage change on the 501st spin is hidden, and instead an empty background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large "hit right" letters may be hidden, but it is desirable that they continue to be displayed from the background for the stage change (or that they continue to be displayed until the change on the 501st spin stops, or until the 502nd spin begins). Note that, unlike the large "hit right" letters, the small "hit right" letters are always displayed during the low probability high base state.

The "rescue function" ends when the specified number of times (the "first number" or "second number" described later in detail) begins to change (whether it is when the first special symbol or the second special symbol begins to change), and during that change the state has already transitioned to a low probability, low base state (the base state changes when the change begins, so the state is already in a low base state during the change), so the presentation mode (presentation stage) shows an empty background, which corresponds to the low probability, high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". However, the words "Right hit" (hit distinction notification A) in the upper right corner of the screen are hidden when the change begins. At this time, the words "SEVEN RUSH ended..." may also be displayed. If the next change after the specified number of changes is the change of the first special symbol, the sky background, which is the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state, becomes invisible as a trigger for the start of the change, and instead a stage change presentation indicating a transition to the low probability low base state occurs (in other words, if the next change after the specified number of changes is the change of the second special symbol, the sky background continues to be displayed, and no stage change presentation occurs). This stage presentation is the same presentation (background) as the stage presentation (background for stage change) of the 501st rotation. As a modified example, the presentation (background) may be different from the stage presentation (background for stage change) of the 501st rotation, for example, a background for stage change with the black letters "STAGE CHANGE" displayed on a white background. After that, the background for stage change becomes invisible, and instead a mountain background, which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state, is displayed. As a variation, the background may be an ocean instead of a mountain (which may be different from the background before the "rescue function" occurs), or it may be designed so that there are times when the background is a mountain and times when it is an ocean (which may be configured to have both different and not different backgrounds from the background before the "rescue function" occurs). Note that in order to make it clear that the background corresponding to the low probability, low base state at this time, the mountain background (or ocean background), is not a "rescue function", so it is desirable to configure it so that it always ends within 100 spins and switches to the background of a different presentation mode (presentation stage) (for example, a grassland background or a space background).

Figure 55 shows the presentation mode (presentation content displayed on the presentation display device P80) for the state immediately before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function." Note that in Figure 55, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "rescue function" occurs when the fluctuation begins at the 500th spin, so the presentation mode when the "rescue function" occurs does not change depending on whether there is a reserve related to the first special pattern or a reserve related to the second special pattern when the 499th spin stops, which is the state immediately before the "rescue function" occurs.

Like FIG. 54, FIG. 55 shows the presentation mode (presentation content displayed on the presentation display device P80) relating to the state immediately before and after the occurrence of the "rescue function." However, unlike FIG. 54, FIG. 55 shows the change at the 500th spin as the change of the second special symbol.

Figure 55(a) shows a situation where the first special symbol, which is the symbol that changes on the 499th spin, has stopped changing. Note that the symbol fixation time has also elapsed. In this situation, even before the 499th spin is reached (for example, from the 497th or 498th spin), the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to a low probability, low base state is displayed, and a mountain background is displayed behind the decorative symbols. However, in regards to Figure 55(a), the situation does not have to be one where the change has stopped, and it may also be in the middle of changing (while the first special symbol is changing).

Figure 55 (b) shows the situation where the second special symbol has started to change, which is the change at the 500th spin. From the situation in Figure 55 (a), the reservation of the second special symbol is consumed, and the second special symbol has started to change as the 501st spin. By starting the change, a "rescue function" is generated, and the state transitions to a low probability high base state from the start of the change. Here, at the start of the change (or just before the change starts), a "→" symbol indicating an arrow (hit-differentiation notification C) is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (it is displayed smaller than the hit-differentiation notification A described later and is displayed in an inconspicuous manner). Then, after that (or at the same timing), the "rescue function" is generated, that is, the state transitions to a low probability high base state, but the mountain background, which is the background of the presentation mode (presentation stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state, is still displayed. As mentioned above, when the first special symbol is stopped at the 499th spin, the second special symbol in FIG. 55(b) is changing independently (it is not changing at the same time as the first special symbol), but when the first special symbol is changing at the 499th spin, the second special symbol in FIG. 55(b) is changing in parallel (changing at the same time as the first special symbol). Also, in FIG. 55(b), the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol is not displayed (only the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed and stopped), but as a modified example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may also be displayed and stopped, and in such a case, it may be displayed small in the lower left corner of the performance display device P80, for example.

Figure 55 (c) shows the situation where the first special symbol has started to change as the 501st spin. When the second special symbol that has changed from the situation in Figure 55 (b) is still changing, the reservation of the first special symbol is consumed, and the first special symbol has started to change as the 501st spin. By starting the change, a stage change effect occurs, which suggests that the background will change to the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low probability high base state that is the "SEVEN RUSH" described later. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately goes dark from the mountain background that was displayed until then, and the white letters "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a black background. At the same time as this background for stage change is displayed, a sound "SEVEN RUSH ENTER!" is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the effect mode (effect stage) corresponding to the low probability high base state. Also, at approximately the same time as the background for stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (hit notification C) indicating an arrow is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen, and instead, the characters "hit right" (hit notification A) are displayed in small letters in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, at approximately the same time, the characters "hit right" (hit notification B) are displayed in large letters. As a modified example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden (in other words, approximately at the same time as the display of the background corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" begins), the speaker 83 may output a voice saying "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" or the characters "hit right" may be displayed in large letters. As a modified example, the characters "Enter SEVEN RUSH!" may be displayed, and in that case, it is desirable to display them after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 2 seconds) since the background for stage change is displayed, or after the background for stage change is hidden. The stage change effect and the display of shot selection notifications A and B (without display of shot selection notification C) caused by the first special symbol starting to change as described above will occur whether the second special symbol is stopped changing or is changing. Note that if the change on the 501st spin is the change of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and shot selection notifications A and B will not be displayed, and the mountain background and shot selection notification C will continue to be displayed.

Figure 55(d) shows the situation during the change on the 501st spin. The background for the stage change on the 501st spin is hidden, and instead an empty background is displayed, which is the background corresponding to the low probability, high base state of "SEVEN RUSH". At this time, the large letters "Hit right" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they continue to be displayed from the background for the stage change (or that they continue to be displayed until the change on the 501st spin stops, or until the 502nd spin begins). Note that, unlike the large letters "Hit right", the small letters "Hit right" are always displayed during the low probability, high base state. Note that the timing when the "rescue function" ends and the display mode of the presentation (presentation transition) are the same as those described above, so they will not be described here.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, even after the special game ends, the machine transitions to a low probability high base state, which is a high base state. This low probability high base state continues for 100 spins. In the high base state after the special game ends, the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state (e.g. the 100th spin) is configured to be different from the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state (e.g. the 1st to 99th spins), and in the high base state of the "rescue function", the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state is configured to be the same as the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the high base state of the "rescue function" may be (1) a fluctuation pattern table different from the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin) and the fluctuation pattern table referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation (e.g., the 1st to 99th spins), or (2) the same as the fluctuation pattern referenced in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 1st to 99th spins).

Here, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (for example, the 100th spin) is called "fluctuation pattern table A", the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the special game ends (for example, the 1st to 99th spins) is called "fluctuation pattern table B", and the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "rescue function" is called "fluctuation pattern table C". With regard to "fluctuation pattern table A", when the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4, and the reserved symbols are reduced from 4 to 3 as the number of reserved symbols is consumed at the start of the fluctuation), and when the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol at the start of the fluctuation is a predetermined number, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the "fluctuation pattern table B" is called "fluctuation pattern table C". The selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is different when the reserved number of the second special symbols at the start is a specific number (for example, when it is 1 and decreases from 1 to 0 due to reserved consumption associated with the start of fluctuation), and for "Fluctuation Pattern Table B" and "Fluctuation Pattern Table C", the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the reserved number of the second special symbols at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, when it is 4 and decreases from 4 to 3 due to reserved consumption associated with the start of fluctuation) and when the reserved number of the second special symbols at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, when it is 1 and decreases from 1 to 0 due to reserved consumption associated with the start of fluctuation). Details of the fluctuation pattern table are shown in FIG. 55, and FIG. 55(a) shows the case where "Fluctuation Pattern Table B" and "Fluctuation Pattern Table C" are set to different fluctuation pattern tables, and FIG. 55(b) shows the case where "Fluctuation Pattern Table B" and "Fluctuation Pattern Table C" are set to the same fluctuation pattern table. When referring to the "Change Pattern Table A," that is, in the final change of the high base state after the special game ends (for example, the 100th spin), the aforementioned "Result Display Presentation" is executed. However, even if it is the same final change of the high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "Result Display Presentation" in the final change of the high base state of the "Rescue Function."

As a variant, the high base state after the special game ends can be configured to refer to "variation pattern table B" for all (e.g., 100 spins), and the high base state of the "rescue function" can be configured to refer to "variation pattern table C" for all, with the pattern fixation time being set to a long time only for the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin). Specifically, the pattern fixation time is set to 10 seconds only for the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends (e.g., the 100th spin), and the pattern fixation time is set to 0.5 seconds for other variations of the high base state (all variations of the high base state of the "rescue function" other than the final variation of the high base state after the special game ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of variation pattern tables and reduce the development burden, while still being able to execute the "result display performance" with a pattern fixation time of 10 seconds.

By configuring as described above, in a pachinko game machine P which employs "parallel control (parallel consumption)" and in which a "rescue function" occurs at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the "rescue function" has occurred, and the resulting changes in the base state and presentation mode (presentation stage) are carried out smoothly, allowing the player to recognize the change in base state without any sense of incongruity in the presentation. In addition, because the type of starting hole that the player aims for changes depending on the change in base state (changing from the first starting winning hole P711A to the first starting winning hole P711B), with regard to the corresponding hit-distinguishing notification, whether the pattern that triggers the change in base state is the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the hit-distinguishing notification C is displayed at the same time as the change in base state but is displayed in an inconspicuous manner, and when the first special pattern starts to change thereafter (when the pattern corresponding to the game progress that is the main part of the high base state starts to change), the hit-distinguishing notification A is displayed immediately and continuously, and the hit-distinguishing notification B is displayed prominently in conjunction with the stage change, so that when the base state changes, it is possible to appropriately and emphatically notify the player about hitting (aiming for the special drawing 2 starting hole), and it is also possible to continuously notify the player about hitting (aiming for the special drawing 2 starting hole) even in the subsequent high base state, thereby realizing an appropriate hit-distinguishing notification for the player.

In addition, the number of times of the "rescue function" in the pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment has a first number of times that targets only the variation of the first special symbol, and a second number of times that targets the total variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, the first number of times is set to 300 times, and the second number of times is set to 759 times. The pachinko game machine P in the fifth embodiment employs "parallel control (parallel consumption)", and both the first start winning hole P711B and the second start winning hole 712 related to the normal electric role P770 are arranged in the play area (right area P501R) on the right side of the performance display device P80, so when the right hand is hit aiming at the first start winning hole P711B in the high base state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter both start winning holes, and further, there is a possibility that the first special symbol and the second special symbol will vary simultaneously during the high base state of the "rescue function". In this case, although it would be desirable to consume the high base state by the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the main factor in the game progress in the high base state, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol intervenes, it is not possible to execute the expected (originally expected) number of fluctuations of the high base state related to the first special symbol (300 times in the fifth embodiment). Therefore, as described above, by setting not only the first number of times but also the second number of times, it is possible to almost certainly guarantee the first number of fluctuations of the first special symbol.

In addition, while the "rescue function" is occurring, a notification effect may be executed to notify the remaining number of times the "rescue function" is used, in which case the effect display device P80 is configured to display "XXX times remaining." This notification effect basically targets the first number of times (for example, if the remaining number of times for the first number is 120, "120 times remaining" is displayed), but if the remaining number of times for the second number is 300 or less, the second number may also be targeted. For example, if the remaining number of times for the first count is 290 (the first special pattern has changed 10 times since the ``rescue function'' occurred, resulting in 290 remaining times) and the remaining number of times for the second count is 100 (for example, the first special pattern has changed 10 times and the second special pattern has changed 649 times since the ``rescue function'' occurred, resulting in 100 remaining times), the first special pattern has only changed 10 times and ``290 remaining'' would normally be displayed, but since the remaining number of times for the second count is 100, ``100 remaining'' is displayed. In other words, if the remaining number of the second number exceeds the remaining number of the first number, the remaining number of the second number becomes the subject of notification in the notification effect, and in that case, while up until that point only the number of times the first special pattern changed was the subject of deduction in the notification effect (each time the first special pattern changed once, the "XXX times remaining" display was deducted by 1), from then on, not only the number of times the first special pattern changed but also the number of times the second special pattern changed is the subject of deduction in the notification effect (each time the first special pattern or second special pattern changed once, the "XXX times remaining" display was deducted by 1).

[Sixth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment to the fifth embodiment, various pachinko gaming machines P with various playability have been described, but the sixth embodiment is an example of a machine in which further improvements have been made to the high base state end condition (time-saving end condition) and a "rescue function" has been incorporated into new playability in order to further improve playability. In the following, only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of the commonalities will be omitted or simplified. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the base technology or elements described in this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

[Example 6-1]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-1 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win,” “small win,” or “lose.”
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (not having a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/50 for the first special pattern and 1/10 for the second special pattern, the number of reserved first special patterns is 4, and the number of reserved second special patterns is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game of the first special symbol and the small win game of the second special symbol are small win games that are easy to V-win in the specific area (there is no small win game that makes V-win difficult). In other words, if the ball enters the big win device P750 during the execution of the small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the big win game (also called a small win V big win or a small win V big win game).
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state.
(G) After a small hit V jackpot of the first special pattern, which is executed by winning a small hit of the first special pattern in the low base state (after special play), the system transitions again to the low base state, but after a small hit V jackpot of the first special pattern, which is executed by winning a small hit of the first special pattern in the high base state (after special play) or after a small hit V jackpot of the second special pattern, which is executed by winning a small hit of the second special pattern (after special play), the system transitions to a high base state for 15 spins (the high base state is maintained at least until the second special pattern has changed 15 times).
(H) After a first special pattern jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot on the first special pattern in a low base state, the game transitions to a high base state for one spin (the high base state is maintained at least until the second special pattern changes once), but after a first special pattern jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot on the first special pattern in a high base state, or after a second special pattern jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot on the second special pattern, the game transitions to a high base state for 15 spins (the high base state is maintained at least until the second special pattern changes 15 times).
(I) A first special pattern jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a jackpot with the first special pattern and a first special pattern small jackpot V jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a small jackpot with the first special pattern are 3R special games, and a second special pattern jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a jackpot with the second special pattern and a second special pattern small jackpot V jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a small jackpot with the second special pattern are 10R special games.
(J) Equipped with a "rescue function", which occurs when the fluctuation stops (when the pattern fixation time has elapsed) for 600 spins after the special game ends (after a small hit V jackpot or jackpot game), and the high base state continues until the 700th spin (note that, as a variant, the "rescue function" may occur when 600 spins have elapsed after the high base state following the special game ends).

With the above features, during the execution of the small win game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning a small win of the first special symbol in the low base state, the player can choose between (1) getting the ball into a specific area to win 3R worth of balls, or (2) deliberately not letting the ball enter the specific area, which means that 3R worth of balls cannot be won, but the player can get closer to the "rescue function" (when a small win V jackpot is won, the execution of the special game resets the occurrence conditions of the "rescue function"; in other words, since the occurrence conditions of the "rescue function" are reset at the 600th spin after the end of the special game, if the ball is not deliberately allowed to enter the specific area, they will not be reset, and the player can get closer to the "rescue function"). As a variant, it may be configured so that the high base state can be won once by getting the ball into a specific area during the execution of the small win game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning a small win of the first special symbol in the low base state. As a further variation, during the execution of the first special pattern small win game, which is executed by winning a small win with the first special pattern in the low base state, no presentation is executed to encourage the player to aim the large win device P750 (aiming at a specific area) and launch the game ball (to leave it to the player's discretion), and during the execution of the second special pattern small win game, which is executed by winning a small win with the second special pattern in the high base state, a presentation is executed to encourage the player to aim the large win device P750 (aiming at a specific area).

[Example 6-2]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-2 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (does not have a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/3, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game is a small win game in which it is easy to V-win in a specific area (it does not have a small win game in which V-win is difficult). In other words, if the ball enters the large win device P750 during the execution of the small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the execution of the large win game (also called a small win V large win or a small win V large win game).
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the probability of a normal symbol winning is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning normal symbol (the operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric device P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the winning symbol, i.e., "one operation of the normal electric device P770" = "executing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric devices P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state, but in either opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric device P770 is forcibly ended by one ball entering the normal electric device P770 (for example, if one ball is detected during the second 1.5-second opening in a 1.5-second x 3 opening, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly ended and the third opening is not performed).
(G) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the game transitions to the high base state, and the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or the normal electric device P770 operates twice (as a variant, the high base state may be configured to be maintained until the second special symbol changes once, or until the normal electric device P770 operates twice, or until the first special symbol changes 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change a total of 10 times).
(H) After a big win game of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a big win of the second special pattern in the low base state, and after a small win V big win of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a small win of the second special pattern in the low base state, the high base state is maintained until the second special pattern changes once or the normal electric device P770 operates 10,000 times (as a variant, the high base state may be configured to be maintained until the second special pattern changes once, or until the normal electric device P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the first special pattern changes 10 times, or until the first special pattern and the second special pattern change a total of 10 times).
(I) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot for the first special symbol in the high base state, after the second special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot for the second special symbol in the high base state, and after the second special symbol small jackpot V jackpot (after special game), which is executed by winning a small jackpot for the second special symbol in the high base state, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times or the normal electric device P770 is operated 10,000 times (as a variant, the high base state may be configured to be maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times, or until the normal electric device P770 is operated 10,000 times, or until the first special symbol changes 99 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change a total of 99 times). However, if three consecutive jackpot games or small V jackpots occur during the high base state, the player will be forced to transition to the low base state after the third jackpot game or small V jackpot ends (if four reserved second special symbols have been accumulated before the third jackpot game or small V jackpot is played, there is a possibility that the player will be able to win another jackpot game or small V jackpot within those four reserved symbols after transitioning to the low base state).

The above features make it possible to limit the number of times the second special pattern can change in the high base state after the first hit (a jackpot game involving the first special pattern in a low base state or a small V jackpot), thereby suppressing the tendency for consecutive wins after the first hit, and also to increase the tendency for consecutive wins after the first hit by relaxing the conditions for ending the high base state in a jackpot game or a small V jackpot during the high base state after the first hit compared to the conditions for ending the high base state after the first hit, thereby realizing a well-balanced gameplay. More specifically, after the first win, the high base state ends when the normal electric device P770 is activated twice, and as described above, the operation of the normal electric device P770 is forcibly terminated by landing one ball on the normal electric device P770. Therefore, after the first win, if the high base state begins with no second special pattern reserved, the second special pattern can only be changed twice (the change in the second special pattern due to the first ball entering the normal electric device P770 after the high base state begins, and the change related to the reservation of the second special pattern due to a ball entering the normal electric device P770 during that change). On the other hand, after the big win game of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a big win of the second special pattern in the low base state, and after the small win V big win of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a small win of the second special pattern in the low base state, the high base state ends when the normal electric device P770 is operated 10,000 times, so it is possible to reserve four second special patterns during the fluctuation caused by the ball first entering the normal electric device P770 after the high base state begins (however, since the high base state ends with the second special pattern fluctuating even once, a total of five fluctuations of the second special pattern are possible, including this first fluctuation and four fluctuations of the four reserved symbols that are consumed after the high base state ends). In addition, after the first special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the high base state, after the second special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning the second special symbol jackpot in the high base state, and after the second special symbol small jackpot V jackpot (after special game), which is executed by winning the second special symbol small jackpot in the high base state, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times or the normal electric role P770 is operated 10,000 times, and since the probability of a small jackpot is 1/3, you can win a small jackpot V jackpot with a fairly high probability during the high base state.

[Example 6-3]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-3 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-3 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (does not have a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/1 (approximately 1/1), the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game is a small win game in which it is easy to V-win in a specific area (it does not have a small win game in which V-win is difficult). In other words, if the ball enters the large win device P750 during the execution of the small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the execution of the large win game (also called a small win V large win or a small win V large win game).
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the probability of a normal symbol winning is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, the winning symbols of the normal symbols are winning symbol A and winning symbol B (selection ratio is 3:1), the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning symbol A and the winning symbol B in the low base state is 0.01 seconds x 1 time, the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning symbol A in the high base state is 0.01 seconds x 1 time, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning symbol B in the high base state is 1.5 seconds x 3, but in either opening pattern, the opening is forcibly ended by the entry of one ball into the normal electric device P770 (for example, if the entry of one ball is detected during the second 1.5-second opening in a 1.5-second x 3 opening, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly ended and the third opening is not performed).
(G) In the low base state or high base state, after a first special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot with the first special symbol, after a second special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, and after a small jackpot V jackpot with the second special symbol (after special game), which is executed by winning a small jackpot with the second special symbol, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or the normal electric device P770 is activated four times (as a variant, the high base state may be configured to be maintained until the second special symbol changes once, or until the normal electric device P770 is activated four times, or until the first special symbol changes ten times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change a total of ten times).

The above features allow for the game to be played based on whether the winning symbol B can be won while the normal electric device P770 is activated four times (in other words, while the normal symbol is won four times) (by winning the winning symbol B, the ball can enter the normal electric device P770, one second special symbol is reserved, and the second special symbol is almost always won as a small hit, so winning the winning symbol B is almost the same as winning a small hit V jackpot). In addition, even if the winning symbol B is won once, if there are still remaining openings of the normal electric device P770, there is a possibility that the winning symbol B can be won again, and if the winning symbol B is won again, the second special symbol will be reserved again, so multiple consecutive small hit V jackpots can be won.

[Example 6-4]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-4th embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-4th embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (does not have a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/3, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game is a small win game in which it is easy to V-win in a specific area (it does not have a small win game in which V-win is difficult). In other words, if the ball enters the large win device P750 during the execution of the small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the execution of the large win game (also called a small win V large win or a small win V large win game).
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the probability of a normal symbol winning is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning normal symbol (the operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric device P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the winning symbol, i.e., "one operation of the normal electric device P770" = "executing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric devices P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state, but in either opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric device P770 is forcibly ended by one ball entering the normal electric device P770 (for example, if one ball is detected during the second 1.5-second opening in a 1.5-second x 3 opening, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly ended and the third opening is not performed).
(G) In the low base state or high base state, after a first special symbol jackpot game (after special game) which is executed by winning a jackpot with the first special symbol, after a second special symbol jackpot game (after special game) which is executed by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, and after a small jackpot V jackpot with the second special symbol which is executed by winning a small jackpot with the second special symbol (after special game), the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or the normal electric device P770 is operated N times (as a variant, the high base state may be configured to be maintained until the second special symbol changes once, or until the normal electric device P770 is operated N times, or until the first special symbol changes 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change a total of 10 times). Here, N=1, 2, 3, or 4, and is configured to differ depending on the type of special game (type of big win symbol or small win symbol).

By having the above-mentioned features, the occurrence expectancy of the reserve for the small hit of the second special symbol can be made different depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the type of the small hit symbol. In other words, the acquisition expectancy of the small hit V big hit and the acquisition number expectation value of the small hit V big hit can be made different depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the type of the small hit symbol. As a modified example, it may have a special game (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) that transitions to a high base state and maintains the high base state until the second special symbol changes 99 times or the normal electric role P770 operates 10,000 times (or the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes 99 times, or until the normal electric role P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the first special symbol changes 99 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change a total of 99 times).

As a modified example, when the high base state is ended by a big win pattern or a small win pattern that results in "one change of the second special pattern or 12 activations of the normal electric device P770," the change of the second special pattern is set to 300 seconds, and an effect is executed that prompts the player to stop firing game balls every three activations of the normal electric device P770 (in other words, an effect that prompts the player not to let game balls enter the normal electric device P770). This makes it possible to prevent the "number of activations of the normal electric device P770," which is one of the conditions for ending the time-saving feature by allowing balls to enter the normal electric device P770 when there are four reserved normal patterns, from being counted up by one in vain. More specifically, even if the ball is placed into the normal electric device P770 when there are four reserved normal symbols, the number of reserved normal symbols will not increase because there are already four, and the high base state will simply come to an end, which would be disadvantageous to the player. However, by configuring it as described above, it is possible to prevent this disadvantage.

[Example 6-5]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-5th embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-5th embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (does not have a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/5 (small win pattern A is 1/6, small win pattern B is 1/30), the number of reserved first special patterns is 4, and the number of reserved second special patterns is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game has a small win game A in which it is easy to get a V in a specific area (a small win game corresponding to a small win pattern A), and a small win game B in which it is difficult to get a V (a small win game corresponding to a small win pattern B). In other words, if a ball is made to enter the large win device P750 during the execution of the small win game A, the ball is almost certain to enter the specific area, and a big win game (also called a small win V big win or a small win V big win game) is executed as a result of this, but even if a ball is made to enter the large win device P750 during the execution of the small win game B, the ball does not enter the specific area, and a big win game (also called a small win V big win or a small win V big win game) is not executed as a result of this.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the probability of a normal symbol winning is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device P770 corresponding to the winning normal symbol (the operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the normal electric device P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the winning symbol, i.e., "one operation of the normal electric device P770" = "executing one set of opening patterns that open one or more normal electric devices P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state, but in either opening pattern, the operation of the normal electric device P770 is forcibly ended by one ball entering the normal electric device P770 (for example, if one ball is detected during the second 1.5-second opening in a 1.5-second x 3 opening, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly ended and the third opening is not performed).
(G) After the first special symbol jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning the first special symbol jackpot in the low base state, the game transitions to the high base state, and the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol changes once or until small win symbol A or small win symbol B is won five times.
(H) After a jackpot game of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot of the second special pattern in the low base state, and after a small jackpot V jackpot of the second special pattern (after special game), which is executed by winning a small jackpot of the second special pattern in the low base state, the high base state is maintained until the second special pattern changes five times or until small jackpot pattern A or small jackpot pattern B is won five times.
(I) After a first special pattern jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot with the first special pattern in the high base state, after a second special pattern jackpot game (after special game), which is executed by winning a jackpot with the second special pattern in the high base state, and after a small jackpot V jackpot with the second special pattern, which is executed by winning a small jackpot with the second special pattern in the high base state (after special game), the high base state is entered, and the high base state is maintained until the second special pattern changes 99 times or small jackpot pattern A or small jackpot pattern B is won once.

The above features allow for a gameplay in which a first hit (a jackpot game involving the first special symbol in a low base state) triggers a transition to a one-time high base state, while a jackpot game or a small V jackpot during the high base state triggers a transition to a 99-time high base state, and a jackpot game involving the second special symbol in a low base state or a small V jackpot (a jackpot or small jackpot won on the reserve involving the second special symbol remaining when transitioning from the high base state to the low base state) triggers a transition to a five-time high base state, in other words, a high base state with the expectation of multiple consecutive wins can be created. In addition, when the 99-time high base state is granted, the small hit pattern A will be won with a fairly high probability of 1/6 within 99 times, so it may seem like there is a very high chance of a consecutive win, such as "99 times high base state → small hit V big hit related to small hit pattern A → 99 times high base state → small hit V big hit related to small hit pattern A → ...", but since the small hit pattern B is difficult (practically impossible) to win the small hit V and the high base state ends when the small hit pattern is won, extreme consecutive wins are suppressed and the gameplay of how many times the small hit pattern A is won before the small hit pattern B is won can be realized. Also, in the case of a 5-time high base state, the high base state is configured not to end even if the small hit pattern is won once (even if the small hit pattern B is won once), so that the high base state can be executed reliably 5 times.

[Example 6-6]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6-6 embodiment has the same board configuration as that in Fig. 53, and adopts the "small win rush" specification. However, unlike the pachinko game machine P in the 5th embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls by making small wins occur frequently, so even when a small win is won, the large winning hole P751 is only open for 0.01 seconds, making it very difficult for the game ball to enter. The pachinko game machine P in the 6-6 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a jackpot in a low probability state is 1/300, the probability of a jackpot in a high probability state is 1/50, and the probability of a small jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel consumption)" is adopted, and "V special jackpot" is adopted (the "10R special jackpot A" and "10R special jackpot B" described below are jackpot patterns that make it easy for the ball to enter a specific area, while the "10R normal jackpot" is a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult and virtually impossible for the ball to enter a specific area).
(E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special pattern, so in these game states, the first special pattern has a relatively shorter change time than the second special pattern (the average change time of the first special pattern is 20 seconds in the low probability low base state and 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, but the average time of the second special pattern is 10 minutes in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, and high probability high base state).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter change time than the first special symbol (the average change time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds in the high probability low base state, but the average change time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot pattern for the first special pattern, the “10R special jackpot A”, which triggers a transition to a high probability low base state in which the jackpot will remain in special mode until the next time, will be selected with a 40% probability, and the “10R normal jackpot”, which triggers a transition to a low probability high base state for 100 spins, will be selected with a 60% probability.
(H) As the jackpot pattern for the second special pattern, the “10R sure-win jackpot A”, which triggers a transition to a high-probability, low-base state in which the jackpot will be in a sure-win state until the next time, is selected with a 40% probability, and the “10R sure-win jackpot B”, which triggers a transition to a high-probability, high-base state in which the jackpot will be in a sure-win state until the next time, is selected with a 60% probability.

By having the above features, if the game transitions to a high-probability low-base state after the first win (a jackpot game involving the first special symbol in a low-base state), the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, and if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot, all of them are "probable jackpots," so the gameplay is such that the execution of the special game is guaranteed at least two more times. Specifically, if the second special symbol wins "10R Probable Jackpot A," the game transitions again to a high-probability low-base state, and two more special games are guaranteed, and if the second special symbol wins "10R Probable Jackpot B," the game transitions to a high-probability high-base state, and the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. Furthermore, after the transition to a high probability, high base state switches the game to progress mainly with the first special symbol, if the first special symbol wins the "10R special jackpot A", the game transitions again to a high probability, low base state, and two more special games are guaranteed to be played, resulting in innovative gameplay.

[Examples 6-7]
The pachinko game machine P in the 6th-7th embodiment has the same board configuration as that in Fig. 53, and adopts the "small win rush" specification. However, unlike the pachinko game machine P in the 5th embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls by making small wins occur frequently, so even when a small win is won, the large winning hole P751 is only open for 0.01 seconds, making it very difficult for the game ball to enter. The pachinko game machine P in the 6th-6th embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a jackpot in a low probability state is 1/300, the probability of a jackpot in a high probability state is 1/50, and the probability of a small jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel consumption)" is adopted, and "V special jackpot" is adopted (the "10R special jackpot" described below is a jackpot pattern that makes it easy for the ball to land in a specific area, while the "10R normal jackpot" is a jackpot pattern that is difficult and virtually impossible for the ball to land in a specific area).
(E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special pattern, so in these game states, the first special pattern has a relatively shorter change time than the second special pattern (the average change time of the first special pattern is 20 seconds in the low probability low base state and 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, but the average time of the second special pattern is 10 minutes in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, and high probability high base state).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter change time than the first special symbol (the average change time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds in the high probability low base state, but the average change time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot pattern for the first special pattern, a “10R sure-win jackpot”, which triggers a transition to a high-probability, high-base state in which the state will be in sure-win mode until the next time, is selected 100% of the time. However, after 50 times of the high-base state, the state will transition to a low-base state, and the state will switch to a high-probability, low-base state.
(H) As the jackpot pattern for the second special pattern, a "10R special jackpot", which triggers a transition to a high-probability, high-base state in which the jackpot will be in special until the next time, will be selected with a 50% probability, and a "10R normal jackpot", which triggers a transition to a low-probability, high-base state of 100 spins, will be selected with a 50% probability.

By having the above features, the first hit (a jackpot game involving the first special symbol in a low base state) always transitions to a high probability state, so the execution of the special game again is guaranteed, and in the high probability high base state of 50 hits, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol, so if a jackpot (with the first special symbol) is hit within these 50 hits, the gameplay is created in which the game always transitions to the high probability state again.

[Seventh Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various pachinko gaming machines P with various playability have been described, but the seventh embodiment is an example of a machine in which further improvements have been made to the playability and presentation content of special games and high base states in order to further improve playability. In the following, only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the base technology or the elements described in this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P in the seventh embodiment employs the "small hit V" specifications described above. In addition, an opening is formed in approximately the center of the play area P501 of the pachinko game machine P in the seventh embodiment so that the performance display device P80 can be seen, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is attached to the opening, forming a partition section inside the play area P501.

Below the performance display device P80, there is provided a first start winning port P711 into which game balls flowing down the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80 (left side area P501L) enter, and further below that is provided an outlet P790 (not shown). Also, a general winning port P731 is located in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the performance display device P80. In other words, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the performance display device P80, it is expected that the ball will enter the first start winning port P711 or the general winning port P731, resulting in a win. On the other hand, in the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 (right side area P501R), as shown in FIG. 53, the operating port P741, the second start winning port P721 related to the normal electric role P770, and the large winning port P751 are arranged from the top, and the game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the performance display device P80 can win a prize (the first start winning port and the second start winning port are also called the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, respectively). In addition, as a modified example, instead of having the second start winning port P721, another first start winning port different from the first start winning port P711 may be provided, and the normal electric role P770 may be attached to the other first start winning port.

Here, the first start winning port P711 is a start winning port for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and the second start winning port P721 is a start winning port for acquiring the right to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the low base state, the game ball is launched toward the left area of the game area P501, and the right to the special pattern lottery for the first special pattern is acquired by the first start winning port P711, and in the high base state, the game ball is launched toward the right area of the game area P501, and the right to the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is acquired by the second start winning port P721.

Inside the large prize winning port P751, a first distribution member P900A and a second distribution member P900B are provided, and the game ball that enters the large prize winning port P751 is guided to either the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B. The second distribution member P900B may be guided via the first distribution member P900A or may be guided without passing through the first distribution member P900A (i.e., the game ball that enters the large prize winning port P751 is guided directly to the second distribution member P900B). The game ball guided to the first distribution member P900A is distributed to one of the five ball entry ports. If a ball enters an entrance with a circle drawn around it, it is guided to the second distribution member P900B, and if it enters any other entrance, it flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board P5 from front to back, is collected in a recovery flow path (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2, passes through an out ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls, and is then discharged outside the game machine. The game balls guided to the second distribution member P900B are distributed to one of the four ball entrances. Of these, if the ball enters a specific area P760, which is an entrance with a circle drawn around it, it triggers a big win game (also called a small win V big win or small win V big win game); if the ball enters any other entrance, it flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the front and rear of the game board P5, is collected in a recovery flow path (used ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2, passes through an out ball sensor P792 (fired ball count sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame to detect the total number of fired game balls, and is then discharged from the game machine.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win,” “small win,” or “lose.”
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (not equipped with a high probability state), the probability of a small win is 1/3 for the first special symbol and 1/2 for the second special symbol, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 2. As a modified example, the probability of a small win for the first special symbol may be 1/2, and the number of reserved second special symbols may be 1.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) For the small win games of the first special pattern, there are three types: small win game A (opening time of the large prize opening P751 is 0.2 seconds × 1 time), small win game B (opening time of the large prize opening P751 is 0.5 seconds × 2 times), and small win game C (opening time of the large prize opening P751 is 1.5 seconds × 1 time), which are executed at rates of 60%, 30%, and 10%, respectively. For the small win games of the first special pattern, there is only one type, small win game C (opening time of the large prize opening P751 is 1.5 seconds × 1 time), which is executed at a rate of 100%. As a modified example, the small win game of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed in three types, small win game A (opening time of the large winning hole P751 is 0.2 seconds x 1 time), small win game B (opening time of the large winning hole P751 is 0.5 seconds x 2 times), and small win game C (opening time of the large winning hole P751 is 1.5 seconds x 1 time), at a rate of 35%, 35%, and 30%, respectively. As described above, by making the ball enter the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small win game and then entering the specific area P760, a big win game (also called a small win V big win or small win V big win game) is executed as a trigger.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state. The high base state continues for 99 times, but if a small hit or a big hit is won in the high base state and a small hit V big hit game or a big hit game is executed four times in a row (for example, if an event of "a small hit is won in the high base state and a small hit V big hit game is executed" occurs four times in a row), the low base state will always be entered after the fourth small hit V big hit game or big hit game (so-called "time-shortening limiter" is applied). As a modified example, the time-shortening limiter is not applied, and the low base state is entered when a small hit V big hit game or a big hit game is never executed in a high base state that continues for 99 times, or a small hit V big hit game or a big hit game that triggers the transition to the low base state is provided, and the low base state is entered when such a small hit V big hit game or a big hit game is executed.
(G) After the first special symbol small hit V jackpot (after special play) which is executed by winning the first special symbol small hit in the low base state, there is a 25% chance of transitioning to the high base state (75% chance of transitioning to the low base state), and after the first special symbol big hit (after special play) which is executed by winning the first special symbol big hit in the low base state, there is a 50% chance of transitioning to the high base state (50% chance of transitioning to the low base state). Note that in all of the small hit games A to C, the rate of transitioning to the high base state after the small hit V jackpot game remains the same (all small hit games transition to the high base state at 25%).
(H) After the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the small hit of the second special symbol in the low base state (after special play), the state transitions to the high base state at 100%, and after the jackpot of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol in the low base state (after special play), the state transitions to the high base state at 100%. Note that in any of the small hit games A to C, the rate of transition to the high base state after the small hit V jackpot game remains the same (all small hit games transition to the high base state at 100%).
(I) After the first special symbol small hit V jackpot (after special play) which is executed by winning the first special symbol small hit in the high base state, the state transitions to the high base state at 100%, and after the first special symbol big hit (after special play) which is executed by winning the first special symbol big hit in the high base state, the state transitions to the high base state at 100%. Note that in any of the small hit games A to C, the rate of transition to the high base state after the small hit V big hit game does not change (all small hit games transition to the high base state at 100%). Note that after the time-saving limiter is reached (after the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in the high base state), the state transitions to the low base state regardless of the type of small hit game (type of small hit V big hit game) and the type of big hit game.
(J) After the small hit V jackpot of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the small hit of the second special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the state transitions to the high base state at 100%, and after the jackpot of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the state transitions to the high base state at 100%. Note that in any of the small hit games A to C, the rate of transition to the high base state after the small hit V jackpot game does not change (all small hit games transition to the high base state at 100%). Note that after the time-saving limiter is reached (after the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), the state transitions to the low base state regardless of the type of small hit game (type of small hit V jackpot game) and the type of jackpot game.
(K) A second special pattern jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a jackpot with the second special pattern is a 10R special game, a first special pattern jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a jackpot with the first special pattern, a first special pattern small jackpot V jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a small jackpot with the first special pattern, and a second special pattern small jackpot V jackpot (special game) that is executed by winning a small jackpot with the second special pattern are 4R special games.
(L) When the large prize winning port P751 is opened and a game ball enters when the small prize game A and the small prize game B are executed, the game ball is guided to the first distribution member P900A, and when the large prize winning port P751 is opened and a game ball enters when the small prize game C is executed, the game ball is guided to the second distribution member P900B. More specifically, inside the large prize winning port P751, a first guide path leading to the first distribution member P900A and a second guide path leading to the second distribution member P900B are provided, and the first guide path is open and the second guide path is blocked for three seconds after the small prize start demo of the small prize game ends, and the first guide path is blocked and the second guide path is open for five seconds starting from three seconds after the small prize start demo of the small prize game ends, and the small prize game A and In small win game B, the large prize opening P751 opens immediately after the end of the small win start demo, so the game ball enters with the first guide path open and the second guide path blocked, and is guided via the first guide path to the first distribution member P900A, and in small win game C, the large prize opening P751 opens 3 seconds after the end of the small win start demo, so the game ball enters with the first guide path blocked and the second guide path open, and is guided via the second guide path to the second distribution member P900B.

Figure 57 shows the presentation mode when a small win game is executed and the large prize opening P751 is opened. Figure 57 (a-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a stop mode corresponding to a small win, the small win game starts, the large prize opening P751 is opened, and the game ball enters the large prize opening P751. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (during a small win game). Then, the words "Challenge to break through the crane" are displayed as a presentation to encourage the player to see whether the ball will eventually enter a specific area via the first distribution member P900A and the second distribution member P900B (presentation indicating that the game ball is stuck in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B). The presentation in this situation is called the "large prize opening ball presentation".

Figure 57 (a-2) shows a situation where the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a manner corresponding to a small win, the small win game starts, and the large prize winning hole P751 opens, but the game ball does not enter the large prize winning hole P751. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (small win game in progress). The word "Sorry..." is then displayed to inform the player that the game ball did not enter the large prize winning hole P751. The effect in this situation is called the "large prize winning hole no ball effect."

Figure 57 (b-1) is the situation following Figure 57 (a-1), where the game ball has finally entered the specific area. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the top right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (a situation in which the game is transitioning from a small hit game to a small hit V big hit game). Then, the letter "V" is displayed as an effect to inform the player that the game ball has entered the specific area. The effect in this situation is called the "ball entering specific area effect."

Figure 57 (b-1) is the situation following Figure 57 (a-1), where the game ball has finally entered the specific area. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (small hit game in progress, or more precisely, a situation in which the player is transitioning from small hit game to small hit V big hit game in progress). Then, the letter "V" is displayed as an effect to inform the player that the game ball has entered the specific area. The effect in this situation is called the "ball not entering specific area effect."

Figure 57 (b-2) shows the situation following Figure 57 (a-1), where the game ball ultimately did not enter the specific area. A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the top right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (small win game in progress). The words "Sorry..." are then displayed to inform the player that the game ball did not enter the specific area. These words are displayed in the same manner as in Figure 57 (b-2).

This configuration allows for a sharp presentation in the process from winning a small win to winning a small win V jackpot, and by using a common presentation in the first process of winning a small win V jackpot, whether or not the ball enters the large winning port P751, and in the second process of winning a small win V jackpot, whether or not the ball enters the specific area, the presentation is the same in the case of failure (if the ball does not enter the area), making it visually easier to understand that a small win V jackpot was not won, and also contributing to reducing the presentation capacity.

In the seventh embodiment, multiple setting values are provided, allowing the jackpot probability to be set to one of multiple types. There are two setting values, "1" and "6". When the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability is 1/300 as described above, and when the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability is 1/150. The small jackpot probability does not change even if the setting value is different.

Figure 58 includes multiple types of the aforementioned "big prize opening non-entered ball effect" and "specific area non-entered ball effect" in addition to the form shown in Figure 57, which not only indicates that the ball did not enter the ball, but also serves as a setting suggestion, informing the player whether the setting value is "1" or "6".

Figure 58 (a-1) shows the same "big prize opening non-entered ball effect" and "specific area non-entered ball effect" as the modes shown in Figure 57. When this mode (called mode A) is displayed, it does not serve as a setting suggestion.

Figure 58 (a-2) shows the "Big Winning Hole No Ball Entry Presentation" and the "Specific Area No Ball Entry Presentation" in which the word "Too Bad!" is displayed. When this mode (called mode B) is displayed, it suggests that there is a slight possibility that the setting value is "6."

Figure 58 (a-3) shows the "Big Winning Hole No Ball Entry Presentation" and the "Specific Area No Ball Entry Presentation" in which the text "Too Bad!!!" is displayed. When this mode (called mode C) is displayed, it suggests that there is a very high possibility that the setting value is "6."

Figure 58 (a-4) shows the "Big Winning Hole No Ball Entry Presentation" and the "Specific Area No Ball Entry Presentation" in which the words "Too Bad!!!!!!!!!!" are displayed. When this mode (called mode D) is displayed, it suggests that the set value is definitely "6".

These effects may be displayed both when the ball does not enter the big prize slot P751 and when the ball does not enter the specific area, or they may only be displayed in one of the two cases.

When the set value is "1", the appearance rates of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D are 90/100, 8/100, 2/100, and 0/100, respectively. When the set value is "1", the appearance rates of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D are 82/100, 10/100, 7/100, and 1/100, respectively. This appearance rate is applied to both the "large prize opening non-entered ball performance" and the "specific area non-entered ball performance". As a modified example, the appearance rate of mode B, mode C, and mode D may be higher in the "specific area non-entered ball performance" than in the "large prize opening non-entered ball performance" when the set value is "6". As a further modified example, when the number of fluctuations in the low base state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the appearance rate of mode C and mode D may be higher when the set value is "6". As a further modification, the small win game C may be configured to have a higher occurrence rate for patterns B, C, and D when the setting value is "6" than small win game A and small win game B.

In this way, by suggesting the setting value when a small jackpot is won, which triggers a jackpot game (small jackpot V jackpot game), it is possible to draw more attention to the behavior of the game ball during a small jackpot game (whether or not the ball goes in), and by making it possible to suggest settings in both the "specific area non-ball entry effect" and the "large prize hole non-ball entry effect," it is possible to provide a reliable opportunity to suggest settings when a small jackpot is won.

Figure 59 shows the presentation mode in the situation when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state) and after the time-saving limiter is reached (after the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state). Since the time-saving limiter always transitions to the low base state, the gameplay switches from winning consecutive jackpots or small hits related to the second special symbol in the high base state (up to four consecutive times) to a gameplay that aims to transition to the high base state by winning a jackpot or small hit in the low base state. Note that the second special symbol has a higher winning rate of small hit game C than the first special symbol, and therefore small hit V jackpot game is more likely to be executed, so the high base state in which the second special symbol is the main focus of the gameplay has a high possibility of consecutive wins (high possibility of reaching the time-saving limiter).

Figure 59 (a) shows the effect during the jackpot end demo when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in a high base state). A very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (during a small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game). In addition, the words "4 sets completed!" are displayed, which is an effect notifying the player that the time-saving limiter has been reached and that the player will transition to a low base state.

Figure 59 (b-1) is a performance during the execution of the jackpot end demo in a situation where one or more reserved balls related to the second special pattern remain when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), and is a performance following Figure 59 (a). As mentioned above, the second special pattern has a higher winning rate of the small hit game C than the first special pattern, and therefore the small hit V jackpot game is more likely to be executed, so it is expected that the small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game will be executed with the reserved balls related to the remaining second special pattern, and the game will transition to the high base state again immediately after the transition to the low base state. Therefore, the words "Next time, pullback challenge" are displayed on the screen, which is a performance suggesting that the reserved balls related to the second special pattern will be consumed after the currently executed small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game is completed, and the game may transition to the high base state again immediately after the transition to the low base state. FIG. 59(b-2) shows a state in which the small hit V big hit game or big hit game has ended (the big hit end demo has ended) and the game has transitioned to a low base state, the remaining reserve for the second special pattern has been consumed, and the second special pattern is changing, and the display of the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the display of the change in the second special pattern is being executed. In addition, in FIG. 59(b-1), a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit the right (small hit V big hit game or big hit game).

Figure 59 (b-2) shows the time when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in high base state)

Figure 59 (c-1) shows the effect of the jackpot end demo being executed in a situation where there are no reserved symbols related to the second special symbol remaining when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V jackpot or jackpot in the high base state), and is a performance following Figure 59 (a). Since there are no reserved symbols related to the second special symbol remaining, the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol will be consumed after the currently executed small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game ends, so there will be no transition to the high base state again immediately after the transition to the low base state. Therefore, the effect shown in Figure 59 (b-1) is not displayed, and a black background is displayed. Figure 59 (c-2) shows a situation where the small hit V jackpot game or jackpot game ends (the jackpot end demo ends), the game transitions to the low base state, and the fluctuations stop (the decorative symbols and simple symbols are displayed as a combination of "357"). Also, since there are no reserved symbols related to the second special symbol immediately after the transition to the low base state, the message "Hit to the left" is displayed to indicate that the base state has changed and to encourage the player to create a reserved symbol related to the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, the presentation of the jackpot end demo can be changed depending on whether or not the second special symbol is on hold, making it possible to execute a presentation that is appropriate to the situation and that does not feel strange to the player.

When the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small V jackpot or jackpot in high base state), the jackpot end demo lasts 20 seconds, but before the time-saving limiter is reached (during the first to third consecutive small V jackpot or jackpot in high base state), the jackpot end demo lasts 5 seconds. This allows the consecutive wins to proceed smoothly before the time-saving limiter is reached, and ensures that there is enough time to display "Next time, pullback challenge" when the time-saving limiter is reached.

As a modified example, when the time-saving limiter is reached (during the fourth consecutive small hit V big hit or big hit in a high base state), if one or more reserved symbols related to the second special symbol remain and the lottery result for the reserved symbol is expected to be a big hit, the word "Big hit?" may be displayed lightly behind the words "Next time, pull back challenge" in FIG. 58(b-1). In addition, as a further modified example, when a small hit V big hit game or big hit game is not executed even once in a high base state that continues for 99 times, if a reserved symbol related to the second special symbol remains at the 99th spin, the performance of FIG. 59(b-1) and FIG. 59(b-2) may be executed, and if no reserved symbol related to the second special symbol remains at the 99th spin, the performance of FIG. 59(c-1) and FIG. 59(c-2) may be executed.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, there are three types of small win games, small win game A, small win game B, and small win game C, but during the fluctuation (before stopping) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when a small win game is scheduled to be executed, for example, before the super reach effect is executed or before a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win (for example, "357") is displayed, a special effect is executed to suggest to the player which type of small win game is scheduled to be executed. However, this special effect is configured to be set by the player as to whether or not to execute it (for example, during the fluctuation or the fluctuation stop, the special effect can be set to a state in which it can be executed by pressing and holding the up button of the cross key for 2 seconds or more, and the special effect can be set to a state in which it can be executed by pressing and holding the down button of the cross key for 2 seconds or more). As a variant, instead of deciding whether or not to execute a special effect, the player can set the probability of executing the special effect (for example, while the value is changing or the value is stopped, pressing the up button on the cross key once can increase the probability of executing the special effect by 10%, and pressing the down button on the cross key once can decrease the probability of executing the special effect by 10%).

More specifically, during the fluctuation of the small hit game A scheduled to be executed, a crescent moon mark is displayed on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before stopping). Also, during the fluctuation of the small hit game B scheduled to be executed, a half moon mark is displayed on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before stopping). Also, during the fluctuation of the small hit game C scheduled to be executed, a full moon mark is displayed on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before stopping). Furthermore, during the fluctuation of the small hit game C scheduled to be executed and the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small hit game C, a small hit V jackpot game is executed, and after the execution of the small hit V jackpot game is completed, during the fluctuation that can transition to a high base state, a full moon mark with a rabbit silhouette is displayed on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (before stopping). It is preferable that this special effect be configured so that it can only be performed in a low base state, but it may also be configured so that it can be performed in a high base state.

By configuring it in this way, when a small jackpot is won, it is possible to know in advance whether a small jackpot game that is likely to land in the large jackpot port P751 is scheduled to be executed, and further, whether a transition to a high base state will occur if the ball lands in a specific area. In addition, by allowing the player to choose whether or not to execute such advance notification, the gameplay is expanded more than ever before.

Figure 60 shows the timeline of the presentation from the changing display of the first special symbol when a small win is won in low base state and high base state, through the stopped display, to the execution of the small win game.

Figure 60 (a-1) shows a situation where the first special symbol is fluctuating in a low base state, and the decorative and simple symbols are fluctuating on the screen in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. After that, in Figure 60 (a-2), the first special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol, and the corresponding combination of decorative and simple symbols (for example, "357") is displayed on the screen. After that, in Figure 60 (a-3), the words "Aim for the attacker!" are displayed to encourage the player to launch the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (during a small win game). After that, in FIG. 60(a-4) after the game ball has entered the large prize opening P751, the words "Attempting to break through the Kruun" are displayed as an effect (indicating that the game ball is stuck in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) to encourage the player to decide whether the ball will ultimately enter the specific area via the first distribution member P900A and the second distribution member P900B, just like in FIG. 57(a-1). Also, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (small win game in progress).

Figure 60 (b-1) shows a situation in which the first special symbol is fluctuating in the high base state, and the simple symbol is fluctuating on the screen in response to the fluctuating first special symbol (the decorative symbol is not displayed). This is because in the high base state, it is easy for the ball to enter the second start winning hole P721 and it is easy to win a small jackpot related to the second special symbol, so there is little need to use decorative symbols to promote the winning of a small jackpot or a big jackpot, and it is more appropriate to prioritize smooth game progress in a consecutive win state in which special games are played continuously. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (during the high base state). After that, in Figure 60 (b-2), the first special symbol stops and displays a small jackpot symbol, and the screen displays a combination of simple symbols corresponding to it (for example, "357"). Also, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 60 (b-3), the words "Aim for the attacker!" are not displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a small win game and in a high base state). This is because, in a high base state, it is assumed that the player has already been hitting the right before winning a small win, so there is little need to bother to display the words "Aim for the attacker!", and it is more appropriate to prioritize smooth game progress in a consecutive win state in which special games are played continuously. After that, in FIG. 60(b-4) after the game ball enters the big prize opening P751, the words "Attempting to break through the Kruun" are not displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (in a small win game and in a high base state). This is because, in a high base state, the main focus of the game is the second special symbol, and since it is rare for a small win game related to the first special symbol to be executed in a high base state, the words "Attempting to break through the Kruun" are used to avoid any misinterpretation of the game as a small win game related to the second special symbol.

Figure 61 (a-1) shows a situation where the second special symbol is fluctuating in a low base state, and the simple symbol is fluctuating on the screen in response to the fluctuating second special symbol (the decorative symbol is not displayed). This is because it is difficult to enter the second start winning hole P721 in a low base state, and the main focus of the game is the first special symbol, so it is rare for the second special symbol to fluctuate in a low base state. In order to prevent it from being mistaken for a fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is not used to promote the winning of a small or big win. However, as mentioned above, if the reserve related to the remaining second special symbol is consumed after the time-saving limiter is reached (during or after the fourth consecutive small or V big win in a high base state), the decorative symbol will also be displayed (fluctuating). After that, in Fig. 61 (a-2), the second special symbol stops as a small win symbol, and the corresponding simple symbol combination (for example, "357") is displayed on the screen. After that, in Fig. 61 (a-3), the words "Aim at the attacker!" are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751. Also, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit the right (a small win game is in progress). After that, in FIG. 61(a-4) after the game ball has entered the large prize opening P751, the words "Attempting to break through the Kruun" are displayed as an effect (indicating that the game ball is stuck in the first distribution member P900A or the second distribution member P900B) to encourage the player to decide whether the ball will ultimately enter the specific area via the first distribution member P900A and the second distribution member P900B, just like in FIG. 57(a-1). Also, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (small win game in progress).

Figure 61 (b-1) shows a situation in which the second special symbol is fluctuating in the high base state, and the simple symbol is fluctuating in response to the fluctuating second special symbol on the screen (the decorative symbol is not displayed). This is because in the high base state, it is easy for the ball to enter the second start winning hole P721 and it is easy to win a small jackpot related to the second special symbol, so there is little need to use decorative symbols to promote the winning of a small jackpot or a big jackpot, and it is more appropriate to prioritize smooth game progress in a consecutive win state in which special games are played continuously. In addition, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (during the high base state). After that, in Figure 61 (b-2), the second special symbol stops and displays a small jackpot symbol, and the screen displays a combination of simple symbols corresponding to it (for example, "357"). Also, a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation where the player should hit the right (in a high base state). After that, in FIG. 61 (b-3), the words "Aim for the attacker!" are displayed to encourage the player to launch the game ball toward the large winning hole P751. This prevents the consecutive win state from being prolonged by encouraging the player to make the ball enter the large winning hole P751 in the small winning game related to the second special pattern that is the main part of the game in the high base state. After that, in FIG. 61 (b-4) after the game ball enters the large winning hole P751, the words "Challenge to break through the crane" are not displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation where the player should hit the right (in a small winning game and in a high base state). This is because in a high base state, prioritizing smooth game progress is more suitable for a consecutive win state in which special games are executed continuously (especially since the second special symbol is more likely to execute the small win game C, the possibility of the ball entering the specific area is also high, and smoother game progress can be expected). In addition, as a modified example, in order to realize an even smoother game progress, the text "Aim for the attacker!" may be configured not to be displayed in the situation of FIG. 61 (b-3). Also, regardless of whether the base state is low or high, and regardless of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the small win game C is executed, the text "Aim for the attacker!" is always displayed, and when the small win game A or small win game B is executed, the small win game A or small win game B is executed when the winning/losing lottery result of the first special symbol in the low base state is a small win, and when the winning/losing lottery result of the second special symbol in the high base state is a small win. In the case of small win game A or small win game B, which is executed when the winning or losing lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win in a high base state, or in the case of small win game A or small win game B, which is executed when the winning or losing lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win in a low base state, the text "Aim for the attacker!" may be configured not to be displayed.

[Eighth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment to the seventh embodiment, various pachinko gaming machines P with various playability have been described, but the eighth embodiment is an example of a machine in which further improvements have been made to the playability and presentation content of special games and high base states in order to further improve playability, and only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail below, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Note that, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the base technology or elements described in this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

(Board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board (the configuration of the game area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment can be implemented with a board configuration that is almost identical to that of the underlying pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The pachinko gaming machine P of the eighth embodiment is configured with a specific area P760 inside the large prize opening (attacker) P751 in order to adopt the gameplay (specifications) described below. Note that, as long as the changes do not change the gameplay disclosed below (or are only minor changes), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(Specifications)
Next, the game characteristics (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment will be described. In this explanation, regarding the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball output performance, only the specifications for "setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values for the other setting values are set appropriately.

As shown in FIG. 62, the probability of the winning/losing lottery for the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is set to a jackpot probability of 1/200 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small jackpot probability of 20/200 (only the second special symbol). In addition, the number of winning balls is set to 4 balls for the first start winning hole (first start hole) P711, 3 balls for the second start winning hole (second start hole) P721, 3 balls for the left general winning hole P731L, 2 balls for the right general winning hole P731R, and 15 balls for the large winning hole (attacker) P751.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment adopts a ball entry order consumption control that prioritizes consumption from the ball that entered first, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the reserved symbol that occurred first is given priority and displayed in a variable manner (regardless of whether the reserved symbol is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the reserved symbols are consumed in the order of reservation occurrence). In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small win" as a special symbol lottery result, but it is also possible to configure the first special symbol to have a "small win". In addition, as long as the game nature of the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is not lost, it is not limited to the ball entry order consumption control, and as a modified example, the first special symbol priority consumption control or the second special symbol priority consumption control may be applied. In addition, in the external information output processing, when information (referred to as a high base signal) corresponding to the operating state (base state) of the electric chute support function is output as a signal regarding the game status, even if the high base state ends and transitions to the low base state, if there are reserves related to the second special pattern, the output of the high base signal may be continued until all reserves related to the second special pattern are consumed. In this configuration, when there are two reserved symbols related to the first special pattern and four reserved symbols related to the second special pattern when transitioning from the high base state to the low base state, and the order of consumption is "reserved symbols related to the second special pattern → reserved symbols related to the second special pattern → reserved symbols related to the first special pattern → reserved symbols related to the first special pattern → reserved symbols related to the second special pattern → reserved symbols related to the second special pattern," (1) the output of the high base signal may continue until all of these symbols are consumed, or (2) if the reserved symbols related to the first special pattern are consumed once after the reserved symbols related to the second special pattern are consumed, the output of the high base signal may be interrupted after the reserved symbols related to the second special pattern are consumed, even if the reserved symbols related to the second special pattern are still remaining.

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment employs a gameplay (specification) called "small hit V" explained as the prerequisite technology, and is designed so that in addition to the case where a "big hit" is obtained by the special symbol lottery, when a "small hit" is obtained by the special symbol lottery and the game ball passes (also called ball entry) through a specific area P760 inside the big prize opening P751 during the small hit game that is subsequently executed, the device for continuously operating the role is activated and the big hit game is executed. In the eighth embodiment, when a small hit game develops into a big hit game, the series of special game states from the start of the small hit game to the end of the big hit game are called "small hit V" or "small hit development big hit", etc.

The types of jackpots (including small jackpots V) in the special game state in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment are 3R jackpots (jackpots with the first special symbol, small jackpots V with the second special symbol) and 10R jackpots (jackpots with the second special symbol, small jackpots V with the second special symbol). In addition, for the specific game, which is the advantageous normal game state, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment does not have a probability fluctuation function, and executes the specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chute support function (electric support) function after various jackpots (including small jackpots V).

In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, if a small win is won in the win/lose lottery for the second special pattern, the second special pattern will have one of the small win patterns A to E as a pattern lottery. In other words, if a small win is won in the win/lose lottery for the second special pattern, the stopping patterns of the second special pattern will be a stopping pattern corresponding to small win pattern A (for example, a stopping pattern in which the 1st, 2nd, 7th, and 8th of the 8 LEDs in the second special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off), a stopping pattern corresponding to small win pattern B (for example, a stopping pattern in which the 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, and 8th of the 8 LEDs in the second special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off), a stopping pattern corresponding to small win pattern C (for example, a stopping pattern corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th of the 8 LEDs in the second special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off), and a stopping pattern corresponding to small win pattern D (for example, a stopping pattern corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th of the 8 LEDs in the second special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off). The stop mode will be one of the following: a stop mode in which the 3rd, 5th, and 7th of the 8 LEDs in the 2nd special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off), a stop mode corresponding to a small win pattern D (for example, a stop mode in which the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th of the 8 LEDs in the 2nd special pattern display device P52 are lit and the rest are off), or a stop mode corresponding to a small win pattern E (for example, a stop mode in which the 1st of the 8 LEDs in the 2nd special pattern display device P52 is lit and the rest are off). When a small win is won, the small win patterns A to E are assigned 10%, 30%, 30%, 15%, and 15%.

Here, the small hit games executed when small hit patterns A to D stop (each of which is referred to as small hit games A to D) are "small hit games in which it is easy to win a V" as described above, and the small hit game executed when small hit pattern E stops (referred to as small hit game E) is "a small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V" as described above. In addition, the small hit V jackpot game (referred to as small hit V jackpot game A) when the ball enters a specific area in small hit game A is a 3R jackpot, the small hit V jackpot game (referred to as small hit V jackpot game B) when the ball enters a specific area in small hit game B is 10R, the small hit V jackpot game (referred to as small hit V jackpot game C) when the ball enters a specific area in small hit game C is 3R, and the small hit V jackpot game (referred to as small hit V jackpot game D) when the ball enters a specific area in small hit game D is 10R. Small hit game E is a small hit game in which V entry is difficult, but if the ball enters a specific area (the jackpot in this case is called small hit V jackpot game E), it will be a 3R jackpot. After the end of the jackpot game (3R jackpot, which is jackpot game A corresponding to jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, and 10R jackpot, which is jackpot game B corresponding to jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and the end of the small jackpot game, which is small jackpot V jackpot game A to D, the system transitions to a high base state, but after the end of the small jackpot game, which is small jackpot V jackpot game E, the system may be configured to transition to a low base state instead of transitioning to a high base state, or after the end of the jackpot game (3R jackpot, which is jackpot game corresponding to jackpot pattern A in the first special pattern, and 10R jackpot, which is jackpot game corresponding to jackpot pattern B in the second special pattern) and the end of the small jackpot game, which is small jackpot V jackpot game A to E, the system may be configured to transition to a high base state without fail.

Figure 63 shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment. Here, "normal mode" is a low base state, and the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol. "ST mode", "battle mode", "invincible battle mode", and "super invincible battle mode" are high base states (however, they also include pattern changes corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends), and the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol. In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the high base state to the low base state are a specified number of pattern changes (either the second special pattern changes 7 times or 255 times, or the first special pattern changes 10 times) and a specified number of small wins (for example, small win game A is executed once or 255 times, or small win game B is executed once or 255 times, or small win game C is executed once, or small win game D is executed once, or small win game E is executed once, 7 times, or 255 times).

When the first special symbol is hit in the normal mode (FIG. 63(a)), the game transitions to the ST mode after the end of the jackpot game A (FIG. 63(b)). The end condition a, which is the end condition for the high base state in the ST mode, is the following (a1) to (a9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (a1) to (a9) are satisfied, but when any of (a1) to (a9) is satisfied, the high base state ends.
(a1) The number of times the second special symbol changed (the number of consecutive miss changes) was 7 times; (a2) The number of times the small win game A was played (the number of times the small win symbol A was won) was 1 time; (a3) The number of times the small win game B was played (the number of times the small win symbol A was won) was 1 time; (a4) The number of times the small win game C was played (the number of times the small win symbol A was won) was 1 time; (a5) The number of times the small win game D was played (the number of times the small win symbol A was won) was 1 time; (a6) The number of times the small win game E was played (the number of times the small win symbol A was won) was 7 times. , the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 6th times (a7) The number of times the first special pattern changes (the number of consecutive miss changes) is 10 times (a8) A big win game (either big win game A or B) is played, but after the big win game or small win V big win game ends, the high base state is resumed (a9) A small win V big win game (any of small win V big win games A to E) is played, but after the big win game or small win V big win game ends, the high base state is resumed

In addition, the end timing of the high base state is the timing when the seventh pattern change of the second special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (a1) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern A stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (a2) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (a3) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern C stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (a4) is satisfied. When (a5) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern D stops is completed (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (a6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the 7th small winning pattern E stops is completed (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (a7) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 10th pattern change of the first special pattern is completed (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (a8) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the big winning pattern A or B stops is completed (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts). Here, when (a9) is satisfied, the high base state is already completed at the timing when the pattern change where the small winning patterns A to D stop is completed (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), so it will be omitted. As described above, in the ST mode, in any of the small win games A to D, the high base state ends at the start of the small win game, so the base state in a situation where the ball can enter the specific area (a situation where the large prize entry port P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball toward the specific area) is a low base state. In addition, in the small win game E, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) is a high base state until the specified number of times of 7 is reached, and after the specified number of times of 7 is reached, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) becomes a low base state. However, since the small win game E is a "small win game in which it is difficult to enter the V", and by design, it is almost impossible for the ball to enter the specific area during the small win game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small win game E.

ST mode is basically a high base state that continues until (a1) to (a9) are satisfied, but it should be noted that ST mode also applies during the pattern change corresponding to the reserved second special symbol that occurs during this high base state and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Specifically, if there are four reserved second special symbols when (a1) is satisfied, ST mode will continue even if the system transitions to the low base state until all four reserved symbols are consumed. This is because, as described later, the mode to which the mode is shifted upon the jackpot game or small jackpot V jackpot game related to the second special symbol that is won and executed in the low base state is common to the mode to which the mode is shifted upon the jackpot game or small jackpot V jackpot game related to the second special symbol that is won and executed in the high base state corresponding to the end condition a, so that the same presentation mode as the high base state before the end is also preferable during the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Therefore, if there is a reservation related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, all the pattern changes corresponding to the reservation are executed as miss variations, and then the mode is shifted to the normal mode (FIG. 63(d)). In addition, the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special pattern that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition a and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends may be presented as a summary change as described above.

When a jackpot (including small jackpot V jackpot) is hit with the first or second special symbol in ST mode (Fig. 63(c)), the game will transition to battle mode (Fig. 63(e)) or super invincible battle mode (Fig. 63(g)) after the jackpot game (including small jackpot V jackpot game) ends.

Specifically, when any of the small hit V big hit games A, B, C, and E is executed in ST mode, the mode transitions to battle mode, and when big hit game A or big hit game B is executed in ST mode, or when the small hit V big hit game D is executed, the mode transitions to super invincible battle mode.

End condition b, which is the end condition for the high base state in the battle mode, is the following (b1) to (b9). Note that the high base state ends not by satisfying all of (b1) to (b9), but by satisfying any one of (b1) to (b9).
(b1) The number of times the second special symbol fluctuates (the number of consecutive miss fluctuations) is 255 times; (b2) The number of times the small win game A is executed (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time; (b3) The number of times the small win game B is executed (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time; (b4) The number of times the small win game C is executed (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time; (b5) The number of times the small win game D is executed (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time; (b6) The number of times the small win game E is executed (the number of times the small win symbol The number of times that the first special symbol changes (the number of consecutive losing changes) is 10 times (b8). A big win game (either big win game A or B) is played, but after the big win game or the small win V big win game ends, the high base state is restored (b9). A small win V big win game (any of small win V big win games A to E) is played, but after the big win game or the small win V big win game ends, the high base state is restored.

In addition, the end timing of the high base state is the timing when the 255th pattern change of the second special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (b1) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern A stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (b2) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (b3) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern C stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (b4) is satisfied. When (b5) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern D stops (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (b6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern E stops (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (b7) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 10th pattern change of the first special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (b8) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the big winning pattern A or B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts). Here, when (b9) is satisfied, the high base state has already ended at the timing when the pattern change where the small winning patterns A to E stop ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), so it will be omitted. As described above, in battle mode, in all of small win games A to E, the high base state ends at the start of the small win game, so the base state in a situation where the ball can enter the specific area (when the large prize opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball toward the specific area) is a low base state.

Battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (b1) to (b9) are satisfied, but it should be noted that ST mode also applies during the pattern change corresponding to the reserved second special symbol that occurs during this high base state and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Specifically, if there are four reserved second special symbols when (b1) is satisfied (note that this almost never happens because a small hit is won first or a small hit V big hit game is played first), or if there are four reserved second special symbols when (b6) is satisfied, the game will be in battle mode even if it transitions to the low base state until all four reserved symbols are consumed. This is because, as described later, the mode to which the mode is shifted upon the jackpot game or small jackpot V jackpot game related to the second special symbol that is won and executed in the low base state is common to the mode to which the mode is shifted upon the jackpot game or small jackpot V jackpot game related to the second special symbol that is won and executed in the high base state corresponding to the end condition b, so that it is preferable to set the same presentation mode as the high base state before the end during the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Therefore, if there is a reservation related to the second special symbol that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends, all the pattern changes corresponding to the reservation are executed as miss variations, and then the mode is shifted to the normal mode (FIG. 63(i)). In addition, the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special pattern that occurs during the high base state corresponding to the end condition b and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends may be presented as a summary change as described above.

The end condition c, which is the end condition for the high base state in the super invincible battle mode, is the following (c1) to (c9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, but when any of (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, the high base state ends.
(c1) The number of times the second special symbol changes (the number of consecutive misses) is 255 times. (c2) The number of times the small win game A is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times. (c3) The number of times the small win game B is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times. (c4) The number of times the small win game C is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (c5) The number of times the small win game D is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (c6) Small win. The number of times game E is played (the number of times small win pattern A is won) is 255 times, and the high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times (c7). The number of times the first special pattern changes (the number of consecutive miss changes) is 10 times (c8). A jackpot game (either jackpot game A or B) is played, but after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the high base state is restored (c9). A small win V jackpot game (any of small win V jackpot games A to E) is played, but after the jackpot game or small win V jackpot game ends, the high base state is restored

In addition, the end timing of the high base state is the timing when the 255th pattern change of the second special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (c1) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the 255th small win pattern A stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (c2) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the 255th small win pattern B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (c3) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the 255th small win pattern B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (c4) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern C stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (c4) is satisfied. When (c5) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the pattern change at which the small win pattern D stops has ended (pattern stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the pattern fixation time); when (c6) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the pattern change at which the 255th small win pattern E stops has ended (pattern stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the pattern fixation time); when (c7) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the 10th pattern change of the first special pattern has ended (pattern stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the pattern fixation time); when (c8) is satisfied, it is the timing at which the pattern change at which the big win pattern A or B stops has ended (pattern stop timing, the timing immediately before the start of the pattern fixation time). When (c9) is satisfied, as described above, in the super invincible battle mode, in both small win games C and D, the high base state ends at the start of the small win game, so the base state in a situation where the ball can enter the specific area (a situation where the large prize entry port P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball toward the specific area) is a low base state. On the other hand, in small win games A, B, and E, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) is a high base state until the specified number of times of 255 is reached, and after the specified number of times of 255 is reached, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large winning opening P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) becomes a low base state (small win game E is a "small win game in which V entry is difficult," and since it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during small win game E by design, there is no need to consider the base state in small win game E).

The super invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (c1) to (c9) are satisfied, but it should be noted that the battle mode is applicable during the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special pattern that occurs during this high base state and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Specifically, if there are four reservations related to the second special pattern when (c1) is satisfied (note that this almost never happens because a small hit is won first or a small hit V big hit game is executed first), or if there are four reservations related to the second special pattern when (c4) or (c5) is satisfied and the game ball is not entered into the specific area, it is preferable to transition to the low base state and enter the battle mode until all four reservations are consumed. In addition, in FIG. 63, the transition (route) from the super invincible battle mode to the normal mode is omitted because it is almost impossible to transition to the normal mode by progressing the game normally (the player continues to hit the ball to the right so as not to miss the opportunity to score in the specific area).

When any of the small hit V big hit games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (FIG. 63(f)), the mode transitions to the battle mode again (FIG. 63(e)), and when the big hit game A or the big hit game B is executed in the battle mode, or when the small hit V big hit game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the mode transitions to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). Also, when any of the small hit V big hit games A, B, C, and E is executed in the battle mode (FIG. 63(f)), the mode transitions to the battle mode again (FIG. 63(e)), and when the big hit game A or the big hit game B is executed in the battle mode, or when the small hit V big hit game D is executed (FIG. 63(f)), the mode transitions to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)). In addition, in the super invincible battle mode, when the big win game A or the big win game B is executed, or when any of the small win V big win games A, B, D, and E is executed (FIG. 63(h)), the mode transitions again to the super invincible battle mode (FIG. 63(g)), and when the small win V big win game C is executed (FIG. 63(h)), the mode transitions to the battle mode (FIG. 63(e)).

The pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment is also equipped with a "rescue function." Specifically, the "rescue function" occurs when the variation stops (when the pattern fixation time has elapsed) for the 600th spin after the special game ends (after a small hit V jackpot or a jackpot game) (note that, as a variant, the "rescue function" may occur when 600 spins have elapsed since the high base state after the special game ends), and the machine transitions from normal mode to invincible battle mode (Figure 63 (j)).

End condition d, which is the end condition for the high base state in the invincible battle mode, is the following (d1) to (d9). Note that the high base state does not end when all of (d1) to (d9) are satisfied, but when any of (d1) to (d9) are satisfied, the high base state ends.
(d1) The number of times the second special symbol fluctuates (the number of consecutive miss fluctuations) is 255 times. (d2) The number of times the small win game A is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (d3) The number of times the small win game B is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (d4) The number of times the small win game C is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (d5) The number of times the small win game D is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 1 time. (d6) The number of times the small win game E is played (the number of times the small win symbol A is won) is 255 times. The high base state is maintained for the 1st to 254th times (d7). The number of times the first special symbol changes (the number of consecutive miss changes) is 10 times (d8). A jackpot game (either jackpot game A or B) is played. However, after the jackpot game or the small jackpot V jackpot game ends, the high base state is restored (d9). A small jackpot V jackpot game (any of the small jackpot V jackpot games A to E) is played. However, after the jackpot game or the small jackpot V jackpot game ends, the high base state is restored.

In addition, the end timing of the high base state is the timing when the 255th pattern change of the second special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (d1) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern A stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (d2) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (d3) is satisfied, the timing when the pattern change where the small win pattern C stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing immediately before the pattern fixation time starts) when (d4) is satisfied. When (d5) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the small winning pattern D stops (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (d6) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the 255th small winning pattern E stops (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (d7) is satisfied, it is the timing when the 10th pattern change of the first special pattern ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), when (d8) is satisfied, it is the timing when the pattern change where the big winning pattern A or B stops ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts). Here, when (d9) is satisfied, the high base state is already ended at the timing when the pattern change where the small winning patterns A to D stop ends (pattern stop timing, timing just before the pattern fixing time starts), so it will be omitted. As described above, in the invincible battle mode, in any of the small win games A to D, the high base state ends at the start of the small win game, so the base state in a situation where the ball can enter the specific area (a situation where the large prize entry port P751 is open and the opening/closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball toward the specific area) is a low base state. In addition, in the small win game E, until the specified number of times of 255 is reached, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large prize opening P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) is a high base state, and after the specified number of times of 255 is reached, the base state in the situation where the ball can enter the specific area (the large prize opening P751 is open and the opening and closing member P761 (valve member) has switched to a flow path that guides the ball to the specific area) becomes a low base state. However, since the small win game E is a "small win game in which it is difficult to enter the V", and by design, it is almost impossible to enter the specific area during the small win game E, there is no need to consider the base state in the small win game E.

The invincible battle mode is basically a high base state that continues until (d1) to (d9) are satisfied, but it should be noted that the battle mode is in effect during the pattern change corresponding to the reservation of the second special pattern that occurs during this high base state and is consumed in the low base state immediately after the high base state ends. Specifically, if there are four reservations related to the second special pattern when (d1) is satisfied (note that this almost never happens because a small hit is won first or a small hit V big hit game is executed first), or if there are four reservations related to the second special pattern when (d4) or (d5) is satisfied and the game ball is not placed in the specific area, it is preferable to transition to the low base state and enter the battle mode until all four reservations are consumed. In addition, in FIG. 63, the transition (route) from invincible battle mode to normal mode is omitted because it is almost impossible to transition to normal mode by progressing the game normally (by the player continuing to hit to the right to avoid missing the opportunity to score in the specific area).

Figure 64 shows the end condition of the high base state that is set after the end of a jackpot game. Note that end condition c when the "rescue function" is activated is omitted from Figure 64 because it is not set as a result of a jackpot game or a small jackpot V jackpot game.

Figures 64 (a-1) and (a-2) show what end conditions are set for the high base state (some of the end conditions a to d described above) to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, depending on the game state just before the start of the jackpot (in other words, the game state when the jackpot fluctuation begins) and the jackpot game type (whether it is jackpot pattern A or B).

Figure 64 (a-1) shows the end conditions for the high base state to which the reel transitions after jackpot game A or B ends when the reel starts to fluctuate in the low base state and then stops on jackpot pattern A or B, executing jackpot game A or B. After jackpot game A ends, end condition a is set (transition to ST mode), and after jackpot game A ends, end condition c is set (transition to super invincible battle mode).

Figure 64 (a-2) shows the end condition of the high base state to which the mode transitions after jackpot game A or B ends when the mode starts to fluctuate in the high base state and then stops on jackpot pattern A or B, executing jackpot game A or B. It shows that end condition c is set after jackpot game A ends (transition to super invincible battle mode), and end condition c is also set after the jackpot game ends (transition to super invincible battle mode).

Figures 64 (b-1) and (b-2) show what end conditions are set for the high base state (some of the end conditions a to d mentioned above) to which the game transitions after the end of a small hit V big hit game, depending on the game state just before the ball enters the specific area (just before the V enters) (in other words, the game state at the start of the small hit game) and the type of small hit game (which of the small hit patterns A to E it is).

Figure 64 (b-1) shows the end conditions for the high base state, which is entered when one of the small win patterns A to E stops after starting to fluctuate in the low base state or high base state, and one of the small win games A to E is executed in the low base state, and the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small win game A to E (in Figure 64, it is expressed as "small win game A → big win game", etc., but this is synonymous with small win V big win game A, etc.), and shows that after the small win V big win game A ends, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode), after the small win V big win game B ends, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode), after the small win V big win game C ends, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode), and after the small win V big win game D ends, end condition c is set (transition to super invincible battle mode). In addition, the small hit game E is a "small hit game in which it is difficult to get a V win", and since it is designed so that it is nearly impossible for the ball to enter a specific area while the small hit game E is being played, the base state after the small hit V big hit game E ends is not shown in Figure 64 (shown as "-"), but end condition b or end condition c may be set.

Figure 64 (b-2) shows the end condition of the high base state to which the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small hit game A-E after starting to fluctuate in the low base state or the high base state and one of the small hit patterns A-E stops, and one of the small hit games A-E is executed in the high base state (in Figure 64, it is expressed as "small hit game A → big hit game", which is synonymous with small hit V big hit game A, etc.), and shows that after the end of the small hit V big hit game A, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode), and after the end of the small hit V big hit game B, end condition b is set (transition to battle mode). As mentioned above, for the small hit game C and the small hit game D, since they are not in the high base state during the execution of the small hit game, they are annotated in Figure 64 as "no applicable event". In addition, small win game E is a "small win game in which V winning is difficult," and by design, it is nearly impossible for the ball to enter a specific area while small win game E is being played. Therefore, the base state after the end of small win V big win game E is not shown in FIG. 64 (shown as "-"), but end condition b or end condition c may be set.

The eighth embodiment of the pachinko game machine P is configured as described above, and by varying the end conditions of the high base state, various gameplay characteristics can be realized even in the same high base state. Specifically, in the small win game D, regardless of the base state when the small win pattern D is won (when the fluctuation starts), the ball always enters a low base state when it enters a specific area, and thereafter, end condition c is set as the end condition of the high base state. In addition, in the small hit games A and B, even if the base state is a high base state when the small hit symbols A and B are won (when the fluctuation starts), the ball will always be in a low base state or a high base state when it enters a specific area (because the fluctuation of the first small hit symbol A and B win when the end condition a, b, and d are set, or the fluctuation of the 255th small hit symbol A and B win when the end condition c is set, will transition to a low base state when the fluctuation stops). If the ball enters the specific area in a low base state, end condition b is set as the end condition of the high base state thereafter, and if the ball enters the specific area in a high base state, end condition c is set as the end condition of the high base state thereafter. Furthermore, in the small hit game D, regardless of the base state when the small hit symbol D is won (when the fluctuation starts), the ball will always be in a low base state when it enters a specific area, and end condition b is set as the end condition of the high base state thereafter. For these small hit games A to D, since they are small hit games in which it is easy to win a V, the player can almost win a small hit V jackpot. In addition, with the small hit game E (winning a small hit pattern E) in which it is difficult to win a V jackpot in a high base state as a trigger, that is, with the small hit game in which it is almost impossible for the player to win a small hit V jackpot as a trigger, it is possible to realize both cases in which the high base state is maintained and cases in which the player transitions to a low base state (for the change in the seventh small hit pattern E win when the end condition a is set, or the change in the first small hit pattern E win when the end condition b is set, or the change in the 255th small hit pattern E win when the end condition c or d is set, the change stops and the player transitions to a low base state).

More specifically, in the "ST mode," the big win symbol or small win symbol (small win symbol A-D) stops while the second special symbol changes seven times, realizing the gameplay of whether or not a big win game or a small win V big win game can be won. In the "battle mode," the big win symbol or small win symbol (small win symbol A-E) can be almost certainly won by the time the second special symbol changes 255 times, realizing the gameplay of whether or not a big win symbol or small win symbol A-D (small win symbol corresponding to a small win game where it is easy to win a V) can be won before small win symbol E (small win symbol corresponding to a small win game where it is difficult to win a V). In addition, in the "invincible battle mode", the big win symbol or small win symbol (small win symbols A to D) can be almost certainly won by the time the second special symbol changes 255 times or the small win symbol E is won 255 times, so that it is possible to realize a game in which the big win game or the small win V big win game can be almost certainly won. Furthermore, when the small win symbol D is won in the "ST mode", "battle mode", or "invincible battle mode" and then the small win V big win game D is executed, the game transitions to the "super invincible battle mode" after the small win V big win game D ends. In this "super invincible battle mode", it is possible to almost certainly win the big win pattern or the small win pattern (small win pattern A to D) by the time the second special pattern changes 255 times or the small win pattern E is won 255 times, so it is possible to realize a game in which it is almost certainly possible to win a big win game or a small win V big win game, and it is also possible to execute the big win game A or B, execute the small win V big win game A by winning the small win pattern A, execute the small win pattern B by winning the small win pattern B, and execute the small win pattern B by winning the small win pattern B. When small win V jackpot game B is executed by winning small win pattern A, and when small win V jackpot game D is executed by winning small win pattern D, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the game then transitions to "super invincible battle mode" again (in other words, unless small win V jackpot game C is executed by winning small win pattern C, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the "super invincible battle mode" loops, excluding the number of fluctuations and the number of times small win pattern E is won).

Figure 65 shows an example of the ST mode. In Figure 65(a), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed, and the "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a high base state). In addition, the message "Find the treasure within 7 spins!" is displayed to suggest or inform the player that the game is aimed at a big win or small win (excluding small win symbol E) within 7 spins. Next, in Figure 65(b), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has won one of the small win symbols A to C are displayed, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "666". A treasure chest is displayed (not shown) at a timing (during the change) before "666" is stopped, and then "Treasure found! Battle mode GET!" is displayed, which indicates that one of the small win patterns A to C has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the game will move to battle mode after the small win V big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 65(c), a decorative pattern and a simple pattern are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that has been won by either the small win pattern D or the big win pattern B, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "777". Five treasure chests are displayed (not shown) at a timing (during the change) before "777" is stopped, and then "A huge amount of treasure found! Get the super invincible battle mode!" is displayed, indicating that either the small win pattern D or the big win pattern B has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the small win V big win game ends, or that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 65(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern on the seventh rotation in the ST mode are stopped, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "323". A mouse is displayed (not shown) before the "323" stops (during the change), and then the message "No treasure found... Returning to normal mode..." is displayed, informing or suggesting to the player that they did not win the big win symbol B or the small win symbols A-D during ST mode, and that they will be returning to normal mode.

Since the ST mode is entered after the end of jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol in a low base state results in a winning/losing lottery, there is a possibility that reserved numbers related to the first special symbol exist (remain) immediately after entering the ST mode. However, in order to be able to smoothly move to a game mainly based on the second special symbol, if the winning/losing lottery for reserved numbers related to the existing first special symbol results in a losing number, it is desirable to set the fluctuation time to an extremely short period of time (for example, a uniform loss fluctuation of 1 second, an average loss fluctuation of 2 seconds, etc.).

Figure 66 shows an example of a performance in the battle mode. In Figure 66(a), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (high base state). In addition, by displaying "Continue until you encounter an enemy!", the player is suggested or informed that the game is a game in which the player aims for a big win or a small win (small win symbols A to E) within 255 spins (within a number of spins that is almost impossible to reach), and that the game will not switch to the normal mode until the small win symbol E is won. Next, in Figure 66(b), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has won one of the small win symbols A to C are displayed, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing (during the change) before "666" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character fights back and wins in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character while being attacked by the enemy character (not shown), and then "Defeat! Battle mode continues!" is displayed, suggesting or informing the player that one of the small win patterns A to C has been won, and that by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and that the game will move to battle mode after the small win V big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 66(c), a decorative pattern and a simple pattern are displayed corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that has been won by either the small win pattern D or the big win pattern B, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "777". At a timing (during the change) before "777" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character wins by overwhelming the enemy character without any attacks from the enemy character in a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character (not shown), and then "Complete victory! Get the super invincible battle mode!" is displayed, indicating that either the small win symbol D or the big win symbol B has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the small win V big win game ends, or that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 66(d), a decorative symbol and a simple symbol are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special symbol that has won the small win symbol E, and both the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "323". Before the "323" stops (while it is changing), a defeat scene is displayed in which an ally character is attacked by an enemy character in a battle scene between the ally character and the enemy character and is defeated (not shown), and then the message "Defeat... Returning to normal mode..." is displayed, suggesting or informing the player that they have won small win symbol E and that they will now transition to normal mode.

In addition, since the battle mode is entered after the completion of the jackpot game A, which is executed when the winning/losing lottery for the first special pattern in a high base state results in a jackpot, or after the completion of the jackpot game B, which is executed when the winning/losing lottery for the second special pattern in a low base state or high base state results in a jackpot, or after the completion of the small win V jackpot games A, B, and C, which are executed when a ball enters a specific area during a small win game, which is executed when the winning/losing lottery for the second special pattern in a low base state or high base state results in a small win, and since the battle mode is entered after passing through the ST mode, the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, which employs ball entry order consumption control, will have no reserved balls related to the first special pattern at the time of entering the battle mode (unless the player intentionally hits to the left to cause the ball to enter the first start winning port P711). Therefore, in order to draw attention to smoothly proceeding with the game mainly based on the second special symbol in the battle mode (more specifically, if the ball enters the first start winning port P711 by hitting it to the left despite the situation where it should be hit to the right, the progress of the battle mode will be delayed due to the long-term variable display of the first special symbol, so that the player will experience this event and proceed with the game carefully so as not to repeat the same event), it is preferable to set the variable time of the first special symbol during the battle mode to a very long time (e.g., the variable time of the variable time is uniformly 300 seconds, the variable time of the variable time is 90 seconds on average, etc.). In this case, rather than not performing any special performance, for example, in the case of a variable time of 300 seconds, a special performance (e.g., a performance in which an ally character is dancing) dedicated to long-term variation that does not appear in the variable display of the second special symbol is always performed for the first 270 seconds, and in the remaining 30 seconds, a performance in which an ally character searches for an enemy character (a performance in which the enemy character cannot be found) is always performed or is performed with a high probability (e.g., 75%). This effect of the ally character searching for the enemy character is also executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the battle mode, and in the case of a miss variation of the second special symbol, this effect of the ally character searching for the enemy character may be executed with a low probability (for example, 20%). Note that the effect of the ally character searching for the enemy character suggests or informs the player that it is a miss if the enemy character is not found, and suggests or informs the player that it is a big win or a small win if the enemy character is found. In addition, for example, in the case of a miss variation of 300 seconds, during the above-mentioned special effect, a remaining time display (for example, a display in which the number of seconds is gradually subtracted from "270 seconds remaining") may be displayed to suggest or inform the player of the number of seconds remaining until the special effect ends. During battle mode, the player may be able to select a song to play by operating the effect button P381 or the cross key P383, and the period during which the song can be selected is a period other than the "effect of an ally character searching for an enemy character" and the "battle effect" during the change of the first special symbol and the change of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the special effect, the song can always be selected, and although the change lasts for a long time, it is designed not to bore the player. During battle mode, the change time of the second special symbol is a maximum of 120 seconds, and during those 120 seconds, either the "effect of an ally character searching for an enemy character" or the "battle effect" is always executed, and only the first 20 seconds during which these effects are not executed is a period during which the song can be selected.

Figure 67 shows an example of the performance in the super invincible battle mode. In Figure 67(a), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed, and the "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Furthermore, you will not lose!", the game suggests or informs the player that the game is a game in which the player aims for a big win or a small win (small win symbols A to D) within 255 spins (within a number of spins that is almost impossible to reach), and that the game does not transition to the normal mode even if the small win symbol E is won. Next, in Figure 67(b), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has won the small win symbol C are displayed, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing (during the change) before "666" is displayed, a draw effect is displayed (not shown) in which the friendly character fights back against the enemy character's attack in a battle between the friendly character and the enemy character, resulting in a draw. After that, "Draw! Next time, battle mode!" is displayed, which indicates that the small win symbol has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the game will move to battle mode after the small win V big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(c), a decorative symbol and a simple symbol are displayed corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special symbol that has won either the small win symbol A, B, D or the big win symbol B, and both the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At a timing (during the change) before "777" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character wins by overwhelming the enemy character without any attacks from the enemy character in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character (not shown), and then "Complete victory! Super invincible battle mode continues!" is displayed, indicating that either the small win pattern A, B, D or the big win pattern B has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the small win V big win game ends, or that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that won the small win pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "461". In this case, no particular battle effect occurs, and the same effect (no effect) is displayed as if the winning/losing lottery was a loss, and the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! You will not lose!" continues to be displayed. This suggests or notifies the player that they have lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue.

Figure 68 shows an example of the performance in the super invincible battle mode. In Figure 67(a), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed, and the "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Furthermore, you will not lose!", the game suggests or informs the player that the game is a game in which the player aims for a big win or a small win (small win symbols A to D) within 255 spins (within a number of spins that is almost impossible to reach), and that the game does not transition to the normal mode even if the small win symbol E is won. Next, in Figure 67(b), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has won the small win symbol C are displayed, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing (during the change) before "666" is displayed, a draw effect is displayed (not shown) in which the friendly character fights back against the enemy character's attack in a battle between the friendly character and the enemy character, resulting in a draw. After that, "Draw! Next time, battle mode!" is displayed, which indicates that the small win symbol has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the game will move to battle mode after the small win V big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(c), a decorative symbol and a simple symbol are displayed corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special symbol that has won either the small win symbol A, B, D or the big win symbol B, and both the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are displayed as "777". At a timing (during the change) before "777" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character wins by overwhelming the enemy character without any attacks from the enemy character in the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character (not shown), and then "Complete victory! Super invincible battle mode continues!" is displayed, indicating that either the small win pattern A, B, D or the big win pattern B has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or informed that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the small win V big win game ends, or that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 67(d), the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that won the small win pattern E, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "461". In this case, no particular battle effect occurs, and the same effect (no effect) is displayed as if the winning/losing lottery was a loss, and the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! You will not lose!" continues to be displayed. This suggests or notifies the player that they have lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the super invincible battle mode will continue.

Figure 68 shows an example of the performance in the invincible battle mode. In Figure 68(a), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed, and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is a situation in which the player should hit the right (in a high base state). In addition, by displaying "Continue until you encounter an enemy! Furthermore, you will not lose!", the game suggests or informs the player that the game is a game in which the player aims for a big win or a small win (small win symbols A to D) within 255 spins (within a number of spins that is almost impossible to reach), and that the game does not transition to the normal mode even if the small win symbol E is won. Next, in Figure 68(b), the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has won one of the small win symbols A to C are displayed, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "666". At a timing (during the change) before "666" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character fights back and wins in a battle between an ally character and an enemy character while being attacked by the enemy character (not shown), and then "Defeat! Next time, battle mode!" is displayed, suggesting or informing the player that one of the small win patterns A to C has been won, and that by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and that the game will move to battle mode after the small win V big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 68(c), a decorative pattern and a simple pattern are displayed corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that has been won by either the small win pattern D or the big win pattern B, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "777". At a timing (during the change) before "777" is displayed, a victory effect is displayed in which the ally character wins by overwhelming the enemy character without any attacks from the enemy character in a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character (not shown), and then "Complete victory! Next time, super invincible battle mode!" is displayed, indicating that either the small win pattern D or the big win pattern B has been won, and by making the ball enter a specific area in the small win game that is executed after this, a small win V big win game is executed, and the player is suggested or notified that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the small win V big win game ends, or that the game will move to the super invincible battle mode after the big win game ends. Next, in FIG. 68(d), a decorative pattern and a simple pattern corresponding to the stop display of the change of the second special pattern that won the small win pattern E are displayed, and both the decorative pattern and the simple pattern are displayed as "461". In this case, no particular battle effect occurs, and the same effect (no effect) is displayed as if the winning/losing lottery was a loss, and the message "Continue until you encounter an enemy! You will not lose!" continues to be displayed. This suggests or notifies the player that they have lost or won the small winning symbol E, and that the invincible battle mode will continue.

In the pachinko game machine P of the eighth embodiment, the winning fluctuation time (including the pattern fixing time) of the normal symbol in the high base state is 2 seconds, and the normal electric device P770 opens once for 3 seconds (note that it is forcibly closed when one ball enters). Furthermore, whether in the low base state or the high base state, the pattern fixing time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is normally set to a uniform 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of symbol (whether it is a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a losing symbol), but in some situations the pattern fixing time is longer, 7 seconds. These some situations are: (1) when the 10th spin of the first special pattern in ST mode, battle mode, invincible battle mode, or super invincible battle mode is a miss variation; (2) when the 7th spin of the second special pattern in ST mode is a miss variation or a variation in which the small win pattern E stops and is displayed; (3) when the 255th spin of the second special pattern in battle mode is a miss variation; (4) when the second special pattern in battle mode is a variation in which the small win pattern E stops and is displayed; and (5) when the 255th spin of the second special pattern in Invincible Battle mode or super invincible Battle mode is a miss variation or a variation in which the small win pattern E stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, in the case of a change in the trigger for transitioning from a high base state to a low base state (more precisely, a change in the trigger for transitioning from a high base state to a low base state other than winning a small jackpot game that is likely to result in a V win), the first or second special symbol does not start to change until 7 seconds have passed since transitioning to the low base state. In other words, the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol are not consumed for 7 seconds after transitioning to the low base state, and during this 7-second symbol fixation time, the low base state is already in effect, so the reserve number of the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number (4 symbols) of reserved symbols, and the transition from the high base state to the low base state is not possible. Even if the transition is made to the above, an event will not occur in which one reserved symbol related to the second special symbol is consumed and a new symbol is generated in the low base state (for example, even if a winning symbol for a normal symbol stops in the high base state just before the symbol fixing time starts and the normal electric device P770 opens for three seconds, the three seconds of opening are during the symbol fixing time, which is the low base state, so even if the ball enters the normal electric device P770, the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol are still at the upper limit, so an event will not occur in which one reserved symbol related to the second special symbol is consumed and a new symbol is generated in the low base state).

[Ninth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment to the eighth embodiment, various pachinko gaming machines P with various playability have been described, but the ninth embodiment is an example of a machine in which further improvements have been made to the playability and presentation content of special games and high base states in order to further improve playability, and only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail below, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Note that, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the ninth embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the base technology or elements described in this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

[9-1 Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 9-1 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 9-1 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the probability of a small win is 299/300, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is one.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game is a small win game in which it is easy to get a V in a specific area (it does not have a small win game in which it is difficult to get a V). In other words, if a ball enters the large win device P750 during the execution of a small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the execution of a large win game (also called a small win V big win or small win V big win game). The number of prize balls in the large win device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls.
(F) The types of jackpot games executed by the jackpot related to the first special symbol include jackpot game A and jackpot game B, with a ratio of 51:49. The types of jackpot games executed by the jackpot related to the second special symbol include jackpot game C and jackpot game D, with a ratio of 50:50. The types of small hit V jackpot games executed by the small hit related to the second special symbol include small hit V jackpot game A (executed when a ball enters a specific area during the execution of small hit game A) and small hit V jackpot game B (executed when a ball enters a specific area during the execution of small hit game B), with a ratio of 50:50. In addition, jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, jackpot games C and D are 10R jackpot games, and small jackpot V jackpot game A and small jackpot V jackpot game B are 10R small jackpot V jackpot games.
(G) It has a low base state and a high base state. Big hit game A, big hit game B, small hit V big hit game A transition to the high base state after the big hit game ends. Big hit game B, big hit game D, small hit V big hit game B transition to the low base state after the big hit game ends. The high base state continues until the first special pattern changes 10 times, or until the second special pattern changes 255 times, or until a small hit A or B is won once (if the small hit V big hit game A or small hit V big hit game B is executed and the ball does not enter the specific area, or before the start of the small hit game A or small hit game B, it transitions to the low base state).

Figure 69 shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine P of the 9-1 embodiment. The "battle mode" is a mode corresponding to the high base state to which the mode is entered after the first special symbol becomes a jackpot in the low base state and jackpot game A is executed. Immediately after the transition to the battle mode, the second special symbol has not changed and there is no reserved symbol related to the second special symbol. Here, the normal electric device P770, which has become easier to enter, opens and the ball enters the second start winning hole P721, starting the change of the second special symbol (referred to as the change), and by further entering the second start winning hole P721, one reserved symbol related to the second special symbol is generated (referred to as reserve 1).

In the battle mode, if the change is a change that triggers the execution of small hit game A and reserve 1 is also a reserve that triggers the execution of small hit game A, or if the change is a change that triggers the execution of small hit game B and reserve 1 is a reserve that triggers the execution of small hit game A, a small hit type of reserve 1 is judged in advance (pre-judgment) during the change or during the small hit game executed after the change stops, and based on the result of the pre-judgment (result of the pre-judgment), a performance in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is displayed during the execution of small hit V big hit game A or small hit V big hit game B executed after the change stops, and the high base state is again transitioned to after the execution of small hit V big hit game A executed after reserve 1 is consumed, that is, the continuation of the battle mode is suggested or notified (Fig. 69 (a) and (b)).

In the battle mode, if the change is a change that triggers the execution of the small win game B and the reserve 1 is also a reserve that triggers the execution of the small win game B, a small win type of the reserve 1 is judged in advance (pre-judgment) during the change or during the small win game executed after the change stops, and based on the result of the pre-judgment (result of the pre-judgment), during the execution of the small win V big win game B executed after the change stops, a performance in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed, and after the execution of the small win V big win game B executed after the reserve 1 is consumed, a transition to a low base state is made, that is, it is suggested or notified that the battle mode ends and the transition to the normal mode, which is in a low base state and has no reserve related to the second special pattern (Fig. 69 (c) and (d)).

In battle mode, if the change is a change that triggers the execution of small win game A and reserve 1 is a reserve that triggers the execution of small win game B, a pre-reading judgment (pre-determination) is made of the type of small win for reserve 1 during the change or during the small win game that is executed after the change stops, and based on the result of the pre-reading judgment (result of the pre-determination), a performance in which the ally character draws with the enemy character is displayed during the execution of small win V big win game B that is executed after the change stops, and when reserve 1 is in a high base state while it is being consumed (changing), the normal electric device P770, which has become easier to enter, opens, allowing the ball to enter the second start winning port P721 again, suggesting or notifying that a situation will arise in which a reserve related to a new second special pattern can be created (Figure 69 (e)). Thereafter, if the hold related to the newly generated second special pattern is a hold that will trigger the execution of small hit game A, during the execution of small hit V big hit game B that is executed after hold 1 is consumed, an effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed, and after the execution of small hit V big hit game A that is executed after the hold related to the newly generated second special pattern is consumed, the game will transition again to a high base state, in other words, it is suggested or notified that the battle mode will continue (Figures 69 (f) and (g)). On the other hand, if the reserve related to the newly generated second special pattern is the reserve that will trigger the execution of small win game B, during the execution of small win V big win game B that is executed after reserve 1 is consumed, an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed, and after the execution of small win V big win game B that is executed after the reserve related to the newly generated second special pattern is consumed, a transition to a low base state is made, that is, a transition to a normal mode in which the battle mode ends and there is a low base state and there is no reserve related to the second special pattern is suggested or notified (FIG. 69 (h), (i)).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko game machine P in the 9-1st embodiment can realize various effects according to the combination of the fluctuation and reserved 1 in the high base state (combination of small hit types), and can give the feeling of winning balls (two small hit V jackpot games) associated with the effects. The small hit V jackpot game that is executed after the fluctuation ends may be called the "first small hit V jackpot game," and the small hit V jackpot game that is executed after reserved 1 is consumed may be called the "later small hit V jackpot game."

Figure 70 shows an example of a presentation corresponding to the route to victory in battle mode (an example of a presentation in which the change in question is a change that triggers the execution of small win game A and reserve 1 is also a reserve that triggers the execution of small win game A).

First, the display shows the changes in the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the change in the second special symbol, and a very small "→" arrow symbol is displayed in the top right of the screen, informing the player that the current game situation is one in which the player should hit to the right (high base state). Also, the instruction "Charge!" is displayed, encouraging the player to create a hold for the second special symbol. Here, the round images in the bottom right of the screen show that the round image on the left indicates whether the change is being made (if it is filled in black, it indicates that the change is being made), and the round image on the right indicates whether hold 1 has been created (hold or not) (if it is filled in black, it indicates that hold 1 has been created) (Fig. 70(a)).

After that, when Reserve 1 is generated, the message "Charge Complete!" is displayed to indicate that Reserve 1 has been generated, and then the fluctuation stops, and the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol are displayed as stopped, with both the decorative and simple symbols being displayed as "6V6". After that, the message "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction to fire the game ball at (a specific area of) the big prize opening P751, and further, the message "Preparing for Battle Bonus" is displayed, indicating that a small prize V big prize game will be executed if the ball enters the specific area (Fig. 70 (b)).

After that, if the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small hit game, the message "Battle Bonus" will be displayed, indicating that a small hit V jackpot game will be executed, and the first round will begin. At this point, it is unclear to the player whether he will win or lose the battle (whether the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed due to the consumption of reserved 1 will be small hit V jackpot game A or small hit V jackpot game B). In addition, the message "If you win, you get a victory bonus! Furthermore, battle mode continues!" will be displayed, indicating the role of the effects that will be performed during the execution of the small hit V jackpot game (what kind of effects would be advantageous for the player) (Figure 70 (c)).

After that, by progressing to the fifth round, it is announced that the battle has been won, and at the same time, the message "Next time, win bonus!" is displayed, indicating that the small win V big win game scheduled to be executed due to the consumption of reserved 1 is small win V big win game A (Figure 70 (d)).

After that, the previous small hit V big hit game ends, transitioning to a high base state, and reserve 1 is consumed, and the message "Waiting for victory bonus..." is displayed, indicating that small hit V big hit game A is scheduled to be executed as the next small hit V big hit game (Figure 70 (e)).

Then, the fluctuation associated with the consumption of reserved 1 stops, and the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol are displayed as stopped, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "3V3". Then, "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing the player to fire the game ball at the large prize hole P751 (specific area), and further, "Winning bonus preparation in progress!" is displayed, indicating that if the ball enters the specific area, a small prize V big prize game A will be executed (Fig. 70 (f)).

After that, when the ball enters a specific area during the small hit game, the message "Victory Bonus" is displayed, indicating that the small hit V big hit game A will be executed, and the first round will begin. In addition, after the small hit V big hit game A ends, the game will transition to the high base state again, i.e., the battle mode will continue, and the message "Battle mode continues after bonus" is displayed (Figure 70 (g)). After that, during the big hit end demo of the small hit V big hit game A, the game will transition to the high base state again after the small hit V big hit game A ends, indicating that the battle mode will continue, and the message "Battle mode continues!!!" is displayed (Figure 70 (h)).

Figure 71 shows an example of a presentation corresponding to the route of a battle defeat in battle mode (an example of a presentation in which the change in question is a change that triggers the execution of small win game B and reserve 1 is also a reserve that triggers the execution of small win game B). Note that since Figures 71(a)-(c) are the same as Figures 70(a)-(c), a description will be omitted.

After Fig. 71(c), by progressing to the 5th round, it is announced that the battle has been lost, and at the same time, the message "Next time, Defeat Bonus" is displayed, indicating that the small hit V big hit game scheduled to be executed due to the consumption of reserved 1 is small hit V big hit game B (Fig. 71(d)).

After that, the previous small hit V big hit game ends, transitioning to a high base state, and reserve 1 is consumed, and the message "Waiting for defeat bonus..." is displayed, indicating that small hit V big hit game B is scheduled to be executed as the next small hit V big hit game (Figure 71 (e)).

Then, the fluctuation associated with the consumption of reserved 1 stops, and the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol are displayed as stopped, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "4V4". Then, "Aim for V" is displayed, which is an instruction display instructing the player to fire the game ball at the large prize hole P751 (specific area), and further, "Defeat bonus preparation in progress" is displayed, indicating that if the ball enters the specific area, a small prize V big prize game B will be executed (Fig. 71 (f)).

After that, when the ball enters a specific area during the small hit game, the display shows "Defeat Bonus" indicating that the small hit V big hit game B will be executed, and the first round begins. Also, after the small hit V big hit game B ends, the display shows "Normal mode after bonus..." indicating that the game will transition to a low base state, that is, the battle mode will end and the game will transition to normal mode (Fig. 71 (g)). After that, during the big hit end demo of the small hit V big hit game B, the display shows "Battle mode end...to normal mode" indicating that the game will transition to a low base state, that is, the battle mode will end and the game will transition to normal mode (Fig. 71 (h)).

Figure 72 shows an example of a presentation corresponding to the route of a battle draw (route of the final battle) in battle mode (an example of a presentation in which the change in question is a change that triggers the execution of small win game A and reserve 1 is a reserve that triggers the execution of small win game B). Note that Figure 72(a) is the same as Figure 70(c), which follows Figures 70(a)-(b), so a description of it will be omitted.

After Fig. 72(b), by progressing to the 5th round, it is announced that the battle has ended in a draw, and at the same time, the display shows "Next time, final battle mode" indicating that reserved 1 will be consumed in the high base state (the change related to the second special pattern corresponding to reserved 1 will be made in the high base state), in other words, that the previous small hit V jackpot game is small hit V jackpot game A, and the subsequent small hit V jackpot game is small hit V jackpot game B (Fig. 72(b)).

Afterwards, during the jackpot end demo of the previous small hit V jackpot game, the message "Entering the final battle mode!!!" is displayed, indicating that reserved 1 will be consumed in the high base state (the change related to the second special pattern corresponding to reserved 1 will be performed in the high base state), in other words, indicating that the previous small hit V jackpot game is small hit V jackpot game A and the subsequent small hit V jackpot game is small hit V jackpot game B (Fig. 72 (c)).

After that, the previous small hit V big hit game ends, the system transitions to a high base state, and reserve 1 is consumed, leading to the display of the instruction "Charge again!", encouraging the user to create a new reserve for the second special symbol (Fig. 72 (d)).

After that, a new reservation for the second special symbol is created, and the message "Charge Complete!" is displayed. After that, the fluctuation associated with the consumption of reservation 1 stops, and the decorative and simple symbols corresponding to the stopped display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol are displayed as stopped, and both the decorative and simple symbols are displayed as "6V6". After that, the instruction display "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which instructs the player to fire the game ball aiming at the large prize hole P751 (specific area), and further, the message "Final Battle Bonus Preparation in Progress" is displayed, indicating that a small prize V jackpot game will be executed if the ball enters the specific area (Fig. 72 (e)).

After that, if the ball enters a specific area during the execution of the small hit game, the message "Final Battle Bonus" will be displayed, indicating that a small hit V jackpot game will be executed, and the first round will begin. At this point, it is unclear to the player whether he will win or lose the battle (whether the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by consuming the reserved number related to the new second special pattern will be small hit V jackpot game A or small hit V jackpot game B). In addition, the message "If you win, you get a victory bonus! Furthermore, battle mode continues!" will be displayed, indicating the role of the effects performed during the execution of the small hit V jackpot game (what kind of effects would be advantageous for the player if displayed) (Figure 72 (f)).

After that, if the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by consuming the reserved number related to the new second special pattern is the small hit V jackpot game A, the game will proceed to the 5th round to inform you that you have won the battle, and at the same time, the message "Next time, win bonus!" will be displayed, indicating that the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by consuming the reserved number related to the new second special pattern is the small hit V jackpot game A (Fig. 72 (g-1)). On the other hand, if the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by consuming the reserved number related to the new second special pattern is the small hit V jackpot game B, the game will proceed to the 5th round to inform you that you have lost the battle, and at the same time, the message "Next time, lose bonus" will be displayed, indicating that the small hit V jackpot game scheduled to be executed by consuming the reserved number related to the new second special pattern is the small hit V jackpot game B (Fig. 72 (g-2)).

[Example 9-2]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 9-2 embodiment employs the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications. The pachinko gaming machine P in the 9-2 embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a big win is 1/300 (no high probability state is provided), the probability of a small win is 299/300, the number of reserved first special symbols is 4, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 4.
(D) "Second special pattern (special pattern 2) priority consumption control" is adopted.
(E) The small win game is a small win game in which it is easy to get a V in a specific area (it does not have a small win game in which it is difficult to get a V). In other words, if a ball enters the large win device P750 during the execution of a small win game, the ball will almost certainly enter the specific area, and this will trigger the execution of a large win game (also called a small win V big win or small win V big win game). The number of prize balls in the large win device P750 is 10 balls, and the specified number (count) is 10 balls.
(F) The types of jackpot games executed by the jackpot related to the first special symbol are jackpot game A and jackpot game B, with a ratio of 51:49. The types of jackpot games executed by the jackpot related to the second special symbol are jackpot game C and jackpot game D, with a ratio of 25:75. The types of small hit V jackpot games executed by the small hit related to the second special symbol are small hit V jackpot game A (executed when a ball enters a specific area during the execution of small hit game A) and small hit V jackpot game B (executed when a ball enters a specific area during the execution of small hit game B), with a ratio of 25:75. In addition, jackpot games A and B are 5R jackpot games, jackpot games C and D are 5R jackpot games, and small hit V jackpot game A and small hit V jackpot game B are 5R small hit V jackpot games.
(G) It has a low base state and a high base state. Big win game A, big win game B, and small win V big win game A transition to the high base state after the big win game ends. Big win game B, big win game D, and small win V big win game B transition to the low base state after the big win game ends. The high base state continues until the first special symbol changes 10 times or the second special symbol changes once.

Figure 73 shows the first half of an example of a presentation in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment, and Figure 74 shows the second half of an example of a presentation in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 9-2 embodiment (continuation of Figure 73 (h)).

First, in the low base state, the first special symbol is drawn as a jackpot, and the game moves to the high base state after the execution of the jackpot game A is completed. After that, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in a situation where no reserved balls related to the second special symbol are generated, the simple symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed (the decorative symbol is not displayed), and a very small "→" symbol indicating an arrow is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, notifying the player that the current game situation is a situation where the player should hit the right (in the high base state). In addition, an instruction is displayed saying "Charge!!!", encouraging the player to generate a reserved ball related to the second special symbol. Here, the leftmost circular image at the bottom of the screen indicates whether the corresponding change (current change) is being executed (if it is filled with black, it indicates that the corresponding change is being executed), and the other circular images indicate whether the reserved balls related to the second special symbol are generated (reserved or not) (if it is filled with black, it indicates that a reserved ball is generated). In addition, although this change is considered to be the change that will trigger the execution of small win game B, the player is not suggested or informed of this at this point (Figure 73 (a)).

After that, four reserved symbols related to the second special symbol are generated, and the message "Charge Complete!" is displayed, indicating that the reserved symbols have reached the upper limit. Then, the fluctuation stops, and a simple symbol corresponding to the stopped fluctuation of the second special symbol is displayed, and "6V6" is displayed. After the fluctuation ends, the message "Super Bonus Waiting" is displayed, indicating that a small win V big win game will be played. Here, the four reserved symbols are called Reserve 1, Reserve 2, Reserve 3, and Reserve 4 in order of the time they are consumed. Note that Reserves 1, 2, and 4 are reserved symbols that will trigger the execution of Small Win Game B, and Reserve 3 is reserved symbol that will trigger the execution of Small Win Game A, but the player is not suggested or informed of this at this point (Fig. 73 (b)).

After that, when the fluctuation is over, the small win game is executed, and the instruction display "Aim for V!!!" is displayed, which instructs the player to shoot the game ball at the large winning port P751 (specific area), and further, the display "Super bonus preparation!" is displayed, indicating that the small win V big win game will be executed if the ball enters the specific area (Figure 73 (c)).

After that, by the ball entering the specific area, a small hit V big hit game is executed, and during the big hit start demo, "Super Bonus" is displayed, and an image indicating that 45 stars have been acquired is also displayed. Each star represents one round, which means that the player is suggested or notified that 45 unit games are scheduled to be executed (Figure 73 (d)). In order to realize this notification mode, the small hit types of reserved 1 to 4 are judged in advance (pre-determination) during the small hit game executed during the fluctuation or after the fluctuation has stopped, and the notification mode is decided based on the result of the look-ahead judgment (pre-determination result). In this example, first, 5 rounds of small hit V jackpot game are executed triggered by the change, 5 rounds of small hit V jackpot game are executed triggered by the consumption of reserved 1, 5 rounds of small hit V jackpot game are executed triggered by the consumption of reserved 2, and 5 rounds of small hit V jackpot game are executed triggered by the consumption of reserved 3, so that 20 rounds are scheduled to be executed up to this point. And, since the small hit V jackpot game executed triggered by the consumption of reserved 3 is small hit V jackpot game A, which is the transition trigger to the high base state, after the end of this small hit V jackpot game A, the reserved can be saved up to the upper limit again. Therefore, since four new reserved balls will be accumulated during the consumption of reserved ball 4 that is consumed after the end of this small hit V big hit game A, five rounds of small hit V big hit games will be executed triggered by the consumption of reserved ball 4, and four small hit V big hit games will be executed triggered by the consumption of the newly accumulated four reserved balls, which is "5 rounds x 4 = 20 rounds". Although there are some parts that depend on the player's game progress, such as whether or not the ball enters a specific area and whether or not reserved balls occur, these are provisional values (values assuming that the player fires the game ball aiming at a specific area and always accumulates reserved balls to the upper limit in a high base state), it is clear at this point that a total of 45 rounds are scheduled to be executed, so an image indicating that 45 stars have been acquired can be displayed. In addition, as a modified example, the image of acquiring stars may be executed during fluctuation or small hit games. Furthermore, instead of displaying an image indicating that 45 stars have been acquired as in this example, an image indicating that 30 stars have been acquired may be displayed, and then an image indicating that 15 stars have been acquired during a new variation, new small win game, or new small win V big win game that is executed after that. In other words, instead of announcing the entire number of rounds scheduled to be executed in a single notification, the number of rounds scheduled to be executed may be configured to be notified at multiple times.

After that, the small hit V jackpot game proceeds. The number of stars acquired is always displayed, and the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit V jackpot game is also cumulatively displayed (Fig. 73 (e)). Since the first small hit V jackpot game was small hit V jackpot game B, the end of the small hit V jackpot game transitions to a low base state. Then, of reserves 1 to 4, reserve 1 is consumed, and reserve 2 before reserve 1 is consumed shifts to reserve 1, reserve 3 before reserve 1 is consumed shifts to reserve 1, and reserve 4 before reserve 1 is consumed shifts to reserve 3. In addition, the second special pattern is displayed as reserve 1 is consumed (Fig. 73 (f)). After that, the fluctuation stops, and a simple pattern corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern fluctuation is displayed, and "3V3" is displayed. Then, the small win game is executed, and the instruction display "Aim for V!!!" is displayed in small letters, which is an instruction to shoot the game ball at the big prize opening P751 (specific area of the big prize opening) (Figure 73 (g)). After that, the second small win V big prize game starts (Figure 73 (h)).

After that, just like before, the second small hit V jackpot game ends, and then the third small hit V jackpot game starts and ends (Fig. 74(i)). After that, just like before, the reserved game that triggers the fourth small hit V jackpot game is consumed, and then the fourth small hit V jackpot game starts and ends (Fig. 74(j), (k), (l), (m)). Since this fourth small hit V jackpot game is small hit V jackpot game A, after the end of the small hit V jackpot game, the game transitions to a high base state. Therefore, it becomes possible to accumulate the reserved game related to the second special pattern to the upper limit again, and in order to suggest or inform this, a caption image saying "Charge!" is displayed in the foreground, and circle images corresponding to the execution or non-execution of the change and the occurrence or non-occurrence of reserved games 1 to 4 are also displayed again (Fig. 74(n)).

After that, four reserved symbols related to the second special symbol are generated, and a small display of "Charge Complete!" is displayed to indicate that the reserved symbol has reached the upper limit. Then, the fluctuation stops, and a simple symbol corresponding to the stopped fluctuation of the second special symbol is displayed, and "6V6" is displayed (Fig. 74 (o)). As for reserved symbols 1 to 4 that are reserved this time, reserved symbols 1, 3, and 4 are reserved symbols that trigger the execution of small win game B, and reserved symbol 2 is reserved symbols that trigger the execution of small win game A (reservation symbol 3, which is consumed after the execution of the small win V jackpot game, which is executed with the consumption of reserved symbol 2 as a trigger, will result in only one reserved symbol being accumulated, and three reserved symbols can be newly generated, so "5 rounds x 3" will be additionally executed), during the jackpot start demo of the fifth small win V jackpot game, an image is displayed indicating that 15 additional stars have been acquired, and the image of the number of stars acquired so far is updated from 45 to 60 (Fig. 74 (p)).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko game machine P in the 9-1 embodiment can suggest or inform the player in advance that a number of small hit V jackpot games are scheduled to be played that exceed the upper limit (4) of the reserved number of second special symbols, and it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is not known how long the round will last (it is not known how many times the small hit V jackpot games will be played, and the small hit V jackpot games will continue until all the reserved numbers related to the second special symbols become small hit V jackpot games B).

[Tenth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment to the ninth embodiment, various pachinko gaming machines P with various playability have been described, but the tenth embodiment is an example of a machine in which further improvements have been made to the playability and presentation content of special games and high base states in order to further improve playability. In the following, only the differences from the base technology and this embodiment will be described in detail, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the tenth embodiment, the elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or this embodiment will be given the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment has the same board configuration as that in Fig. 53 and employs the "small win rush" specification. The pachinko gaming machine P in the tenth embodiment has the following features.
(A) The results of the lottery for the first special pattern are “win” and “lose”.
(B) The results of the lottery for the second special pattern are “win”, “small win”, or “lose”.
(C) The probability of a jackpot in a low probability state is 1/300, the probability of a jackpot in a high probability state is 1/50, and the probability of a small jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state is 1/1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted.
(E) In the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special pattern, so in these game states, the first special pattern has a relatively shorter change time than the second special pattern (the average change time of the first special pattern is 20 seconds in the low probability low base state and 3 seconds in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, but the average time of the second special pattern is 10 minutes in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, and high probability high base state).
(F) In the high probability low base state, the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, so in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter change time than the first special symbol (the average change time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds in the high probability low base state, but the average change time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes in the high probability low base state).
(G) As the jackpot pattern for the first special pattern, jackpot pattern A (10R special jackpot), which triggers a transition to a high probability low base state in special state until the next time, is selected with a 30% probability, jackpot pattern B (5R special jackpot), which triggers a transition to a high probability high base state in special state until the next time, is selected with a 30% probability, and jackpot pattern C (5R normal jackpot), which triggers a transition to a low probability high base state for 100 spins, is selected with a 40% probability.
(H) As the jackpot pattern related to the second special pattern, jackpot pattern D (10R special jackpot), which will be in special probability until the next time, and which will trigger a transition to a high probability low base state if won in a high probability low base state, and which will trigger a transition to a high probability high base state if won in a high probability high base state, will be selected with a 60% probability, and jackpot pattern E (10R normal jackpot), which will trigger a transition to a low probability high base state for 100 spins, will be selected with a 40% probability.

In this way, the pachinko game machine P in the tenth embodiment is characterized in that the base state to which the machine transitions after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern D is different depending on the base state when the jackpot pattern D is won as the second special pattern (when the variation of the second special pattern won by the jackpot pattern D begins). Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P in the tenth embodiment is configured such that the round interval (the closing time of the large prize winning port P751 between rounds) during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern D is different depending on the base state when the jackpot pattern D is won as the second special pattern (when the variation of the second special pattern won by the jackpot pattern D begins). Specifically, FIG. 75(a) is the round interval of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot pattern D is won in a high probability low base state, and is set to 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, FIG. 75(b) shows the time between rounds of the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot pattern D is hit in a high-probability, high-base state, and is set to 3.5 seconds. Note that in both FIG. 75(a) and (b), the opening time of the jackpot slot P751 is the same for all rounds, at 30 seconds.

By configuring as described above, even if the same jackpot symbol is won, it is possible to vary the progress (speed of progress) of the special game that is executed afterwards. In the pachinko game machine P of the tenth embodiment, by continuing to win the jackpot symbol D in a high probability low base state, it is possible to speed up the progress of the jackpot game, realizing a speedy gameplay, and by continuing to win the jackpot symbol D in a high probability high base state, it is possible to slow down the progress of the jackpot, realizing a gradual gameplay, and realizing a gameplay with a sense of speed.

The high probability low base state is a small win rush state, where a cycle of "change of second special symbol → small win → small win game → change of second special symbol → ..." is repeated, but to ensure that there is no sense of incongruity even when a big win game is played in between, it is preferable to make the "time from the start of the small win change of the second special symbol in the high probability low base state to the opening of the big win port P751 in the small win game" approximately the same as the inter-round time (1.5 seconds) of the big win game that is played when the big win symbol D is won in the high probability low base state.

As a variant, the time between rounds of the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot pattern D is won in a low base state (e.g., low probability low base state) can be 3.5 seconds, and the time between rounds of the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot pattern D is won in a high base state (e.g., low probability high base state or high probability high base state) can be 1.5 seconds. If configured in this way, it is possible to speed up the progress of consecutive jackpot games and realize gameplay that allows a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short period of time.

As another variation, the time between rounds of the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot pattern D is won in a low base state (e.g., low probability low base state) can be 1.5 seconds, and the time between rounds of the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot pattern D is won in a high base state (e.g., low probability high base state or high probability high base state) can be 3.5 seconds. If configured in this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the progress of the jackpot game during consecutive wins to be slowed down and the consecutive wins to be enjoyed for a long time.

The present invention has been described above based on the present embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, and the tenth embodiment. Each embodiment is merely an example, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible in the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine, P1 Outer frame, P2 Front frame, P3 Glass frame,
P4 Back set unit, P5 Game board, P40 Main control board,
P41: Performance control board, P42: Image control board, P43: Payout control board,
P44 Power supply board, P47 Power switch, P48 RAM clear switch,
P49 Setting key switch, P50 Main control display device,
P51 first special symbol display device, P52 second special symbol display device,
P80: performance display device; P81: performance operation means (P380: performance operation unit;
P381 performance button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 Performance lamp (P350 Frame lamp, P550 Board lamp),
P83 Speaker (P141 Skirting panel speaker, P371 Upper speaker),
P560: Production equipment; P710: First start winning device;
P720 Second start winning device, P730 General winning device,
P740 Normal operation gate device, P750 Large prize entrance device P755 Special electric device, P770 Normal electric device

Claims (1)

A starting winning hole into which a game ball can be entered;
A large prize opening that can be in an open state or a closed state;
A winning/losing determination means for executing a winning/losing determination when a game ball enters a starting hole;
A symbol display device that displays a special symbol indicating the result of the winning or losing judgment in a variable and stationary manner;
a special game execution means for executing a special game involving the opening of a big prize opening when the result of the win/loss determination is a win;
Equipped with
As a display of a pattern that shows the result of the winning/losing judgment in a dramatic manner, a first pattern change display and a stop display, and a second pattern change display and a stop display can be displayed,
The first symbol can be temporarily stopped during the display of the special symbol, while the second symbol is continuously displayed even during the temporary stop display of the first symbol.
The first symbol is configured to be displayed overlapping with a predetermined preview performance, while the second symbol is configured not to be displayed overlapping with the predetermined preview performance,
The first symbol is configured to have a different display position depending on whether the current presentation format is the first presentation format or the second presentation format, while the second symbol is configured to have the same display position whether the current presentation format is the first presentation format or the second presentation format,
The variable display of the second symbol is a variable display that switches between a plurality of types of switching modes in a predetermined order,
The multiple types of switching modes include a first mode which is a first switching mode in a predetermined sequence, a middle mode which is a switching mode in the middle of the predetermined sequence, and a last mode which is a last switching mode in the predetermined sequence,
The second symbol is switched to the initial state when the special symbol starts to change, then the second symbol is switched to the intermediate state, then the final state, and then the same initial state is switched to and displayed repeatedly, so that the switching display in a predetermined order can be repeatedly executed.
The system has a plurality of types of presentation formats and is configured to be able to output background music corresponding to the types of presentation formats,
At least in the second presentation format, the predetermined BGM can be continuously output without interruption from the end of the variable display of the special pattern to the start of the next variable display of the special pattern,
When the first symbol is displayed again after being temporarily stopped, the output of the predetermined BGM that has been continued is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or a different BGM from the predetermined BGM is output.
A performance display according to the type of performance format can be executed, and in a second performance format, a performance display according to the second performance format can be executed;
In the second presentation format, when a development presentation is executed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, a presentation display corresponding to the development presentation can be executed instead of a presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format during the execution of the development presentation,
In the second presentation format, when a development presentation is executed after the start of the variable display of a special pattern, and a predetermined presentation is executed after the development presentation is executed to end the development presentation, it is possible to end the presentation display corresponding to the development presentation during the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed, and to execute the presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format again, but even in a specified situation in which the presentation display corresponding to the second presentation format is executed again during the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed, the specified BGM is not output, and in a specific situation in which the variable display of the special pattern for which the development presentation has been executed ends and the variable display of the next special pattern begins, the specified BGM is output from the beginning,
A specific type of first pattern among a plurality of types of first patterns variably displayed in a specific pattern row among a plurality of pattern rows is configured not to change into a predetermined pattern, or to have a relatively low expectation of changing into a predetermined pattern compared to other patterns.
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by the above.

Images